Nokia of America CMP-40 Cellular Base Station Transceiver User Manual users manual 1

Download:
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]
Document ID	161958
Application ID	LjX1Oyr2QTdDgL93FRsVwQ==
Document Description	users manual 1
Short Term Confidential	No
Permanent Confidential	No
Supercede	No
Document Type	User Manual
Display Format	Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize	166.48kB (2080994 bits)
Date Submitted	2001-07-27 00:00:00
Date Available	2001-07-26 00:00:00
Creation Date	2000-09-21 04:32:05
Producing Software	Acrobat Distiller 4.05 for Sparc Solaris
Document Lastmod	2001-06-20 12:27:01
Document Title	users manual 1

APPLICANT: Lucent Technologies
EXHIBIT 3
FCC ID: AS5CMP-40
EXHIBIT 3
Section 2.1033 (c)(3) INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A copy of the installation and operating instructions to be furnished the user. A draft copy of the
instructions may be submitted if the actual document is not available. The actual document shall be
furnished to the FCC when it becomes available.
Response
A copy of the “AUTOPLEX Cellular Telecommunications Systems, System 1000, Series II Cell Site
Description, Operation, and Maintenance” manual is attached to this exhibit.
This is the manual for the Series II cell site with EDRU transceivers. Because the SBEDRU is backward
compatible to the EDRU, this manual is also applicable to the SBEDRU. Therefore, Lucent Technologies
will not issue a new manual. Customers using the SBEDRU will be provided with this current document.
Page 1 of 1
AUTOPLEX® Cellular
Telecommunications Systems
System 1000
Series II Cell Site
Description, Operation, and
Maintenance
401-660-100
Issue 11
August 2000
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
This document contains proprietary information of
Lucent Technologies and is not to be disclosed or used
except in accordance with applicable agreements
Copyright © 2000 Lucent Technologies
Unpublished and Not for Publication
All Rights Reserved
This material is protected by the copyright and trade secret laws of the United States and other countries. It
may not be reproduced, distributed or altered in any fashion by any entity (either internal or external to Lucent
Technologies), except in accordance with applicable agreements, contracts, or licensing, without the express
written consent of the Customer Training and Information Products organization and the business
management owner of the material.
For permission to reproduce or distribute please contact:
Product Development Manager
1 888-LTINFO6 (1 888-584-6366)
Notice
Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time
of printing. However, information is subject to change.
Mandatory Customer Information
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement
None for this document but here to illustrate the feature.
Security
This is a sample security statement.
Trademarks
Warranty
Lucent Technologies provides no warranty for this product.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
Lucent Technologies Wants Your Opinion
Lucent Technologies welcomes your feedback on this document. Your comments can be of great value in
helping us improve this document.
AUTOPLEX Cellular Telecommunications Systems System 1000 Series II Cell Site Description,
Operation, and Maintenance
1. Please rate the effectiveness of this document in the following areas:
Excellent
Good
Fair
Poor
Cut Here
Ease of finding information
Clarity
Completeness
Accuracy
Organization
Appearance
Examples
Illustrations
Overall satisfaction
2. Please check the ways that you think this document could be improved:
Improve the preface/introduction.
Improve the table of contents.
Improve the organization.
Include more illustrations.
Add more examples.
Add more detail.
Make it more concise.
Add more step-by-step procedures/tutorials.
Add more troubleshooting information.
Make it less technical.
Add more or better quick reference aids.
Improve the index.
Please add details about your major concerns.
3. What do you like most about this document?
4. Write any comments below or on an attached sheet.
If we may contact you concerning your comments, please complete the following:
Name:
Company/Organization:
Telephone Number: (
Date:
Address:
After completing this form, please return it (postage-free) to the address on the reverse side. Thank you.
10
Do Not Cut Fold Here And Tape
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
IN THE
UNITED STATES
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS
PERMIT NO. 5
NEW PROVIDENCE N. J.
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE
Lucent Technologies
Customer Training and Information Products
1000 E. WARRENVILLE ROAD
IHC 1A-410
P.O. BOX 3013
NAPERVILLE, IL 60566-7013
Contents
Introduction
1-1
■
Contents
1-1
■
Introduction
1-2
General
1-2
Organization
1-2
1-5
Introduction to Series II Cell Technology
2-1
■
Contents
2-1
■
Introduction
2-2
Overview
2-2
■
Advanced Mobile Phone Service (AMPS)
2-3
■
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
2-4
TDMA Description
2-4
TDMA Call Processing
2-4
Communication From TDMA Cell Site to TDMA Subscriber Unit2-5
Communication From TDMA Subscriber Unit to TDMA Cell Site2-6
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
2-6
CDMA Cell Site Description
2-7
■
Cellular Frequency Spectrum Allocation
2-10
■
Advantages of Series II Hardware and Software
2-11
■
Cell Site Equipment Functional Overview
2-12
Equipment Frames
2-12
Radio Channel Frames and Radio Equipment Functional Overview2-13
Facilities Interface Frame (FIF)
2-18
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Contents
Figure 2-5.
2-19
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
3-1
■
Contents
3-1
■
TDMA Overview
3-3
TDMA/AMPS Dual-Mode Operation
3-3
TDMA System Access
3-4
TDMA Radio Interface
3-4
Radio Channel Types
3-4
Digital Control Channel
3-5
Digital Control Channel (DCCH) Forward Link, or
Downlink, Logical Channels
3-5
DCCH Feature Offerings
3-6
Channel Organization for Forward DCCH Superframes3-6
Digital Traffic Channels
3-7
DTC Dedicated Control Channels
3-7
Digital Verification Color Code Channels
3-8
Handoff and Handoff Types
3-8
Mobile-Assisted Handoff Procedure
3-9
■
HandOff Based on Interference (HOBIT) / INterference
Look-Ahead (INLA) Enhancements3-11
■
Switch-Based TDMA Voice Coder/ Decoder (Vocoder)
Facilities Concentration
3-15
3-15
Cell Sites Supported by the Switch-Based Vocoder feature3-18
Operation, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) 3-19
Feature Activation and Installation
■
Separate Access Thresholds for DCCHs and DTCs (SEPA)3-23
■
Two-Branch Intelligent Anntenna (TBIA)
EDRU and DRM implementation of TBIA
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
vi
3-22
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
3-27
3-27
Contents
TBIA Performance
3-27
TBIA Availability
3-28
TBIA Activation
3-28
3-29
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
4-1
■
Contents
4-1
■
CDMA Overview
4-4
Transition to CDMA
4-4
CDMA Advantages Compared with AMPS and TDMA 4-5
Capacity
4-7
■
CDMA/AMPS Dual-Mode Operation
4-8
■
Lucent Technologies CDMA Architecture
4-9
■
■
Hardware Requirements
4-9
Speech-Handling Equipment at the DCS
4-10
Call Setup
4-12
Radio Equipment
4-14
Cabinet Configurations
4-15
Radios and Radio Equipment
4-24
CRTU Components
4-31
CDMA Series II Configuration Options
4-34
Timing Requirements
4-35
New Features and Upgrades
4-40
Cell Site Synchronization Failure Warning &
Correction: Phase 1
4-40
New CDMA Cluster Controller (CCC) Board with
Increased SRAM
4-40
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) Double Density Growth Frame (DDGF)4-42
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
vii
Contents
CDMA DDGF Description
4-42
DDGF Architecture
4-42
Using the DDGF in a Series II Analog Cell Site
4-47
RFTG
4-52
CDMA DDGF Power Requirements, Distribution, and Calibration4-55
Grounding Requirements
4-59
Connecting the DDGF to Frames in a Series II
4-63
CDMA Radio Test Unit Module and Interface
4-69
Alarms
4-73
4-76
Series II Cellular CDMA Adjunct to Small Cells
5-1
■
Contents
5-1
■
CDMA Adjunct
5-3
Overview
5-3
High Level Interface for the CDMA Adjunct
5-3
Supported Technologies
5-4
Traffic Capacity
5-5
RF Coverage Area
5-5
Physical Aspects of CDMA Adjunct
5-5
CDMA Adjunct Physical Positioning and External Equipment5-8
CDMA Adjunct to Host Cell Inter-frame Hardware Interfaces5-10
RF Distribution Paths
5-11
Radio Testing
5-16
Transmit Amplifiers
5-19
Input Voltage and Power
5-20
Environmental, Safety, and Handling Requirements
5-21
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
viii
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Contents
UL and Cell Site A
5-23
Suggested DFI and DS-1 Configurations for use with the CDMA Adjunct5-24
Table 5-7.
5-25
Series II Cellular Digital Packet Data (CDPD)
■
Contents
6-1
■
CDPD Overview
6-3
Interfaces
6-3
Typical Configurations
6-6
Hardware
6-8
Detailed Diagrams of Supported Configurations
6-10
Grounding and Lightning Protection
6-23
Related Documentation
6-23
Table 6-2.
6-1
6-25
Mini, Micro, and Fiber-Link Series II Cell Site Options 7-1
■
Contents
7-1
■
General
7-2
■
Series IIe Cell Site
7-4
■
Compact Base Station (CBS)
7-6
■
CBS Documents
7-7
Series IIm T1/E1 MiniCell
7-8
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
ix
Contents
■
Installing the TRTU and DRU(s)
7-8
Installing the T-EDRU and EDRU(s)
7-8
Cabinet Descriptions
7-8
Series IIm T1/E1 Minicell Documentation
7-8
Series IImm T1/E1 MicroCell
7-9
AMPS/TDMA Mix with DRU Radios
7-9
AMPS/TDMA Mix with EDRU Radios
7-10
Radio Self Power Upgade
7-10
Restoring Cell to Service
7-12
f.
7-13
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
8-1
■
Contents
8-1
■
General
8-4
■
Radio Channel Frame (RCF) Description
8-5
Series II Cell Site Radio Control Complex (RCC) Buses8-11
Series II Cell Site Radio Channel Unit Shelves ED-2R833-308-17
Radio Shelf Power Upgrade
8-20
Series II Cell Site Fan Panel Assembly
ED-2R824-31
8-28
Series II Cell Site Radio Test Unit Shelf 3
ED-2R835-30
8-29
Series II Cell Site Radio Channel Unit Shelves 4 and 5 ED-2R834-308-30
Series II Cell Site Interconnection Panel Assembly ED-2R831-308-31
Series II Cell Site Busbar Assembly Unit, KS24355, L18-39
■
Series II Mobile Switching Center (MSC) Interface
8-41
■
Series II Cell Site Linear Amplifier Frame (LAF)
8-44
Series II Cell Site Linear Amplifier Circuit J41660CA-1 8-46
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Contents
Series II Cell Site Linear Amplifier Module ED-2R840-308-52
Series II Cell Site Linear Amplifier Unit (LAU)
8-53
Series II Cell Site, 20-LAM LAC Versus 10-LAM LAC 8-55
Series II Cell Site Linearizer Unit ED-2R841-30
8-56
■
Series II Cell Site Frame Interface Assembly ED-2R838-308-61
■
Series II Cell Site Antenna Interface Frame (AIF), Overview8-64
Series II Cell Site Reference Frequency Generator (RFG) Shelf8-69
Series II Cell Site Radio Switch Panel
8-76
Series II Cell Site Receive, Alarm, and Power Distribution Panel ED 2R851-30
8-76
Series II Cell Site Receive and Power Distribution Panel ED-2R853-318-77
Series II Cell Site Duplexer Filter Panel
ED-2R848-31
8-77
Series II Cell Site Receive Filter Panel
ED-2R846-31
8-78
Series II Cell Site Transmit Filter Panel ED-2R847-31 8-79
■
Series II Cell Site Equipment Summary
8-83
Series II Cell Site, Related Documentation
Table 8-16.
8-84
8-86
Radios
9-1
■
Contents
9-1
■
Introduction
9-3
■
AMPS Radio Units and Personality Types
9-4
■
Radio Channel Unit (RCU)
9-4
Radio Test Unit (RTU)
9-7
TDMA Radio Units and Personality Types
Digital Radio Unit (DRU)
9-8
9-8
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
xi
Contents
Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU)
9-8
Digital Radio Personality Types
9-8
DRU - Detailed Description
9-10
EDRU - Detailed Description
9-11
Series II Cell Site, Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU) Interfaces9-14
Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU) Reliability, Federal Communications Commission (FCC), and Safety Features
9-16
Directional Setup and Beacon Channels
9-16
TDMA Radio Test Unit (TRTU)
9-17
Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU), Feature IDentification (FID) #2775
9-18
■
CDMA Radio Maintenance Units and Personality Types
Pilot/Sync/Access Channel Element (CE)
9-24
Page CE
9-24
Traffic CE
9-24
Orthogonal-channel Noise Simulator CE
9-25
Figure 9-2.
10
9-23
9-26
Antenna Hardware Configurations
10-1
■
Contents
10-1
■
Introduction
10-3
Fixed Antenna Connection Configuration
10-5
3-Sector Directive Plus Omni Antenna Switching Configuration10-8
6-Sector Directive Plus Omni Antenna Switching with Dual-Radio Solution10-9
3- or 6-Sector Directional Antenna Switching with Simulcast Setup10-9
■
All-Omnidirectional Configuration
10-9
All-Directional Configuration
10-10
Radio Transmission and Reception
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
xii
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
10-13
Contents
RF Transmitter Interfaces
10-13
RF Receiver Interfaces
10-14
2 Branch Intelligent Antenna, Feature IDentification (FID) #314510-14
The Adaptive Interference Rejection Technique
11
10-15
10-18
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections 11-1
■
Contents
11-1
■
Introduction
11-5
■
Radio Control Complex (RCC)
11-5
Digital Signal (DS1) Units
11-6
Digital Facilities Interface (DFI) Units
11-6
Clock And Tone (CAT) Units
11-7
Radio Frame Set
11-7
RCF Architecture and Bus Structure
11-9
Data Link and Voice
Path Connections11-14
T1/E1 Communications
11-14
■
Line Interface Connections at the Cell
11-17
■
Data Link Configurations
11-21
■
One DS1/DFI Unit and One Data Link
11-21
One DS1/DFI Unit and Two Data Links
11-21
Two DS1/DFI Units and Two Data Links
11-21
Remote Data Link Reconfiguration
11-21
External Interfaces to the Series II Cell Site
11-22
Voice Trunks from the Digital Cellular Switch (DCS)
11-22
Time Division Multiplexed Buses
11-22
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
xiii
Contents
■
TDM Bus Communications: the Archangel/Angel Concept 11-26
Angel
11-27
Archangel
11-27
■
Sanity And Control Interface
11-28
■
NPE and SNPE
11-31
■
Synchronization of the Cell Site to the MSC
11-32
■
■
■
TDMCKSEL
11-36
TDMCKFAIL
11-36
TDMCLK
11-36
TDMFR
11-36
TDMSYNC1
11-36
TDMSYNC2
11-36
Mobile Switching Center (MSC) to Cell Site Communications11-37
DS1, DFI, and CAT Circuit Descriptions
11-38
DS1 (TN171) Circuit Description
11-38
DFI (TN3500) Circuit Description
11-38
DFI (TN1713B) Circuit Operation
11-40
DFI Initialization Message for T1 Operation
11-42
D4 or ESF Framing
■
DFI Initialization Message for E1 Operation
11-42
11-48
CEPT Framing with or without CRC-4 Error Checking 11-48
■
CCS or CAS Signaling Mode
11-48
HDB3 or Transparent Line Format
11-50
Enable or Disable On-demand LLB or BLB Control
11-50
Select Synchronization Reference
11-50
Select Idle Code
11-50
DFI Network-Update Talk Message
11-50
DFI Network-Update Listen Message
11-50
DFI Status Indicators
Red LED
11-51
Yellow LED
11-51
Green LED
11-51
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
xiv
11-51
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Contents
■
CAT (TN170) Circuit Description
11-52
■
Bus Clock Generation and Monitoring for the TDM Bus
11-55
■
Maintenance Tone Generation
11-56
Maintenance Tone Detection and Measurement
■
CAT Status Indicators
11-57
11-58
Red LED
11-58
Green LED
11-58
■
Automatic Recovery Actions
11-59
■
Hardware Error Handling Strategy
11-60
Immediate Action
11-60
All Tests Pass (ATP) Analysis
11-60
Single Time-period Analysis
11-60
Fail/Pass Analysis
11-60
Leaky Bucket Analysis
11-61
■
RCC Hardware Errors and Recovery Actions
11-62
■
DS1/DFI Hardware Errors and Recovery Actions
11-63
DS1/DFI and T1 Errors—Detailed Description
11-64
■
■
Loss Of Signal (LOS)
11-64
Blue Alarm
11-64
Red Alarm
11-64
Major Alarm
11-65
Yellow Alarm
11-65
Fan Alarms
11-66
Preamp Fan
11-66
LineariZeR Fan Procedure
11-66
LAU Fan Procedure
11-67
Measuring the Linear Amplifier Unit (LAU) Fan Voltage11-67
■
■
DS1 Errors
11-68
Minor Alarm
11-68
Misframe Count
11-68
DFI and E1 Errors - Detailed Description
11-69
Loss Of Signal (LOS)
11-69
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
xv
Contents
■
Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)
11-69
Loss of Frame Alignment (LFA)
11-69
Loss of Multiframe Alignment (LMA)
11-70
10e-3 Error-ratio Alarm
11-70
Remote Frame Alarm (RFA)
11-70
Remote Multiframe Alarm (RMA)
11-71
10e-6 Error-Ratio Alarm
11-71
Slip Count
11-71
CAT Hardware Errors and Recovery Actions
Call-Processing Errors and Recovery Actions
12
11-72
Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests 12-1
■
Contents
12-1
■
Maintenance Process
12-3
■
Maintenance Objective
12-3
Maintenance Activities
12-3
Preventive Maintenance
12-3
Routine Maintenance
12-3
Maintenance Assumptions
12-4
Routine Maintenance Procedures List
12-5
Fan Screen Cleaning
12-6
Radio Performance Testing
12-7
Radio Test Overview
12-7
Radio Pretest Procedure
12-7
Cable Loss Measurement
12-9
Power Measurement
12-12
Voice 1004 Hz Deviation Measurement
12-13
Post Test Procedure
12-15
Transmitter Output Power Verification
12-16
Transmitter Output Power Adjustment
12-16
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
xvi
11-72
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Contents
Table 12-8.
13
14
12-40
Enhanced Maintenance Features
13-1
■
Contents
13-1
■
Improved Boot Read-Only Memory (ROM) / Non-Volatile Memory (NVM) Update
13-2
■
NVM Image for Single-Board RCU (SBRCU)
13-3
■
Keying Multiple RCU Transmitters
13-4
■
Opening Transmit and Receive Audio
13-5
■
Cell Site Power Measurements
13-6
■
Transmit and Receive Audio Level Measurements
13-7
■
Supervisory Audio and Signaling Tone Detection
13-8
■
Remote Data Link Reconfiguration
13-9
13-10
Corrective Maintenance - Introduction
14-1
■
■
Contents
14-1
Status Display Pages
14-2
ECP Craft Shell
14-2
Maintenance Request Administrator
14-3
Maintenance Units
14-4
AMPS Radio Maintenance Units and Personality Types14-6
TDMA Radio Maintenance Units and Personality Types14-7
CDMA Radio Maintenance Units and Personality Types14-9
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
xvii
Contents
■
Maintenance States
Maintenance states
Figure 14-3.
15
14-12
14-12
14-14
Corrective Maintenance using MRA
15-1
■
Contents
15-1
■
Maintenance Request Administrator (MRA)
15-2
■
Diagnose
15-3
Related Documents
15-4
Stop a Diagnostic
15-4
Obtain Status
15-4
Related Documents
15-4
Qualifiers Associated with the Out-Of-Service (OOS) State15-4
■
Dual Server Group Out-Of-Service (OOS) Limits
New RC/V Translation Parameters
■
Remove/Restore/Switch Actions
15-6
15-7
Conditional Remove
15-7
Unconditional Remove
15-11
Conditional and Unconditional Restore
15-13
Related Documents
15-16
Switch to a Redundant Unit
15-16
Related Documents
15-17
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
xviii
15-6
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Contents
Figure 15-11.
16
15-28
Corrective Maintenance using Status Display Pages 16-1
■
Contents
16-1
■
Status Display Pages
16-3
2130 - Cell Site Status Summary Display Page
16-3
2131 - Cell Equipment Status Display Page
16-5
2131 - Removing Cell Site Units
16-9
2131 - Restoring Cell Site Units
16-11
2131 - Diagnosing Cell Equipment
16-12
2131 - Generating Cell Equipment Status Reports
16-14
2132 - Cell Software Status Display Page
16-15
2133 - Cell Voice Radio (VR) Status Display Page
16-18
2134 - Cell DS-1 Unit Status Display Page
16-24
2134 - Removing/Restoring/Diagnosing or
Generating a Status Report for DS1/DFI Units
16-26
2135 -Cell LC SU /BC Status Display Page
16-27
2135 - Removing/Restoring/ Diagnosing or Generating a Status Report for Locate or Setup Radios
16-31
2136 - Cell LAC Status Display Page
16-33
2137 - Cell OTU/LMT Status Display Page
16-33
2138 - Cell CDMA Equipment
Status Display Page
16-36
2139 - Cell CCC CCU Status Display Page
16-42
2235 - Cell DCCH Status Display Page
16-48
2235 - Restoring/Diagnosing or Generating Status Reports for DCCH Radios
16-50
Dual Server Group Out-Of-Service (OOS) Limits
16-51
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
xix
Contents
17
Corrective Maintenance using ECP Craft Interface
17-1
■
Contents
17-1
■
ECP Craft Shell
17-3
Generating Cell Site Units/Radios/Alarms Status Reports17-3
Removing Cell Site Units
17-4
Restoring Cell Site Units
17-6
Diagnosing Cell Site Units
17-8
Stopping Cell Site Unit Diagnostics
17-10
Moving Cell Site Radios
17-11
Moving CDMA Calls to a Specified
Channel Element
17-12
Swapping CDMA Spectrum to/from
AMPS/TDMA
17-14
Generating Status Reports of Spectrum Swap of CDMA to/from AMPS/TDMA
17-15
Running Cell Site Audits
17-16
Diagnosing Cell Site Data Links
17-17
Stopping Cell Site Data Link Diagnostics
17-19
Diagnosing Cell Site Trunks Associated with a Server Group and Antenna Face
(Non-CDMA)
17-20
Stopping Diagnostics on Cell Site Trunks Associated with a Server Group and
Antenna Face
17-21
Requesting Cell Site Data Link NVM Updates
17-22
Requesting Cell Site Hardware Unit NVM Updates
17-23
Initializing Cell Sites
17-24
Initializing, Setting Up, and Using OCNS at CDMA Cell Sites17-26
Expansion of Maintenance Request Administrator (MRA) and Technician Interface Information Fields (MRAINFO/TIINFO), Feature IDentification (FID)
#3461.0
17-28
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
xx
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Contents
18
17-30
Alarm Collection and Reporting
18-1
■
Contents
18-1
■
Introduction
18-3
■
Equipment Alarms
18-4
User-Defined Alarms
18-14
Increased Cell Alarms Enhancement
18-16
New Hardware for the Increased Cell Alarms Enhancement18-17
New Translations for the Increased Cell Alarms Enhancement18-18
■
Directional Setup
18-18
Alarm Scanning Redesign
18-21
Introduction
18-21
Scope
18-22
Customer Perspective
18-23
Features
18-23
Cell Site Functions
18-23
MSC Functions
18-24
CDMA Transmit Unit (CTU) and Receive Unit (RU) Separate Alarms18-27
Performance & Capacity
19
18-29
18-30
Cell Site Hardware LED Descriptions
19-1
■
Contents
19-1
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
xxi
Contents
■
LED Descriptions Table
Table 19-1.
20
19-2
19-10
AMapping Status Display Page Unit Numbers to Hardware20-1
■
Contents
20-1
■
Introduction
20-2
Logical-to-Physical Mappings of Generic Cell Site Units20-2
Logical-to-Physical Mappings of CDMA-Specific Cell Site Units20-8
Figure 20-15.
21
20-20
CDMA Maintenance
■
Contents
21-1
■
Introduction
21-3
CRTU and CDMA Functional Testing
21-3
CRTU Components
21-4
Subscriber and Feature Information Form
21-8
Cell Equipage Component Location Form
21-9
2132 - Cell Software Status Display Page
21-10
■
Command and Report Changes to Support the CRTU
21-12
■
CRTU Growth Procedures
21-14
CDMA Functional Tests
21-15
Default Interval Values
21-17
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
xxii
21-1
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Contents
Transmit and Receive Test Paths
21-17
MOST-Terminated Test Calls
21-18
Overhead Channel Functional Test
21-19
Functional Test Errors and System Recovery Actions 21-25
22
General Errors
21-25
Overhead Channel Functional Test Errors
21-25
21-29
Linear Amplifier Circuit (LAC) Maintenance
22-1
■
Contents
22-1
■
LAC Maintenance Procedures
22-3
LAC Alarm Summary: LACSUM
22-4
LAC Alarm Detailed Report: LACALM
22-5
Interpreting the LAC Alarm Reports
22-7
Troubleshooting Procedures at the Cell Site
22-13
LAM Alarm Procedures
22-15
Preamp Alarm Procedure
22-19
LAM Bias Fault Procedure
22-33
Fan Alarm Procedure
22-34
Linear Amplifier Circuit Removal/Installation Procedures22-59
Linear Amplifier Circuit Fans Removal/Installation Procedures22-69
21.
22-90
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
xxiii
Contents
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
xxiv
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Figures
Introduction
Introduction to Series II Cell Technology
2-1
TDMA - DRU/ EDRU To/From Subscriber
2-6
2-2
CDMA System Components
2-8
2-3
Cell Site Architecture
2-13
2-4
Radio Channel Frames
2-14
2-5
Series II CDMA Radio Channel Frame (RCF)
2-17
Figure 2-5.
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
4-1
High-Level View of the Lucent Technologies CDMA Architecture4-9
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
xxv
Figures
4-2
Series II Cell Site Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Communications Path4-13
4-3
CDMA Cell Site Equipment
4-4
Radio Frame Set Having Two CDMA Growth RCFs (TDMs install "red stripe up")
4-18
4-5
Physical View of TDM Buses at the CDMA Series II Cell Site (TDMs install "red
stripe up") (Sheet 1 of 3)4-19
4-6
Physical View of TDM Buses at the CDMA Series II Cell Site (TDMs install "red
stripe up") (Sheet 2 of 3)4-20
4-7
Physical View of TDM Buses at the CDMA Series II Cell Site (TDMs install "red
stripe up") (Sheet 3 of 3)4-21
4-8
Fully Loaded CDMA Radio Shelf With BBA Redundancy4-22
4-9
CDMA Radio Architecture
4-28
4-10
High-Level View of the CRTU Test System
4-33
4-11
CDMA Subcell Configuration—BBA Interconnections Shown Only For One Side
(Side 1, Side 2)4-34
4-12
Reference Frequency and Timing Generator (RFTG)4-39
4-13
Quadrant and Half-shelf Numbering of DDGF (Front View)4-43
4-14
Illustration of Circuit Packs Populating the CRC
4-15
Configuration 3: AIF, LAF, and SII Primary, with DDGF as 1st CDMA Growth
Frame4-49
4-16
Configuration 4: AIF, LAF, SII Primary, SII CDMA Growth, with DDGF as 2nd
CDMA Growth Frame4-50
4-17
Configuration 5: AIF, LAF, SII Primary, SII Analog
(i.e., non-CDMA) Growth, with DDGF as 2nd Growth
Frame and 1st CDMA Growth Frame4-51
4-18
15-MHz Reference Frequency Distribution Scheme 4-53
4-19
Reference Frequency and Timing Generator (RFTG)4-54
4-20
Double Density Growth Frame (top panel removed to expose circuit breakers Rear View)4-60
4-21
Frame Ground From Adjacent Cabinet
4-61
4-22
Ground Wire Connections Between Frames
4-62
4-23
DDGF IPA
4-64
4-24
Top of LAF 0, MLAC Power Divider Inputs
4-65
4-25
Top of LAF 1, MLAC Power Divider Input
4-66
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
xxvi
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
4-16
4-44
Figures
4-26
Top of AIF 0, RX 0, and RX 1 Power Divider Outputs (front view)4-67
4-27
Top of AIF 1, RX 0, and RX 1 Power Divider Outputs4-68
4-28
TDM Bus Installation. TDM bus cables are installed "red stripe up." (Configuration
3)4-70
4-29
TDM Bus Installation. TDM bus cables are installed "red stripe up." (Configurations
4 and 5)4-71
4-30
CDMA Radio Test Unit Module
4-72
Series II Cellular CDMA Adjunct to Small Cells
5-1
CDMA Adjunct Frame External Interfaces
5-4
5-2
CDMA Adjunct Frame
5-6
5-3
CDMA Adjunct Frame LineUp
5-8
5-4
CDMA Adjunct Antenna Connections
5-10
5-5
CDMA Adjunct Frame External Interfaces
5-11
5-6
CDMA Adjunct/Host Cell Transmit Path
5-12
5-7
Series IImm (Microcell)/CDMA Adjunct Transmit (Tx) Path Using Series IImm
(Microcell) Amplifier5-14
5-8
CDMA Adjunct/Host Cell Receive Paths
5-15
5-9
Test Radio Switch Panel (TRSP)
5-18
5-10
CDMA Adjunct Receiver Paths
5-20
5-11
CDMA Transmit Path (Smm Only)
5-21
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
xxvii
Figures
Table 5-7.
Series II Cellular Digital Packet Data (CDPD)
6-1
Series II CDPD Connections
6-3
6-2
One CDPD Channel per Sector
6-6
6-3
Two to Four CDPD Channels per Sector
6-7
6-4
CDPD with Omni Setup
6-8
6-5
Functional Diagram
6-10
6-6
One Modem Transceiver Per Sector, One LAC per Sector Directional Setup6-12
6-7
One Modem Transceiver per Sector, Multiple LACs per Sector Sniffing on One LAC - Directional Setup6-13
6-8
One Modem Transceiver per Sector, Multiple LACs per Sector Sniffing on Multiple LACs - Directional Setup6-14
6-9
One Modem Transceiver per Sector, One LAC per Sector Omnidirectional Setup6-15
6-10
One Modem Transceiver per Sector, Multiple LACs per Sector Sniffing on One LAC - Omnidirectional Setup6-16
6-11
One Modem Transceiver per Sector, Multiple LACs per Sector Sniffing on Multiple LACs - Omnidirectional Setup6-17
6-12
Multiple Modem Transceiver per Sector, One LAC per Sector Directional Setup6-18
6-13
Multiple Modem Transceiver per Sector, Multiple LACs per Sector - Sniffing on One
LAC - Directional Setup6-19
6-14
Multiple Modem Transceiver per Sector, Multiple LACs per Sector - Sniffing on
Multiple LACs - Directional Setup6-20
6-15
Multiple Modem Transceiver per Sector, One LAC per Sector - Omnidirectional
Setup6-21
6-16
Multiple Modem Transceiver per Sector, Multiple LACs per Sector - Sniffing on One
LAC - Omnidirectional Setup6-22
6-17
Multiple Modem Transceiver per Sector, Multiple LACs per Sector - Sniffing on
Multiple LACs - Omnidirectional Setup6-23
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
xxviii
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Figures
Table 6-2.
Mini, Micro, and Fiber-Link Series II Cell Site Options
7-1
Series IIe Radio Frame Set
7-5
7-2
Series II Compact Base Station (CBS) Hardware Architecture7-7
f.
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
8-1
Primary Radio Channel Frame J41660A-2
8-6
8-2
Growth Radio Channel Frame (J41660B-2)
8-7
8-3
Radio Control Complex (RCC) - Shelf 0 ED-2R832-308-14
8-4
Radio Channel Unit - Shelf 1, Shelf 2 ED-2R833-30 (Figure 1 of 2)8-18
8-5
Radio Channel Unit (Rear View) - Shelf 1, Shelf 2 ED-2R833-30 (Figure 2 of 2)
8-19
8-6
Fan Panel Assembly ED-2R824-31
8-28
8-7
Radio Test Unit (RTU) - Shelf 3 ED-2R835-30
8-29
8-8
Radio Channel Unit - Shelf 4, Shelf 5 ED-2R834-308-30
8-9
Radio Channel Unit (Rear View) - Shelf 4, Shelf 5 ED-2R834-308-31
8-10
Interconnection Panel ED-2R831-30
8-32
8-11
Interconnection Panel ED-2R831-30
8-33
8-12
Radio Test Unit (RTU) Control Board (AYD8) and Switch Assembly (ED3R026-30)
Location8-42
8-13
Linear Amplifier Frame (LAF) (J41660C-1)
8-45
8-14
Linear Amplifier Frame (LAF) (Doors Removed)
8-46
8-15
Linear Amplifier Circuit (LAC), Front View
8-48
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
xxix
Figures
8-16
LAC Functional Diagram
8-50
8-17
Linear Amplifier Module (LAM)
8-53
8-18
Linear Amplifier Unit ED-2R839-30
8-54
8-19
Location of LAM Fuses, LEDs, and the 10/20 Switch (on C-Series LACs)8-55
8-20
Linearizer (LZR) Unit ED-2R841-30
8-57
8-21
Linearizer Unit ED-2R841-30
8-58
8-22
Linearizer Unit ED-2R841-30
8-59
8-23
Linearizer Faceplate with the Front Grille Removed 8-60
8-24
Frame Interface Assembly ED-2R838-30
8-62
8-25
Frame Interface Assembly ED-2R838-30
8-63
8-26
Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) Functional Diagram8-64
8-27
Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) Functional Architecture8-65
8-28
Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) Functional Diagram 8-66
8-29
Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) Functional Diagram 8-67
8-30
Antenna Interface Growth Frame (AIF) Functional Diagram8-68
8-31
Primary Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) J41660E-2 8-72
8-32
Primary Antenna Interface Frame J41660E-2
8-73
8-33
Growth Antenna Interface Frame J41660F -2
8-74
8-34
Growth Antenna Interface Frame J41660F-2
8-75
Table 8-16.
Radios
9-1
AMPS Radio Maintenance Units and Personality Types9-4
9-2
CDMA Radio Maintenance Units and Personality Types9-24
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
xxx
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Figures
Figure 9-2.
10
Antenna Hardware Configurations
10-1
Series II Cell Site Antenna Configurations
10-4
10-2
Interconnection Panel Assembly
10-6
10-3
Antenna Interface
10-7
10-4
Primary RCF Switch Antenna Connector
10-8
10-5
Mapping of Antenna Faces to Antenna Sets for the
Various Setup Options10-10
10-6
Omnidirectional Cell Site Having Seven Transmit Antennas10-11
10-7
Antenna Coupler
10-14
11
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
11-1
Series II Cell Site Architecture
11-5
11-2
Radio Frame Set Architecture and Bus Structure
11-7
11-3
Physical View of TDM Buses (Sheet 1 of 3)
11-10
11-4
Physical View of TDM Buses (Sheet 2 of 3)
11-11
11-5
Physical View of TDM Buses (Sheet 3 of 3)
11-12
11-6
Data Link and Voice Paths—Example
11-15
11-7
T1/DS1 Transmission Format and RCF TDM Bus Transmission Format11-18
11-8
E1/CEPT Transmission Format and RCF TDM Bus Transmission Format11-19
11-9
TDM-Bus Interface Circuitry for the NCI—TDM Bus Archangel11-23
11-10
TDM-Bus Interface Circuitry for the CPI—TDM Bus Angel11-26
11-11
SAKI and SNPE Interface
11-29
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
xxxi
Figures
12
11-12
Synchronization References for TDM0 and TDM1—Example11-33
11-13
Synchronization of TDM0 to the MSC
11-35
11-14
Primary Access Controller/Framer
11-40
11-15
Information Sheets for T1 D4 and ESF Framing Format
(Sheet 1 of 3)11-43
11-16
Information Sheets for T1 D4 and ESF Framing Format
(Sheet 2 of 3)11-44
11-17
Information Sheets for T1 D4 and ESF Framing Format
(Sheet 3 of 3)11-45
11-18
Information Sheets for CCITT CEPT Frame Format
With and Without CRC-411-49
11-19
CAT Block Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)
11-53
11-20
CAT Block Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2)
11-54
Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests
12-1
Voice Channel Test Paths
12-8
12-2
Voice Channel Test Paths
12-9
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
xxxii
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Figures
Table 12-8.
13
Enhanced Maintenance Features
14
Corrective Maintenance - Introduction
14-1
AMPS Radio Maintenance Units and Personality Type14-7
14-2
TDMA Radio Maintenance Units and Personality Types14-9
14-3
CDMA Radio Maintenance Units and Personality Types14-11
Figure 14-3.
15
Corrective Maintenance using MRA
15-1
Remove Flow of Voice Radio RCU, SBRCU, DRU, or EDRU (Sheet 1 of 3)15-17
15-2
Remove Flow of Voice Radio RCU, SBRCU, DRU, or EDRU (Sheet 1 of 3)15-18
15-3
Remove Flow of Voice Radio RCU, SBRCU, DRU, or EDRU
3)15-19
15-4
Remove Flow of CCC (Sheet 1 of 3)
15-20
15-5
Remove Flow of CCC (Sheet 2 of 3)
15-21
15-6
Remove Flow of CCC (Sheet 3 of 3)
15-22
15-7
Remove Flow of CCU (Sheet 1 of 3)
15-23
(Sheet 3 of
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
xxxiii
Figures
15-8
Remove Flow of CCU (Sheet 2 of 3)
15-24
15-9
Remove Flow of CCU (Sheet 3 of 3)
15-25
15-10
Remove Flow of BBA (Sheet 1 of 3)
15-26
15-11
Remove Flow of BBA (Sheet 2 of 3)
15-27
Figure 15-11.
16
Corrective Maintenance using Status Display Pages
16-1
Example of 2130 - Cell Site Status Summary Page 16-4
16-2
Example of 2131 - Series II Cell Site Equipment Status Page16-6
16-3
Example of 2132 - Series II Cell Site Software Status Page
- ECP Release 9.016-16
16-4
Computer Terminal Screen: 2133 - Series II Cell VR Status Page16-21
16-5
Example of 2134 - Series II Cell Site DS-1 Unit Status Page16-25
16-6
Example of 2135 - Series II Cell Site LC/SU/BC Status Page
(Locate Radio Version)16-29
16-7
Example of 2135 - Series II Cell Site LC/SU/BC Status Page
Setup Radio Version)16-30
16-8
Example of 2136 - Series II Cell Site LAC Status Display Page16-33
16-9
Example of 2137 - Series II Cell Site OTU/LMT Status Page16-35
16-10
Example of 2138 - Series II Cell Site CDMA Equipment Status Page16-38
16-11
Example of 2139 - Series II Cell Site CCC CCU Status Page16-44
16-12
Example of 2235 - Series II Cell Site DCCH Status Page16-49
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
xxxiv
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Figures
17
Corrective Maintenance using ECP Craft Interface
18
Alarm Collection and Reporting
18-1
Alarm Cabling in the Primary RCF
18-4
18-2
AFI Block Diagram
18-7
18-3
RCG, Receive Preamplifier, and RFG Alarm Devices18-8
18-4
Alarm Monitoring and Storage in the Primary RCF (Sheet 1 of 2)18-9
18-5
Alarm Monitoring and Storage in the Primary RCF (Sheet 2 of 2)18-10
18-6
Alarm Connections Via the AAI J2 Ribbon-Type Connector18-11
18-7
Alarm Connections Via the AAI J3, J4, and J5 Terminal Blocks18-12
18-8
Radio Channel Frame (RCF) Receiver Radio Frequency (RF) Interfaces
(Switchable Antenna Connection)18-20
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
xxxv
Figures
19
Cell Site Hardware LED Descriptions
Table 19-1.
20
AMapping Status Display Page Unit Numbers to Hardware
20-1
Logical-to-Physical Unit Mapping for the RCC, DS1, and CAT in
Primary RCF20-4
20-2
Logical-to-Physical Unit Mapping for the DS1
20-3
Logical-to-Physical Unit Mapping for the CAT (Sheet 1 of 3)20-6
20-4
Logical-to-Physical Unit Mapping for the CAT (Sheet 2 of 3)20-7
20-5
Logical-to-Physical Unit Mapping for the CAT (Sheet 3 of 3)20-8
20-6
Logical-to-Physical Unit Mapping for the CCC (Sheet 1 of 2)20-10
20-7
Logical-to-Physical Unit Mapping for the CCC (Sheet 2 of 2)20-11
20-8
Logical-to-Physical Unit Mapping for the BBA (Sheet 1 of 2)20-12
20-9
Logical-to-Physical Unit Mapping for the BBA (Sheet 2 of 2)20-13
20-10
Logical-to-Physical Unit Mapping for the DFI/DS1 and SCT/CAT
(Sheet 1 of 6)20-14
20-11
Logical-to-Physical Unit Mapping for the DFI/DS1 and SCT/CAT
(Sheet 2 of 6)20-15
20-12
Logical-to-Physical Unit Mapping for the DFI/DS1 and SCT/CAT
(Sheet 3 of 6)20-16
20-13
Logical-to-Physical Unit Mapping for the DFI/DS1 and SCT/CAT
(Sheet 4 of 6)20-17
20-14
Logical-to-Physical Unit Mapping for the DFI/DS1 and SCT/CAT
(Sheet 5 of 6)20-18
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
xxxvi
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
20-5
Figures
20-15
Logical-to-Physical Unit Mapping for the DFI/DS1 and SCT/CAT) (Sheet 6 of 6)
20-19
Figure 20-15.
21
CDMA Maintenance
21-1
High-Level View of the CRTU Test System
21-4
21-2
RF Transmit Path Setup for CDMA Functional Tests at
the Series II Cell Site21-6
21-3
RF Diversity 0 Receive Path Setup for CDMA Functional Tests at
the Series II Cell Site21-18
22
Linear Amplifier Circuit (LAC) Maintenance
22-1
Front View of the LAC
22-10
22-2
LAMs Powered by Common Breakers
22-18
22-3
Location of LAM Fuses, LEDs, and the 10/20 Switch (on C-Series LACs)22-19
22-4
Flowchart of the Preamplifier Diagnostic Procedure 22-21
22-5
Setting the LAC Address
22-6
Location of the Alarm Cable Connector at Top of the RCF22-28
22-7
Location of the AYD5 Paddle Board on the RCC Backplane22-30
22-8
UN166 AFI Board Test Points
22-31
22-9
Location of the LAC Alarm Cable Connector
22-32
22-10
Location of the FAC/FLD Switch and Microprocessor Access Port (Cover
Removed)22-33
22-23
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
xxxvii
Figures
22-11
View of the Linearizer Faceplate with the Front Grille Removed22-35
22-12
Measuring the LAU Fan Voltage
22-13
Location of AYG3 Circuit Pack Fuses F7 and F8 (Cover Plate Removed)22-42
22-14
Linear Amplifier Circuit (LAC), Front View
22-44
22-15
Linear Amplifier Frame (LAF) (Doors Removed)
22-67
22-16
Linear Amplifier Unit
22-68
22-17
LAM
22-71
22-18
Disconnect the ribbon cable from the printed circuit board (donut)22-72
22-19
Unscrew the LAM from its standoff
22-73
22-20
RF connectors on each LAM
22-74
22-21
Disconnect the remaining ribbon connectors from the donut board22-75
22-22
Remove the printed circuit board (donut) from the standoffs22-76
22-23
Disconnect D-Shell connector located behind the donut board22-77
22-24
Push the printed donut board to the right side
22-78
22-25
Remove and save silver standoffs and washers
22-79
22-26
Cut the three cables (black, red, blue) to each fan 22-81
22-27
Remove both fans
22-28
Identify LAC where the malfunctioning linearizer fan resides22-84
22-29
Linearizer fan fuse
22-85
22-30
Linearizer faceplate
22-86
22-31
Fan Mounting Plate
22-87
22-32
Cabling by Color (Red To Red, Black To Black, Blue To Blue)22-89
21.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
xxxviii
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
22-37
22-82
1
Introduction
Contents
■
Contents
1-1
■
Introduction
1-2
General
1-2
Organization
1-2
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
1-1
Introduction
Introduction
General
This document has been made current to Executive Cellular Processor (ECP)
Release 14.0.
Organization
The contents of each chapter in this document are described in the following list.
■
Chapter 2 introduces the user to the Cell Site architecture and its
interaction with other parts of the system, the availability and use of
bandwidth, the call handling process, and the advantages of Series II
hardware and software.
■
Chapter 3 is a detailed look as the Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
system, so that the new-hire, manager, or engineer obtains an in-depth
understanding of TDMA technology and why, when, where, and how to
implement it.
■
Chapter 4 is a detailed look as the Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
system, so that, again, the new-hire, manager, or engineer obtains an indepth understanding of CDMA technology and why, when, where, and how
to implement it.
■
Chapter 5 introduces a new product, the CDMA Adjunct to Small Cells,
which is used to add CDMA capability to the Series IIm (Minicell) and
Series IImm (Microcell).
■
Chapter 6 covers the Cellular Digital Packet Data (CDPD) service, which
enables the service provider to offer wireless data services. Several CDPD
configurations are offered in this chapter.
■
Chapter 7 covers other technology options available for the Series II
system. Including the use of fiberoptics and the subdivision of cellular
systems into mini or micro systems for situations such as filling in spots
missed by the larger cellular system or for the use of cellular systems within
a restricted environment, such as an office building.
For those that need equipment specifications for Cell Site engineering, to order
equipment, or to obtain a general knowledge of the hardware used in the Series II
Cell Site, the following chapters offer a general look at every piece of hardware
used at the Cell Site.
■
Chapter 8 describes and offers equipment specifications, ordering codes,
and interconnections with other equipment, for every piece of hardware
(except radios) at the Cell Site.
■
Chapter 9 contains detailed technical descriptions of every radio capable of
being used in the Cell Site, how each radio operates, and its call-handling
capacity. All radios, AMPS, TDMA, and CDMA, are explained.
■
Chapter 10 describes antenna configurations and their interaction with Cell
Site radios.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
1-2
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Introduction
■
Chapter 11 describes Cell Site hardware at a functional level, the
interconnections on each unit, and their interconnectivity with other units.
For operations and maintenance personnel, the following chapters describe the
function and operation of all Series II equipment, and different aspects of its
maintenance (i.e., test, restore, remove, replace).
■
Chapter 12 offers detailed and step-by-step procedures to perform routine
and FCC-mandated maintenance tests.
■
Chapter 13 describes enhanced maintenance features that have been
added to the Series II Cell Site, such as the improved Boot Read-OnlyMemory / Non-Volatile Memory Update. This feature enables a radio to
identify its hardware type and prevent the downloading of firmware
belonging to a different radio hardware type.
■
Chapter 14 explains the three major maintenance tools available to the Cell
Site Technician, describes and lists all maintenance units, and defines the
maintenance states that a unit can take on.
■
Chapter 15 has detailed and step-by-step procedures for using the
Maintenance Request Administrator (MRA) to perform diagnostic and
trouble maintenance.
■
Chapter 16 has detailed and step-by-step procedures for using Status
Display Pages to perform diagnostic and trouble maintenance.
■
Chapter 17 has detailed and step-by-step procedures for using the
Executive Cellular Processor (ECP) craft interface to perform diagnostic
and trouble maintenance.
The different tools and procedures described in the chapters above allow the
technician to choose the maintenance tool he is most comfortable with and,
greatly improve both the learning and productivity curve.
■
Chapter 18 details all Cell Site alarms, their meaning, and the appropriate
response(s) the technician should make.
■
Chapter 19 details all Cell Site Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs), their
meaning, and the appropriate response(s) the technician should make.
■
Chapter 20 is a logical-to-hardware mapping of all maintenance units and
is useful in helping the technician find the physical location of any
diagnostic or maintenance unit.
■
Chapter 21 is dedicated to CDMA-specific maintenance because CDMA
units are different enough from the analog/digital units used in AMPS/
TDMA that they merit particular attention.
■
Chapter 22 is dedicated to the maintenance of the Linear Amplifier Circuit
(LAC), a complex and extremely important piece of Cell Site hardware.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
1-3
Introduction
Please refer to Lucent Technologies Practice 401-660-125 for a full description of
the Modular Linear Amplifier Circuit (MLAC) J-41660CA-3.
We hope that you find this reorganization of the document useful and easy to
read.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
1-4
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
1-5
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
1-6
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
2
Introduction to Series II Cell
Technology
Contents
■
Contents
2-1
■
Introduction
2-2
Overview
2-2
■
Advanced Mobile Phone Service (AMPS)
2-3
■
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
2-4
TDMA Description
2-4
TDMA Call Processing
2-4
Communication From TDMA Cell Site to TDMA Subscriber Unit 2-5
Communication From TDMA Subscriber Unit to
TDMA Cell Site
2-6
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
2-6
CDMA Cell Site Description
2-7
■
Cellular Frequency Spectrum Allocation
2-10
■
Advantages of Series II Hardware and Software
2-11
■
Cell Site Equipment Functional Overview
2-12
Equipment Frames
2-12
Radio Channel Frames and
Radio Equipment Functional Overview
2-13
Facilities Interface Frame (FIF)
2-18
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
2-1
Introduction to Series II Cell Technology
Introduction
Overview
The Series II platform accommodates three multiple-access methods, one analog
and two digital, described below.
■
Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) Subscribers are separated by frequency. Frequency Division Multiple
Access (FDMA) is the implementation of narrowband channels, each
carrying one telephone circuit, in a system where any mobile station can
access any one of the frequencies. Existing analog cellular
communications systems use FDMA.
The Series II FDMA technology is Advanced Mobile Phone Service
(AMPS)* which conforms to the Electronic Industries Association (EIA) /
Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) 553 standard. The
allocated spectrum is divided into 30-kHz channels, where each channel
can carry a single call.
■
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) Subscribers are separated by frequency and time. Time Division Multiple
Access (TDMA) is an architecture in which each carrier frequency is
divided into a number of timeslots, each of which constitutes an
independent telephone circuit. Existing digital cellular communications
systems use TDMA.
The Series II TDMA technology conforms to the TIA IS-54 standard. The
technology can serve three simultaneous calls on an existing 30-kHz
AMPS channel, thereby increasing capacity by threefold.
■
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) Subscribers are separated by digital code. Code Division Multiple Access
(CDMA) is a form of multiple access used in spread-spectrum wideband
systems. It is based on the principle that each subscriber is assigned a
unique code that can be used by the system to distinguish that user from all
other users transmitting simultaneously over the same frequency band.
The Series II CDMA technology conforms to the TIA IS-95 standard. The
projection is that CDMA will increase the capacity of the current AMPS
system by as much as ten-fold.
Throughout this document, AMPS will be used to mean analog radios or analog service.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
2-2
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Introduction to Series II Cell Technology
Advanced Mobile Phone Service
(AMPS)
With AMPS, the entire allocated cellular frequency spectrum, 825-890 MHz, is
divided into a number of 30-kHz channels, each with its specific carrier frequency.
These carrier frequencies operate in pairs; each pair is assigned a unique RF
channel number. One carrier frequency of the pair is used for transmission from
the Cell Site to the mobile station (forward channel), while the other is used for
transmission from the mobile station to the Cell Site (reverse channel). The
transmit and receive frequencies are separated by 45 MHz.
From the beginning, the FCC has encouraged competition in the cellular radio
market by allocating available frequency spectrum to two classes of operators:
■
The nonwireline companies (such as radio common carriers) also known
as System A - is allocated frequencies from spectrum for System A is
(known as block A, which consists of the A, A’, and A” bands
■
The local wireline telephone companies, also known as System B - is
allocated frequencies from the spectrum for System B (known as block B),
which consists of the B and B’ bands.
Normally, RF channels 313 through 354 are reserved for use as control channels:
21 control channels for System A, and 21 control channels for System B. These
channels, also called setup channels, are used to establish calls and to perform
control functions. The remaining channels, 395 for System A and 395 for
System B, are the voice channels. Each voice channel can carry a single call.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
2-3
Introduction to Series II Cell Technology
Time Division Multiple Access
(TDMA)
TDMA
Description
TDMA can accommodate both analog and digital cellular technologies (see
Figure 2-1). The digital cellular technology, like Time Division Multiple Access
(TDMA) radio technology, provides increased spectral efficiency, system
performance improvements (high-quality speech in areas of low signal strength),
entirely digital transmission, new and more flexible services, and increased
channel privacy compared to analog technology. In the same number of radio
slots used by Radio Channel Units (RCUs), half as many Digital Radio Units
(DRUs) achieve a 50% increase in the number of radio channels. In addition, if
DRUs are replaced with Enhanced DRUs (EDRUs), there are the same number of
channels using half as many radio slots on the radio shelf. The EDRU takes up
only 1 slot on the radio shelf versus the 2 that the DRU takes up.
TDMA Call
Processing
The Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) has prepared an interim
standard (IS-54A) that defines technical requirements for cellular
telecommunications systems. This standard provides radio system parameters
and call processing procedures for both analog and digital radios to ensure
complete compatibility with dual-mode (analog and digital) mobile and singlemode (analog only) mobile stations. The TDMA feature complies with this
standard.
In addition, TDMA DCCH complies with EIA/TIA Standard IS-136 Cellular System
Dual-Mode Mobile Station Base Station: Digital Control Channel that is available
from the Electronic Industries Association. DCCH supports IS-136 mobiles that
use DCCH to access the system.
The following call processing features are part of the TDMA feature.
■
Dual Mode Mobile Station (DMMS) - TDMA works with a DMMS. The
TDMA DMMS has allowable-call modes of analog only, TDMA (digital) only,
and analog or TDMA. TDMA also supports IS-136 mobiles that access the
system over the DCCH.
■
Mobile-Assisted HandOff (MAHO) Feature - All TDMA mobile units are
designated to assist in the handoff process. The TDMA mobile unit is sent
a list of neighbor sectors on which to make signal strength measurements.
■
Setup Channels - TDMA uses the same analog setup channels as in the
Series II Cell Site. To set up digital channels, TDMA uses the DCCH.
■
Locate Function - The locate radios may be analog. TDMA also supports
the digital locate function for DRUs and EDRUs.
■
Beacon Channel Feature - The beacon channel is a voice radio, analog or
digital, which always has its carrier turned on and set at a fixed power level.
The beacon channel can be used for voice communications, but the carrier
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
2-4
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Introduction to Series II Cell Technology
power level remains fixed. The beacon channel provides a means for the
TDMA and TDMA DMMS mobiles to measure signal strength during the
handoff process. Series I Cell Sites in a Series II TDMA service area also
provide a beacon channel per antenna sector for the benefit of TDMA
customers.
Unique software is required for implementation of the TDMA feature. This section
briefly addresses the major differences from the analog system in call processing,
administration, maintenance, and service measurement software.
All call processing for DRUs is based on logical channels; that is, digital traffic
channels rather than physical radio units. The DMMSs communicate with the Cell
Site over a 30-kHz analog setup channel. Thus, the mobile station is required to
be tuned to an analog setup channel when not in the conversation state. Mobile
originations and page response messages are transmitted to and received from
the Cell Site over the analog setup channel. Location measurements on digital
voice channels will be performed using mobile-assisted handoff (as defined in IS54A).
The following five handoff scenarios are supported:
1.
Analog to analog
2.
Analog to digital
3.
Digital to digital
4.
Digital to analog
5.
DCCH InterHyperband handoff
For more information on DCCH InterHyperband Handoff, please see Lucent
Technologies Practices Optional Feature document 401-612-118, DCCH
Interhyperband Operation Phase 1 & 2.
Communication
From TDMA Cell
Site to TDMA
Subscriber Unit
The Time Division Multiplexed (TDM) bus, which should be installed "red stripe
up," sends m-law Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) encoded voice to the echo
cancelers, and then to the speech coder in the DRU or EDRU. The speech from
the TDM bus is coded using the algorithm known as Code Excited Linear
Predictive (CELP) Coding. Then the bits are transferred to the associated channel
coder.
The encoded speech is further encoded for protection by a three-step process.
First, the most significant bits are coded with a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC).
Then, these bits, with the other class-1 bits, are protected with a convolutional
error correction code. Finally, the data is spread within one time slot.
From the channel coder, the signal is sent along with the other two channels to the
modulator. Once at the modulator, the bits are modulated using Deferentially
Encoded Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (DQPSK) and are sent to the transmitter.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
2-5
Introduction to Series II Cell Technology
At the transmitter, the digitally modulated RF signals are sent to the antenna and
ultimately to the subscriber unit..
To Subscriber
Speech
Encoder
To
SC
DS-1
Channel
Encoder
Modulator
Transmitter
(TCM)
RF
DRU/EDRU
Subscriber
Unit
RF
Speech
Decoder
Channel
Decoder
Demod/
Equalizer
AGC/
Filter
Receiver
(TCM)
RF
RF
From Subscriber
Figure 2-1.
TDMA - DRU/ EDRU To/From Subscriber
Communication
From TDMA
Subscriber Unit to
TDMA Cell Site
The receiver in the DRU or EDRU receives digitally modulated RF signals from the
subscriber unit and translates them back to baseband frequency. The signals first
proceed through a low-pass filter to cut out high frequencies and alias signals, and
through an Automatic Gain Control (AGC) to control the signal strength. The
waveforms are then sent to the demodulator, where the signals are synchronized
and equalized. Then, the demodulated bits are sent to the channel decoder. Upon
arriving, data is de-interleaved and decoded. The convoluted encoded bits are
CRC-checked for error detection and then transferred to the speech decoder. The
speech decoder takes the data and generates the received speech signal, which
is transferred to the TDM bus as m-law PCM encoded voice.
Code Division
Multiple Access
(CDMA)
This section provides an overview of the Series II Cell Site hardware used to
support the Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) application.
CDMA is a method that increases voice traffic on the existing cellular frequency
spectrum. CDMA is defined within the IS-95 document, which was produced by
the Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) TR45.5 Subcommittee on
Wideband Spectrum Digital Technology.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
2-6
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Introduction to Series II Cell Technology
CDMA uses a direct sequence spread spectrum technology. Within this
technology, radio signals are spread across a single 1.23 MHz-wide frequency
band. Individual calls are modulated by the three unique Pseudo-random Number
(PN) codes during transmission and decoded using those three codes during
reception. Signals that do not contain the code matches are treated as noise and
ignored. By using this method, a large number of CDMA calls may occupy the
same frequency spectrum simultaneously.
One of many benefits of CDMA is that it is virtually impossible to monitor a CDMA
call in progress unless all three PN codes are known.
CDMA Cell Site
Description
The Series II Cell Sites providing CDMA service (see Figure 2-2) must be
equipped with a Global Positioning System (GPS) receiver, associated
Synchronized Clock and Tone (SCT) boards, and a Digital Facilities Interface
(DFI).
The GPS equipment provides precise timing of data packets between the 5ESS2000 Switch DCS and the Series II Cell Site. The GPS also provides precise
timing for the 20-ms packets transmitted by the CDMA radios. The SCT boards
are added to the TDM bus (which should be installed "red stripe up"). The DFI is
required for CDMA packet pipes.
All CDMA trunks must be located in the 5ESS-2000 Switch DCS but AMPS and
TDMA trunks can still be located in a DEFINITY Switch DCS.
The remaining new circuitry consists of the CDMA Radio Module (CRM), that
serves one face. The CRM is located on the CDMA radio shelf. The CRM will be
discussed in detail later in this document. The basic RF combiners, Linear
Amplifier Frame (LAF) and filter assemblies have not changed from the AMPS/
TDMA Series II Linear Amplifier Circuits (LACs) in existing systems require a
Version 6 or higher firmware upgrade.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
2-7
Introduction to Series II Cell Technology
Mobile Switching
Center (MSC)
GPS
OMP
R.7.0x
Traffic Channel
Setup Channel
Series II Cell Site
ECP
R7.0
IMS
SS7
Links
CNI
RCC
SCT*
Analog
DSI
DFI
TDMA
5ESS-2000 DCS
AM
CM
CDMA
CE
CE
NCT
SM
PSU2
Public
Switched
Telephone
Network
DLTU2
* SCT - Synchronized Clock and Tone
Figure 2-2.
CDMA System Components
There are three types of equipment shelves on the CDMA Growth Radio Frame
(CGRF). These shelves are listed below.
1.
The interconnect panel is used to distribute the 15-MHz reference
frequency from the Reference Frequency Timing Generation (RFTG) to the
radio shelves, and to interconnect CDMA radio equipment to both existing
transmit and receive antenna faces.
2.
CDMA radio shelves (numbered 0 through 5 from top to bottom) which
contain the following equipment:
— Power converters that require +24 volt, 45 amp. feeder and return
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
2-8
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Introduction to Series II Cell Technology
— One or two CDMA Cluster Controllers (CCCs) - each CCC contains
7 CDMA Channel Units (CCUs)
— As many as 14 CCUs - each CCU contains two CEs (8-kbps
vocoders)
— One or two Baseband, Bus and Analog (BBA) trio circuits
NOTE:
For CDMA 1.0, there is one radio shelf per antenna face. Because CDMA
1.0 supports omni, two-sector, and three-sector cells, there may be one,
two, or three CDMA radio shelves. Additional shelves will be supported in
future CDMA releases.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
2-9
Introduction to Series II Cell Technology
Cellular Frequency Spectrum
Allocation
The Series II platform can support a hybrid of AMPS, TDMA, and CDMA
technologies within the same cellular system. The radio technologies share Cell
Site resources and cellular frequency spectrum.
In North America, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has allocated
a total of 25 MHz for mobile-to-cell-site communication and 25 MHz for cell-site-tomobile communication for the provision of cellular services. The FCC has divided
this allocation equally between two service providers, the wireline (block B) and
non-wireline (block A) carriers, in each service area.
To accommodate CDMA, the entire cellular frequency spectrum is divided into ten
1.23-MHz wideband channels.
Each channel is assigned a number, and the channel numbers denote 30-kHz
channels. Because of the order in which allocations were made, the 12.5 MHz
allocated to each carrier for each direction of the link is further subdivided into two
sub-bands. For the wireline carriers (block B), the sub-bands are 10 MHz (B band)
and 2.5 MHz (B’ band). For the non-wireline carriers (block A), the sub-bands are
11 MHz (A band + A” band) and 1.5 MHz (A’ band). A single bandwidth of less
than 1.5 MHz could fit into any of the sub-bands, while a bandwidth of less than
2.5 MHz could fit into all but one sub-band.
Thus, in order to preserve maximum flexibility in matching the CDMA technology
to the available frequency spectrum, the CDMA digital cellular waveform design
must be less than 1.5 MHz in bandwidth.
A set of ten 1.23-MHz bandwidth wideband channels, referred to as CDMA
carriers, would be used if the entire cellular frequency spectrum were converted
over to CDMA. In the interim, only a small number of 1.23-MHz channels need to
be removed from the current analog service to provide digital service.
The center RF channel numbers, or center frequencies, of the primary and
secondary CDMA carriers are specified in the TIA IS-95 standard. The center RF
channel numbers of other CDMA carries are not specified in the TIA IS-95
standard, but are chosen by the individual service providers.
Because some frequency guard band is necessary if there are adjacent highpower cellular (or other) frequencies in use, adding an initial CDMA carrier to an
existing AMPS system requires removing 59 adjoining AMPS channels (1.77 MHz
of frequency spectrum). Since adjacent CDMA carriers need not employ a guard
band, adding a second CDMA carrier would only require removing 43 AMPS
channels.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
2-10
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Introduction to Series II Cell Technology
Advantages of Series II Hardware and
Software
A number of the advantages of Series II hardware and software are listed below.
■
Channel capacity. Up to 200 Radio Channel Units (RCUs), including
setup, locate, and voice. About 195 can be used for voice.
■
6-Sector configuration. Single antenna, omni, three- or six-sector
configuration. Up to seven transmit antennas, as defined by user, diversity
receive antennas, and optional built-in duplexers.
■
Compatible with Series I. Can be used in the same system with Series I
Cell Sites.
■
All digital interfaces. All data and voice communications between the
MSC and Cell Site is by Digital Signal level 1 (DS1) interfaced facilities. The
Digital Cross-Connect (DSX-1) interface between the DS1 and cross
connect panel provide the radio frame connections and eliminate the need
for D4 channel banks.
■
Programmable radio channels. Programmable radio channels eliminate
the need for manual tuning of cavity combiners or the setting of Dual In-line
Package (DIP) switches.
■
Combine any channels. No separation restrictions on channels
combined.
■
Downloading of power levels and channel assignments. Downloading
of power levels and channel assignments can be accomplished from a
single location, such as the MSC.
■
Less maintenance. Fewer replaceable parts; most faults are softwaredetectable. Limited inventory spares needed.
■
Easy update to digital channels. Series II positions the system to support
digital radio technology with minimum cost, effort, and replacement of
equipment. RCU slots accommodate both analog and DRUs and EDRUs.
Analog and digital radios may be mixed on a slot-by-slot basis.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
2-11
Introduction to Series II Cell Technology
Cell Site Equipment Functional
Overview
Equipment Frames
The equipment frames used in Series II Cell Sites (Figure 2-3) and their
dimensions are given below.
■
Radio Channel Frame (RCF) - 26" wide by 20" deep by 80.5" high,
total height = 70" (to top of main bay) + 10" (interconnect panel)
The Series II radio channel equipment is housed in cabinets. The Radio
Channel Frame (RCF) has openings on the side for interframe wiring of the
Time Division Multiplexed (TDM) bus, which should be installed "red stripe
up". Control and data are transferred over the TDM bus. These frames are
installed side by side so that they may be interconnected by one TDM bus,
if there are two frames, or two TDM buses, if there are three frames.
Cabinet covers are removable for maintenance, allowing easy access to
the equipment without requiring the clearance space needed to open
hinged doors. The Radio Frame Set (RFS) consists of one, two, or three
RCFs. The first RCF is the P-RCF (RCF 0), the other two RCFs are
"growth" RCFs (RCF 1 and RCF 2).
■
Linear Amplifier Frame (LAF) - Same dimensions as RCF. One or two
Linear Amplifier Frames (LAFs)are provided per Cell Site.
■
Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) - 26" wide by 20" deep by 84" high.
Antenna interface equipment accommodates up to seven antenna faces,
thus permitting implementation of omni-only, three-sector/120-degree, sixsector/60-degree, or other special antenna configurations. One or two
Antenna Interface Frames (AIFs) are provided per Cell Site.
The Series II Cell Site equipment frames have greater hardware capacity, are
more compact, and allow more flexibility than Series I equipment.
The equipment code for the equipment frames mentioned above are identified
below.
■
Radio Channel Frame (Primary) J41660A-1 or J41660A-2 (UL* Listed) *
■
Radio Channel Frame (Growth) J41660B-1 or J41660A-2 (UL* Listed)
■
Linear Amplifier Frame (Primary) J41660C-1 or J41660A-2 (UL* Listed)
■
Antenna Interface Frame (Primary) J41660E-1 or J41660A-2 (UL* Listed)
■
Antenna Interface Frame (Growth) J41660F-1 or J41660A-2 (UL* Listed)
■
Facilities Interface Frame J41660G-1 or J41660A-2 (UL* Listed)
Registered trademark of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
2-12
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Introduction to Series II Cell Technology
■
Optical Interface Frame J41660H-1
(High-Power
Antennas)
TX RX RX
0 1
Radio Frame Set
DS1
Inputs
Facilities
Interface
Frame
(FIF)
Voice
Trunks
and
Data
Links
Radio
Channel
Frame 0
(RCF0)
Radio
Channel
Frame 1
(RCF1)
Radio
Channel
Frame 2
(RCF2)
(Includes
Radio
Control
Complex)
(Optional)
(Optional)
Primary
Growth
Linear
Amplifier
Frame 1
(LAF1)
(Optional)
Figure 2-3.
Radio Channel
Frames and Radio
Equipment
Functional
Overview
Linear
Amplifier
Frame 0
RF (LAF0)
Growth
Antenna
Interface
Frame 0
RF (AIF0)
Antenna
Interface
Frame 1
((AIF1)
(Optional)
RF
Cell Site Architecture
The radio frame set (Figure 2-4) consists of a primary RCF and up to two growth
RCFs connected by one or two Time-Division Multiplexed (TDM) buses (which
should be installed "red stripe up") and controlled by the primary RCF. The
primary RCF is unique in that it contains the Cell Site controller (the Radio Control
Complex [RCC]) on the uppermost shelf (shelf 0) in addition to five radio shelves
below (shelves 1 through 5).
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
2-13
Introduction to Series II Cell Technology
Primary RCF 0
RCC 0
Shelf 0
RCC 1
Growth RCF 1
Growth RCF 2
Radio Shelf
Radio Shelf
Shelf 1
Radio Shelf
Radio Shelf
Radio Shelf
Shelf 2
Radio Shelf
Radio Shelf
Radio Shelf
Shelf 3
Radio Test Shelf
Radio Shelf
Radio Shelf
Shelf 4
Radio Shelf
Radio Shelf
Radio Shelf
Shelf 5
Radio Shelf
Radio Shelf
Radio Shelf
Fans
Figure 2-4.
Radio Channel Frames
The RCC consists of two identical controllers (redundant controllers). One
controller is active (on-line) and one is standby (off-line). The RCC provides
intelligent control of the Cell Site equipment and performs call processing in
conjunction with the ECP complex.
The primary RCF may contain a combination of AMPS setup, locate, and voice
channel radios; setup and locate radios are simply AMPS radios configured to
perform setup and locate channel functions. The RCC can configure an RCU or a
Single-Board RCU (SBRCU) to perform one of three functions:
■
Setup—To establish calls with AMPS mobile subscribers
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
2-14
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Introduction to Series II Cell Technology
■
Locate—To assist with handoffs when the established call can be better
served by an adjacent sector or cell
■
Voice—To carry the AMPS over-the-air calls
Setup and locate radios are restricted to shelf 1 and/or shelf 2 of the primary RCF,
whereas voice radios may be installed in any of the five radio shelves of the
primary RCF or any of the six radio shelves of a growth RCF. Normally, at start-up,
there are two setup radios (one active and one standby) and two locate radios
(both active).
Up to two Growth RCFs may be added. Each growth RCF contains six radio
shelves, housing 72 RCUs in each growth RCF for a maximum capacity of 200
analog radios or 86 digital radios or various combinations. (A minimum of two
analog radios are always required for setup and locate functions.).
Twenty-one channels, referred to as setup or control channels, are set aside to
accomplish the setup function. That is, 21 channels in each of the cellular
frequency spectrums (block A and block B) are not used as voice channels.
Setup radios perform the receive and transmit functions required to set up an
AMPS or IS-54 TDMA call, but not a CDMA call. CDMA uses its own control
channels to set up a CDMA call.
There are AMPS-only mobiles, IS-54 compliant TDMA/AMPS dual-mode mobiles,
IS-136 compliant TDMA/AMPS dual-mode mobiles, and IS-95A and IS-95B
compliant CDMA/AMPS dual-mode mobiles. A TDMA/AMPS dual-mode mobile
allows the call to be served on either TDMA or AMPS channels, which increases
the chances that the call will be served if no TDMA channels are available during
setup or handoff. The same holds true for a CDMA/AMPS dual-mode mobile.
If a Cell Site has the TDMA DCCH feature, the DCCH—not the setup radio—is
used to set up TDMA calls for IS-136 compliant TDMA/AMPS dual-mode mobiles.
AMPS locate radios (also referred to as analog locate radios), which receive but
do not transmit, assist only in the handoff of an AMPS call. As explanation, a
handoff decision for an AMPS call is based on Cell Site measurements of signal
strengths received from the mobile station. In contrast, the handoff decision for a
TDMA or CDMA call is based on mobile measurements of signal strengths
received from radios at neighboring sites. This latter type of handoff is referred to
as mobile-assisted handoff.
A feature known as the Digital Verification Color Code (DVCC) verification feature
can ensure a high success rate for the TDMA mobile-assisted handoff procedure.
For this feature, there is a digital locate radio available to each physical antenna
face, or sector, neighboring the serving face.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
2-15
Introduction to Series II Cell Technology
Any combination of AMPS radios (RCUs, SBRCUs) and TDMA radios (DRUs,
EDRUs) can reside in the primary RCF or in a growth RCF. RCUs, SBRCUs,
DRUs, and EDRUs can sit side-by-side in the same radio shelf.*
The DRU occupies two adjoining RCU slots in the shelf, and the EDRU occupies
one RCU slot in the shelf; either unit provides a 3-to-1 voice channel capacity
advantage over the RCU.
CDMA radios are installed in their own growth RCF (See Figure 2-5), which is
designed to house 12 CDMA radios—two (redundant) radios per shelf. (One
CDMA radio is active and one is standby).
CDMA radios cannot be installed in the primary RCF, nor can they be intermixed
with RCUs, SBRCUs, DRUs, or EDRUs in the same growth RCF. Since there can
be up to two growth RCFs in a radio frame set, the Series II Cell Site can
accommodate up to 24 CDMA radios.
There are two test radios listed below:
■
The Radio Test Unit (RTU)
■
TDMA Radio Test Unit (TRTU)
These radios can be used to test AMPS or TDMA radios, respectively, along with
their associated RF paths. When installed, the test radios reside in shelf 3 of the
primary RCF.
The CDMA Radio Test Unit (CRTU) can be used to test CDMA radios and their
associated RF paths. The CRTU consists of two hardware components:
■
The CRTU interface (CRTUi)
■
The CRTU module (CRTUm)
The CRTUi allows the RCC to communicate with the CDMA/AMPS dual-mode
mobile located in the CRTUm. When installed, the CRTUi resides in shelf 0 of the
primary RCF, and the CRTUm resides in the FIF or is mounted on a Cell Site wall.
Due to DC power limitations, it is recommended that no more than five EDRUs, with no other radios, reside in the
same radio shelf. This restriction does not apply if the P-RCF is equipped with List N and the G-RCF is equipped
with List E.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
2-16
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Introduction to Series II Cell Technology
024 034 040 046 052 058 064 070 076 082 088 098 104 110 116 122 128 134 140 146 152 162 170
ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM
OFF ALM
ACT
NVM ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ALM ALM
ALM ALM ALM
ALM
ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM
ACT
NVM NVM ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ALM ALM ALM OFF
ACT
ACT NVM
ACT
NVM
ACT
V-IN
V-IN
ACT
ON
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ON
OFF
J2
OFF
J3
5V
5V
44WWR1
430AA
TN1703
TN1701
TN1701
TN1853
TN1701
TN1702
TN1701
TN1701
TN1701
TN1701
TN1701
TN1852
TN1701
TN1852
TN1701
TN1701
TN1701
TN1701
TN1701
TN1702
430AA
TN1853
44WWR1
024 034 040 046 052 058 064 070 076 082 088 098 104 110 116 122 128 134 140 146 152 162 170
ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM
OFF ALM
ACT
NVM ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ALM ALM
ALM ALM ALM
ALM
ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM
ACT
NVM NVM ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ALM ALM ALM OFF
ACT NVM
ACT
ACT
NVM
ACT
V-IN
V-IN
ACT
ON
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ON
OFF
J2
OFF
J3
5V
5V
430AA
TN1853
44WWR1
TN1703
TN1702
TN1701
TN1701
TN1701
TN1701
TN1701
TN1701
TN1701
TN1852
TN1852
TN1701
TN1701
TN1701
TN1701
TN1701
TN1701
TN1701
TN1702
430AA
TN1853
44WWR1
024 034 040 046 052 058 064 070 076 082 088 098 104 110 116 122 128 134 140 146 152 162 170
OFF ALM
ACT
ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM
ACT
NVM ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ALM ALM
ALM ALM ALM
ALM
ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM
ACT
NVM NVM ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT NVM
ALM ALM ALM OFF
ACT
ACT
NVM
V-IN
V-IN
ACT
ON
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ON
OFF
J2
OFF
J3
5V
TN1853
44WWR1
TN1703
TN1702
TN1701
TN1701
TN1701
TN1701
TN1701
TN1701
TN1701
TN1852
TN1852
TN1701
TN1701
TN1701
TN1701
TN1701
TN1701
TN1701
TN1702
TN1853
44WWR1
430AA
430AA
5V
024 034 040 046 052 058 064 070 076 082 088 098 104 110 116 122 128 134 140 146 152 162 170
024 034 040 046 052 058 064 070 076 082 088 098 104 110 116 122 128 134 140 146 152 162 170
024 034 040 046 052 058 064 070 076 082 088 098 104 110 116 122 128 134 140 146 152 162 170
Figure 2-5.
Series II CDMA Radio Channel Frame (RCF)
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
2-17
Introduction to Series II Cell Technology
From an RCC perspective, the CRTUi and CRTUm together look like a single
maintenance unit, just like the RTU or TRTU.
Facilities Interface
Frame (FIF)
The Facilities Interface Frame (FIF) (see Figure 2-3) provides the digital interface
between the DCS and radio channel frames via shelf-mounted Data Service Units
(DSUs) or Channel Service Units (CSUs). These units perform network interface
compliance, format conversion, and network monitoring functions for a T1 or E1
line.
An alarm control panel, which is an optional panel mounted in the FIF, can collect
up to 18 user-defined alarms.* User-defined alarms are gathered from alarm
sensors external to the Cell Site frames; they include miscellaneous alarm
conditions, such as fire, forced entry, high temperature, and alarms from ancillary
co-located equipment.
An Increased Cell Alarms enhancement available in ECP Release 7.0 added another 12 user-defined alarms and 12
equipment alarms for use in the cell. The Increased Cell Alarms enhancement is described in the User-Defined
Cell Site Alarms (UDA) Optional Feature document (401-612-057).
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
2-18
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
2-19
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
2-20
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
3
Time Division Multiple Access
(TDMA)
Contents
■
Contents
3-1
■
TDMA Overview
3-3
TDMA/AMPS Dual-Mode Operation
3-3
TDMA System Access
3-4
TDMA Radio Interface
3-4
Radio Channel Types
3-4
Digital Control Channel
3-5
Digital Control Channel (DCCH) Forward Link, or
Downlink, Logical Channels
3-5
DCCH Feature Offerings
3-6
Short Message Service (SMS)
3-6
Sleep Mode
3-6
Private Networks
3-6
Channel Organization for Forward DCCH Superframes
3-6
Digital Traffic Channels
3-7
DTC Dedicated Control Channels
3-7
Digital Verification Color Code Channels
3-8
Handoff and Handoff Types
3-8
Mobile-Assisted Handoff Procedure
3-9
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
3-1
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
■
HandOff Based on Interference (HOBIT) / INterference
Look-Ahead (INLA) Enhancements
Service Measurements (SM)
■
Switch-Based TDMA Voice Coder/ Decoder (Vocoder)
Facilities Concentration
3-13
3-15
3-15
Vocoder / Echo Canceller Pooling
3-16
Platform for Multiple Speech Coding Algorithm Support
3-16
Semi-soft Handoff (intra-DCS, inter-DCS)
3-17
Intra-DCS Semi-soft Handoff
3-17
Inter-DCS Semi-soft Handoff
3-17
Packet Mode Transport
3-18
Packet Pipe (PP) Implementation
3-18
Cell Sites Supported by the Switch-Based Vocoder feature
Use of DS1 and/or DFI boards at the cell
Operation, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M)
3-18
3-18
3-19
Cell Site OA&M
3-19
Diagnostic subsystem (DN)
3-21
Measurement subsystem (MEAS)
3-21
Configuration Utilities subsystem (CFUT)
3-21
ECPC OA&M Support of the Cell Site
3-21
Feature Activation and Installation
3-22
■
Separate Access Thresholds for DCCHs and DTCs (SEPA)
3-23
■
Two-Branch Intelligent Anntenna (TBIA)
3-27
EDRU and DRM implementation of TBIA
3-27
TBIA Performance
3-27
TBIA Availability
3-28
TBIA Activation
3-28
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
3-2
3-11
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
TDMA Overview
The Series II TDMA technology conforms to the TIA IS-54 standard (sometimes
called North American TDMA), which allows the servicing of three digital calls
within the same frequency range previously used for one AMPS call. IS-54 TDMA
radio transmissions occur in the same frequency bands (System A and System B)
as AMPS radio transmissions.
IS-54 TDMA provides a basic modulation efficiency of three calls per 30-kHz of
bandwidth. A 30-kHz channel is subdivided into six timeslots for TDMA
transmissions. Two timeslots are required for each call when using full-rate voice
encoders (vocoders). Timeslots 1 and 4 form user channel 1, timeslots 2 and 5
form user channel 2, and timeslots 3 and 6 form user channel 3.
Each Digital Radio Unit (DRU) or Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU) is assigned
an RF channel number (carrier) using the RC/V Cell Site Trunk Member form
(ctm) or Vocoder Relocation feature allows EDRUs to be assigned via the RC/V
TDMA Packet Pipe Member form (tpptm), as well as the ctm and dcch forms. The
modulated output carries three independent, full-rate channels of information.
Assuming a frequency reuse factor similar to the analog design, the resulting
capacity with TDMA is one call per 10 kHz of spectrum or three times that of the
AMPS system. However, for TDMA systems, special studies have shown that
there is room for placing cells closer together because of TDMA’s higher tolerance
to interference and/or reducing the frequency re-use factor from the traditional
seven to six, five, or even four, further increasing system capacity.
TDMA/AMPS
Dual-Mode
Operation
The TIA IS-54 standard includes provision for future service additions and
expansions of system capabilities. The architecture defined by the TIA IS-54
standard permits such expansion without the loss of backward compatibility with
older mobile stations.
A TDMA/AMPS dual-mode mobile complying with the TIA IS-54 standard can
obtain service by communicating with either TDMA radios or AMPS radios at the
Cell Site. Whether the communication is TDMA or AMPS depends on the
availability of either system in the geographic area of the mobile station as well as
the preferred call mode of the mobile station. The preferred call mode can be
TDMA-only, AMPS-only, or dual-mode TDMA (either TDMA or AMPS).
There are two types of TDMA/AMPS dual-mode mobiles: IS-54 compliant mobiles
and IS-136 compliant mobiles. IS-54 compliant mobiles can only access the
TDMA system via the analog control channel (ACC)_also known as the setup
channel, whereas IS-136 compliant mobiles can access the TDMA system via the
ACC or the DCCH.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
3-3
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
TDMA System
Access
Mobile origination and page response messages are transmitted to/ received from
the TDMA Cell Site over the ACC, unless the DCCH feature is in effect at the Cell
Site and the accessing mobile is an IS-136 compliant mobile. In the latter case,
mobile origination and page response messages may be transmitted to/ received
from the TDMA Cell Site over the DCCH.
TDMA Radio
Interface
The TDMA radio interface between the serving Cell Site and the mobiles is a
three-layered communications architecture. The physical layer is referred to as the
air interface, which is a standardized IS-54 TDMA system. The physical layer not
only supports the functions required for the transmission of bit streams on the air
interface, but also provides access capabilities to the upper layers. The uppermost
layer carries messages that are transparent to the Cell Site; the messages convey
call control and mobile management information between the MSC and the
mobile station.
TDMA transmission is in the form of a series of frames, each of which is divided
into a number of timeslots. In IS-54 TDMA, each frame is partitioned into six
equally sized, non-overlapping timeslots.
In IS-54 TDMA full-rate operation, individual mobile stations take turns using the
reverse channel (mobile ? cell) and may put a burst of data in the assigned
timeslots. In the forward channel (cell ? mobile), the Cell Site is usually
transmitting continuously with the mobiles listening only during their assigned
timeslots. The Cell Site is also repeating a reference burst, and all mobiles
synchronize on the reception of that burst.
A mobile station must know not only which two timeslots 1&4, 2&5, or 3&6, to use
for transmission, but also which two timeslots to use for reception. In IS-54 TDMA,
those timeslots are the same. The TDMA frames used in the forward and reverse
directions are staggered by a little more than one timeslot duration to allow the
same timeslot pair to be used in both directions, hence avoiding the requirement
for the mobile station to transmit and receive simultaneously.
The mapping of assembled DCCH slots into superframes and hyperframes
applies only to the forward DCCH (cell ? mobile). There are no superframe or
hyperframe structures for the reverse DCCH (mobile ? cell).
Some characteristics of the IS-54 TDMA frame are:
Radio Channel
Types
■
Frame length = 1944 bits (39.99999 milliseconds)
■
Timeslot duration = 324 bits (6.666666 milliseconds)
■
Data rate = 20.57613 milliseconds
Each of the repetitive timeslots (1, 2,..., 6) across TDMA frames forms a physical
channel. (A physical channel always uses the same timeslot number in every
TDMA frame.) Thus, IS-54 TDMA provides six physical channels per RF channel
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
3-4
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
(carrier). As defined in TIA IS-54 and IS-136, there are two overall categories of
logical channels that can be mapped onto the physical channels:
a.
Digital Control Channels (DCCH) (IS-136 only) - A DCCH is a collection of
logical channels used for transmission of control information and short user
data messages between the Cell Sites and mobile stations.
b.
Digital Traffic Channels (DTC) (IS-54 and IS-136) A digital traffic channel is
a collection of logical channels used for transmission of user information
and related control messages between the Cell Sites and mobile stations.
A TDMA omni cell or cell sector is allocated a subset of RF channels. One RF
channel is assigned to each TDMA radio. The TDMA RF channel is designated as
either C0, C1, C2, through C n, where Cn is the last TDMA RF channel provided
in the cell. Each TDMA RF channel is divided into 6 timeslots. All but one of the
TDMA RF channels can support three digital traffic channels. The exception (i.e.,
C0) can support up to two digital traffic channels on timeslots 2&5 and 3&6;
timeslots 1&4 are dedicated to carrying the digital control channel. Two additional
TDMA RF channels, designated C1 and C2, can also be assigned to carry digital
control channels via the RC/V dcch form. C0, C1, and C2 need not have the lower
RF channel numbers of the allocation; no ordering of RF channel numbers is
implied.
Digital Control
Channel
The IS-136 DCCH is based on the IS-54 standard. The call control and other
features specified in IS-54 are part of IS-136.
The DCCH is used in place of the analog control channel (ACC). The DCCH
performs the setup function for mobile subscribers using IS-136 compliant
mobiles. The DCCH is carried by a TDMA radio (DRU, EDRU) configured as a
DCCH radio, and the ACC is carried by an AMPS radio (RCU, SBRCU) configured
as a setup radio. Since a TDMA radio provides a basic modulation efficiency of
three user channels (1 - 3) per 30-kHz of bandwidth, the DCCH radio may also
carry digital traffic. The DCCH is carried on user channel 1.
Typically, there is one DCCH per physical antenna face, or sector, in a TDMA
system. Up to three DCCHs are allowed per sector.
Digital Control
Channel (DCCH)
Forward Link, or
Downlink, Logical
Channels
The DCCH provides IS-136 compliant mobiles with a continuous frame-oriented
means of communication across the air interface. When not involved in an actual
call, the mobile stations monitor RF channel C0. The information sent to all mobile
station includes information about the system and how the mobile stations should
access the system. If a mobile station is in the process of originating a call, a
control channel will be used to notify that mobile station that it should tune to a
specified RF channel to complete the call. If a mobile station is idle and a call
comes in for it, the mobile station is paged over a paging channel.
The forward DCCH (cell mobile) consists of the following logical channels.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
3-5
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
■
Broadcast Control CHannel (BCCH) - Used to carry generic,
system-related information. Broadcast channels are used for such
functions as (1) frame synchronization of the mobile station, (2)
conveyance of DCCH structure parameters and parameters that are
essential for a mobile to access the system, and (3) conveyance of the
broadcast short message service (SMS)
■
SMS Point-to-point, Paging, and Access Response Channel (SPACH)Used to deliver short messages to a specific mobile station (in the context
of SMS services) and carry signaling information necessary for
access-management functions. SPACH channels are shared,
point-to-point, unidirectional (forward-only) control channels. Broadcast
channels are shared, point-to-multipoint, unidirectional (forward-only)
channels.
■
DCCH, Shared Channel Feedback (SCF) - Support for SCF includes
support for the encoding of SCF flags.
■
DCCH, Reserved Channel -The Reserved Channel is for future use, to
ensure upward compatibility with first generation mobiles.
The reverse DCCH (mobile ? cell) consists of a random access channel (RACH).
The RACH is used by IS-136 compliant mobiles to request access to the system.
At any given moment, a mobile station accesses only a limited number of the
channels appearing on its radio interface.
DCCH Feature
Offerings
Short Message Service (SMS)
Enables users to receive visual messages with the potential for up to 256
alphanumeric characters on their IS-136 compliant mobiles. Transmission of short
messages permits a mobile to function as a pager. Projections show SMS will
increase the percentage of completed terminations.
Sleep Mode
Extends the battery life of portables, increasing talk time between recharging.
Allows subscribers to make longer and more frequent calls.
Private Networks
DCCH development has made it easier for service providers to offer closed
wireless systems with customized feature packages for user groups in an office or
campus environment.
Channel
Organization for
Forward DCCH
Superframes
The DCCH radio must transmit a burst at a fixed power level in timeslots 1 and 4
of every TDMA frame to allow mobiles to make power measurements. Thus, the
DCCH radio must always have its RF carrier turned on and set at a fixed power
level. It can be used to carry digital traffic channels, but the carrier power level
remains fixed; the DCCH radio is ineligible for dynamic power control.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
3-6
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
The reverse DCCH (mobile ? cell) consists of a random access channel (RACH).
The RACH is used by IS-136 compliant mobiles to request access to the system.
At any given moment, a mobile station accesses only a limited number of the
channels appearing on its radio interface.
Digital Traffic
Channels
The digital traffic channel is dedicated to the transport of user and signaling
information between the Cell Site and the mobile station, and between the mobile
station and the Cell Site. A digital traffic channel implies a forward and reverse pair
of communication paths.
Currently, the digital traffic channel only carries encoded speech at a full-rate
information rate. In the future, the digital traffic channel will be able to carry either
encoded speech or user data. When half-rate speech coding is defined for IS-54
TDMA, the digital traffic channel will be able to carry encoded speech at one of
two information rates (i.e., full rate or half rate). The half-rate channel makes use
of half as much radio resources as the full-rate channel, which leads to a two-fold
increase in spectrum efficiency.
When a Cell Site supports half-rate coding (future), each physical channel on a
TDMA radio will be able to carry one half-rate channel, meaning that a TDMA
radio will be able to support six user channels (one user channel per physical
channel.)
DTC Dedicated
Control Channels
There are two separate dedicated control channels associated with a digital traffic
channel. These channels are the slow associated control channel (SACCH) and
the fast associated control channel (FACCH). Dedicated control channels are
point-to-point bidirectional channels used after call establishment for signaling and
control.
Table 3-1.
Logical Channel Minimum Slots Maximum Slots
Logical Channel Minimum Slots Maximum Slots
F-BCCH (F)
10
E-BCCH (E)
S-BCCH (S)
15
RESERVED (R)
SPACH (NOTE)
32 - (F + E + S + R)
The digital traffic channel transmits either user information along with SACCH
data, or it transmits FACCH data in a blank-and-burst mode. FACCH is transmitted
in the data fields normally used for user information (speech data).
FACCH and user information cannot be sent simultaneously.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
3-7
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
Digital
Verification Color
Code Channels
Digital verification color code (DVCC) is the TDMA counterpart of the AMPS
supervisory audio tone (SAT). There are 255 DVCC codes as opposed to three
SAT codes, which provide greater assurance that a TDMA radio is listening to the
right mobile instead of a co-channel interferer. The same 255 DVCC codes are
available to each TDMA Cell Site.
DVCC values range from 1 to 255. It is recommended that each Cell Site be
assigned one distinct DVCC value, meaning that all of the digital traffic channels
for a particular Cell Site will have the same DVCC. A simplistic assignment
method is to assign a DVCC value that corresponds to the Cell Site number.
At a TDMA Series II Cell Site, a TDMA radio serving a mobile call continuously
transmits a coded DVCC * on the digital traffic channel to the mobile, and the
mobile continuously loops back the coded DVCC to the TDMA radio.
■
If the TDMA radio receives the correct DVCC, the serving cell knows that
continuity exists on the digital and that the call is still active.
■
If the TDMA radio receives no DVCC for a translatable timeout interval
(ranging from two to 20 seconds, specified using the RC/V ceqface form),
the serving cell considers the call to be lost and releases the digital traffic
channel and associated trunk member.
■
If the TDMA radio receives the wrong DVCC, the serving cell knows that
the mobile is in a fade condition and that either the mobile or the TDMA
radio is receiving a remote interfering signal. The cell initiates a handoff
and temporarily blocks the digital traffic channel experiencing the
interference, making the channel unavailable to handle traffic.
The interference level at which the cell blocks a channel is determined by certain
translatable values. Interference is considered unacceptable when (1) the signal
strength measured on the digital traffic channel falls below a certain translatable
signal-level threshold, (2) the frame error rate (FER) detected on the digital traffic
channel exceeds a certain translatable FER threshold, or (3) the bit error rate
(BER) detected on the digital traffic channel exceeds a certain translatable BER
threshold. For digital transmissions, signal quality depends on the accuracy of the
received frame and bit sequences.
Handoff and
Handoff Types
A handoff is the passing of a call from one traffic channel to another traffic channel
to provide better service and higher quality communication to the mobile user.
Conditions that can trigger a handoff include poor signal strength and poor signal
quality. Handoff is required to maintain a call in progress as the mobile station
passes from one Cell Site coverage area to another.
As defined in TIA IS-54, there are three types of handoff:
1.
Intra-cell handoff - Handoff within the same Cell Site
2.
Inter-cell handoff - Handoff between neighboring Cell Sites within the same
MSC
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
3-8
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
3.
Inter-MSC handoff - Handoff between neighboring Cell Sites controlled by
two different Cell Sites in two different MSCs
NOTE:
For all three types of handoff, the serving cell initiates the handoff by
sending a handoffrequest message to the MSC. Included in the message is
a list of optimal Cell Site candidates to which the call may be switched. The
MSC selects a candidate from the list and initiates the handoff-related
procedure.
There are cases where the MSC will initiate a handoff without direction from the
Cell Site, for the purpose of traffic balancing or maintenance, such as to transfer
all calls from a particular Cell Site to another so that the Cell Site can be taken
off-line for testing.
The Series II platform supports the following additional types of handoff:
Mobile-Assisted
Handoff Procedure
■
TDMA to TDMA
■
TDMA to AMPS
■
AMPS to TDMA
■
AMPS to AMPS
The TIA IS-54 standard recommends the TDMA mobile-assisted handoff (MAHO)
procedure for TDMA/AMPS dual-mode mobiles when they are served on TDMA
digital traffic channels. The mobiles measure the signal strength of neighboring
antenna faces and report the measurements to the serving cell to determine
optimal candidate faces for handoff.
The mobile-assisted handoff is a process where a mobile in TDMA mode, under
direction from a Cell Site, measures signal quality of specified RF channels.
These measurements are forwarded to the Cell Site upon request to assist in the
handoff process.
During initial call setup, the serving cell sends the mobile a Measurement Order
Message that contains a list of up to twelve frequencies, called MAHO channels.
Each frequency corresponds to a setup channel, DCCH channel, or a beacon
channel (an analog voice channel or digital traffic channel kept on at constant
power to support MAHO) associated with a physical antenna face that neighbors
the serving face.
* A coded DVCC is a 12-bit data field containing the 8-bit DVCC and four protection bits; it is sent in each timeslot of the
digital traffic channel.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
3-9
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
NOTE:
The beacon radio can also be used for voice communications, but its carrier
power level remains fixed. The beacon radio is ineligible for dynamic power
control.
When the call is established, the mobile makes signal strength measurements of
the twelve (or less) MAHO channels, once per second, and reports the
measurements to the serving cell. In addition, and also at a once-per-second rate,
the mobile measures both the signal strength and signal quality of the serving cell
and reports the measurements to the serving cell. It is from these measurements
that the Cell Site selects the most promising handoff candidates.
While the mobile is measuring the received signal strengths of the neighboring
MAHO channels and the received signal strength and quality of the serving cell,
the serving cell is measuring the received signal strength and quality of the
mobile. The serving cell analyzes both the cell-initiated and mobile-initiated
measurements to determine if a handoff will provide better service to the mobile
user.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
3-10
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
HandOff Based on Interference
(HOBIT) / INterference
Look-Ahead (INLA) Enhancements
For TDMA, interference on a serving channel is detected when any of the
following measurements exceeds its threshold:
1.
BER Threshold - Uplink Bit Error Rate (cell BER) (cell2 form)
2.
FER Threshold - Uplink Frame Error Rate (cell FER) (cell2 form)
3.
TDMA BER Avg. Sample - Downlink Bit Error Rate (mobile BER) (fci form)
When excessive cell or mobile BER or excessive cell FER cause a handoff trigger
and no better server can be found through the normal handoff process, the
Handoff Based on Interference for TDMA (HOBIT) feature allows the call to be
handed off to another radio channel on the serving logical antenna face (LAF) in
order to escape the interference.
However, the previous implementation of the HOBIT feature allowed a handoff to
another channel on the same Logical Antenna Face (LAF) when it detected
interference, regardless of whether the interference was caused by a weak signal
in a low noise/interference area or whether there truly was high noise/interference
in the signal.
This meant that a mobile in a relatively weak serving area could have a BER and/
or FER higher than the respective BER and/or FER threshold. In the previous
implementation of HOBIT, this would cause a handoff to another channel on the
same LAF. However, after the handoff, the mobile would still be in the same weak
serving area and the BER and/or FER would not be improved.
The minimum amount of time that can pass before another handoff is allowed is
set in:
Min HO int. for TDMA (fci form)
In the previous implementation of HOBIT, the Minimum Handoff Interval for TDMA,
also known as hobitime, would expire and the unimproved BER and/or FER would
result in yet another handoff to another channel on the same LAF. In this way,
HOBIT handoff could continue throughout the duration of the call without
improving voice quality. Additionally, this continuous handoff increased the
likelihood that calls would be dropped and, thereby, could actually add to the rate
of dropped calls.
Enhanced HOBIT was designed to eliminate excessive HOBIT-triggered handoffs
that were previously caused by HOBIT’s inability to distinguish between low signal
strength in the serving area and actual noise or interference on the signal
channel. Eliminating excessive HOBIT-triggered handoffs decreases the number
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
3-11
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
of dropped calls. This, in turn, increases the number of completed calls, which
increase both subscriber satisfaction and provider revenue.
The Enhanced HOBIT feature minimizes dropped calls by comparing uplink and
downlink signal strength measurements to new, provider-definable uplink and
downlink signal strength thresholds to determine whether the serving logical
antenna face (LAF) should be added to the handoff candidate list. In this way, the
E-HOBIT feature avoids handoffs within the same LAF if the handoff is based on
weak signal strength only.
The three new signal strength thresholds used by the E-HOBIT feature are:
1.
uhtdm Uplink HOBIT to Dual Mode (Fci form) Range (0-127)
2.
dhtdm Downlink HOBIT to Dual Mode (Fci form) Range (0-31)
3.
dhta Downlink HOBIT to AMPS (only) (Fci form) Range (0-31)
All three of these thresholds are provider-definable, which gives the Service
Provider a great deal of control over HOBIT handoffs to TDMA or AMPS channels.
Setting the three parameters above determines the Allowable Handoff Type, which
can be either of two values:
1.
Dual Mode (HOBIT allowed to either TDMA or AMPS)
2.
AMPS (HOBIT allowed to AMPS only).
The Allowable Handoff Type AMPS option will enable a service provider to direct
HOBIT handoffs from TDMA radios to AMPS radios, even if a second TDMA radio
is available on the same face. This allows providers to deploy their radios more
effectively.
NOTE:
These enhancements only affect the handoff criteria for potential candidate
channels on the serving LAF. They do not affect handoff criteria to neighbor
sectors or cells.
A complementary feature to HOBIT, Interference Look Ahead (INLA), improves
the quality of calls by ensuring that a handoff is made only to a channel that has
an acceptably low level of interference. INLA does this by taking the signal
strength measurements of the candidate channel and comparing them against
predefined INLA thresholds for TDMA or AMPS to determine if the level of
interference on the candidate channel is acceptable or not. The INLA thresholds
are:
INLA threshold - AMPS (RSSI) (ECP form) Range (0-31)
INLA threshold - TDMA (RSSI) (ECP form) Range (0-31)
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
3-12
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
At most, three searches are made for a clear handoff channel. Previously, the call
would be handed off on the last attempt regardless of interference. Enhanced
INLA eliminates any HOBIT-initiated handoffs to channels with excessive
interference. For all handoff triggers other than HOBIT, INLA actions remain
unchanged.
The INLA feature complements the HOBIT feature by ensuring that a
HOBIT-initiated handoff is not made to a noisy channel. While Enhanced HOBIT
minimizes the number of dropped calls caused by interference, INLA improves the
quality of handoffs by preventing a handoff from one channel with an
unacceptable interference level to another channel with an equally unacceptable
interference level. Lucent strongly recommends that these two features be used
together to both minimize the number of dropped calls and improve the quality of
calls that are handed off.
Based on these three thresholds, and assuming that the serving LAF is the only
potential handoff candidate, the possible results of HOBIT/INLA are: Handoff from
TDMA to TDMA or AMPS, handoff from TDMA to AMPS, or the handoff is
aborted.
The Enhanced HOBIT/INLA features work with TDMA-compliant mobiles. Other
than that, the Enhanced HOBIT feature has no additional, specific hardware
requirements.
Enhanced HOBIT/INLA feature require ECP and Cell Release 12.0. Lucent
strongly recommends that both Enhanced HOBIT and INLA be used together for
maximum effectiveness.
No new FAF or QFAF provisions will be required to support the HOBIT or INLA
enhancements.
E-HOBIT and INLA are activated when the fields below are set to "y."
HO INT TDMA (cell2 form)
INLA (cell2 form)
Service Measurements (SM)
HOBIT/INLA introduces the six new Service Measurements below: Series 2
TDMA ECP Logical Antenna Face Counts (ECP-LAF-TDMA)
1.
ECP-LAF TDMA Field 11 - HOBIT Request Aborted Due to Interference
Series II TDMA Logical Antenna Face Counts (LAF-TDMA)
2.
LAF-TDMA Field 46 - HOBIT Request to Dual Mode of Serving Face
3.
LAF-TDMA Field 47 - HOBIT Request to AMPS Due to Weak Uplink Signal
4.
LAF-TDMA Field 48 - HOBIT Request to AMPS Due to Weak Downlink
Signal
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
3-13
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
5.
LAF-TDMA Field 49 - HOBIT Request with Weak Uplink Signal
6.
LAF-TDMA Field 50 - HOBIT Request Aborted Due to Weak Downlink
Signal
For complete details regarding the Enhanced HOBIT Feature, please refer to
Lucent Technologies Practices document 401-612-237, HandOff Based on
Interference (TDMA).
Handoffs based on interference will be made only to a TDMA time slot on a
different DRU from the serving DRU. If no such time slot is available, the call will
be handed off to an analog channel.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
3-14
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
Switch-Based TDMA Voice Coder/
Decoder (Vocoder)
Currently, vocoders and echo cancellers used in the Autoplexr TDMA system are
located in the Digital Radio Units (DRUs) and the Enhanced DRUs (EDRUs) at the
Cell Site (CS). This feature relocates the vocoders and echo cancellers from the
EDRUs to the Packet Handler for Voice (PHV3 and/or PHV4) boards at the
5ESS-2000 DCSr (Digital Cellular Switch). Implementation, then, requires PHV3
and/or PHV4 boards at the DCS. This feature does not relocate the vocoders from
the DRUs to the DCS. This feature will henceforth be referred to as the
"Switch-Based TDMA Vocoder Relocation" feature.
The Switch-Based Vocoder feature is offered to the customer on a per cell basis.
The feature is switched on via a Qualified Feature Activation File (QFAF) (i.e., the
feature is "QFAF-able"). It does not impact the mobiles and has no external
product or OEM dependencies.
The Switch-Based Vocoder feature provides the following benefits:
1.
Facilities concentration
2.
Vocoder/Echo Canceller pooling
3.
Platform for multiple speech coding algorithm support (n>=2)
4.
Semi-soft handoff
5.
Packet mode transport
The benefits and rationales are discussed below.
Facilities
Concentration
Speech carried via TDMA is compressed and digitized (encoded) into an 8Kb/s
stream by the voice coder/decoder (vocoder) located inside the mobile unit. The
channel coder adds error protection to the 8Kb/s stream, which results in a 13 Kb/
s stream that is then broadcast over the air to the Cell Site (CS).
When the CS receives the 13 Kb/s stream, the channel coder strips the error
protection bits off and performs error correction which leaves the 8Kb/s stream.
The vocoder in an EDRU radio board then decodes the 8Kb/s stream into a 64Kb/
s u-law/a-law Pulse Code Modulated (PCM) stream. The 64Kb/s PCM stream is
sent to the DCS at the Mobile Switching Center (MSC) via a Digital Switch level 0
(DS0). A DS0 carries a single mobile’s conversation (i.e., 64Kb/s PCM stream)
between the CS and the DCS.
It is the 64Kb/s PCM stream (and the overhead bits required for transport) that
requires the exclusive use of one DS0 to transmit the stream from the CS to the
DCS. If the CS vocoder were relocated at the DCS, then the much smaller 8Kb/s
stream would not require the exclusive service of one DS0 to be transmitted from
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
3-15
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
the CS to the DCS. This would free up DS0s to carry more traffic, thereby
increasing the number of calls per facility and decreasing the number of facilities
required. Therefore, for Release 12.0, vocoders inside the EDRU radio boards at
the CS have been relocated to the Packet Handler for Voice (PHV) boards at the
DCS.
This feature provides a concentration of at least 3 to 1 TDMA calls on the facilities
between the DCS and the Series II CSs. As the system evolves, this concentration
will increase. However, this feature will not impact pre-existing system
performance or call setup times.
Vocoder / Echo Canceller Pooling
Each radio time slot requires one vocoder and one echo canceller. That is, each
time slot requires a vocoder/echo-canceller pair. Relocating the vocoders to the
DCS centralizes them and lets the provider pool them, which reduces the number
of vocoders required. The number of vocoders needed can be set by the
technician depending on the expected traffic and service grade (i.e. blocking rate)
instead of depending on the number of radios needed to physically cover a
service area.
Because the echo cancellers are included with the vocoders in the Packet Handler
for Voice (PHV) boards they are also centralized and pooled. These echo
cancellers are part of the standard feature package. Customers who do not want
to use the standard echo cancellers or who want to install third party echo
canceller boards, can use the RCV mechanism, which is also provided, to bypass
the PHV echo cancellers.
Platform for Multiple Speech Coding Algorithm Support
The EDRU previously supported a maximum of two speech coding algorithms
which could be switched on a per call basis. Relocating the vocoders to a
centralized platform allows the EDRU to support multiple (two or more) speech
coding algorithms. In the 5ESS-2000 DCS Switch, each PHV board can support
one type of algorithm. As new algorithms are standardized, this feature makes it
easier to implement and support these future speech coders. Additional PHV
boards can be added or existing PHV boards can be downloaded with the new
algorithms. Then, calls can be assigned to a particular vocoder based on the
algorithm requested by the mobile.
* This architecture supports packet mode transport. In packet mode transport, overhead/control bits are added to the 8
Kb/s stream.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
3-16
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
Semi-soft Handoff (intra-DCS, inter-DCS)
The definition of a TDMA semi-soft handoff is:
■
Different Frequency (hard handoff at the CS)
■
Same Vocoder / Echo Canceller (soft handoff at the DCS)
The Switch-Based Vocoder feature improves the voice quality of a call during
handoff in two ways:
1.
It reduces the amount of processing needed for handoff because
reassignment and switching of some components is not necessary.
2.
Because the same vocoder/echo-canceller pair are used throughout, you
do not have the degradation of voice quality observed whenever a new
vocoder and echo canceller pair is needed for a handoff.
The reason for the degradation of voice quality observed when a new vocoder/
echo-canceller pair is needed is that algorithms for echo cancellers require an
initial training period to adjust to the particular characteristics of the voices in each
conversation. If a new vocoder and echo canceller is not needed for a handoff,
then any degradation of voice quality observed in the past will no longer occur with
semi-soft handoff.
Intra-DCS Semi-soft Handoff
A Semi-soft handoff within the DCS (Intra-DCS) forces the same vocoder/echo
canceller pair to be used when the mobile switches from one frequency to
another, as long as the new frequency is provided by the same CS (intra-cell) or
by the same sector (intra-sector). Intra-DCS Semi-soft Handoff is also used when
the mobile switches from one frequency to another and the new frequency is
provided by a different CS (inter-cell) but where that CS terminates on the same
DCS (intra-switch). For this functionality to work in a DCS with more than one
Packet Switching Unit (PSU), all the PSUs within the DCS have to be
interconnected via Packet Handler for Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) boards
(PHA boards). The Switch-Based Vocoder feature supports Intra-DCS semi-soft
handoff.
Inter-DCS Semi-soft Handoff
Currently, the Switch-Based Vocoder feature does not support Inter-DCS
semi-soft handoff. However, we will define it here to complete the discussion of
handoff types. Inter-DCS semi-soft handoff forces the same vocoder/echo
canceller pair to be used when the mobile switches from one frequency to another
and the new frequency is provided by a CS that terminates on another switch
(inter-DCS). The interconnection of a collection of PSUs from a group of switches
can be used to create a large, virtual vocoder pool across a large coverage area
(e.g. nationwide).
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
3-17
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
Packet Mode Transport
The Switch-Based Vocoder feature implements a packet mode transport Link
Access Protocol on D-channel (LAP-D/Frame Relay variant) to transmit voice
frames between the CS and the DCS. Packet mode transport is implemented as a
step towards evolving to an architecture based on a packet mode backbone using
packet mode standards such as ATM or Frame Relay (FR). In the future, this
architecture will allow system components (i.e. Cell Sites, Switches, etc.) to hook
into established ATM/FR wide area networks and to achieve connectivity with
each other.
Packet Pipe (PP) Implementation
In the Series II CSs, the PP transport software is implemented in the EDRU. One
of the six Digital Signal Processors (DSPs) that previously processed the vocoder
and echo canceller algorithms has been reused to support the PP transport
protocol. Installing this feature in field-deployed CSs only requires a download of
new software to the DSP. The CS does not require any hardware changes to
support this feature.
The FRPH and PHV packet handler boards are not supported on the Classic
Switch Modules (SMs). Therefore, at least one SM-2000 per DCS is required to
implement this feature. Pre-existing trunk terminations on the Classic SMs,
however, do not need to be changed to implement this feature. Changes can be
made within the 5ESS-2000 DCS switch to re-route the DS0s coming into the
Classic SMs out to an SM-2000. Today, those DS0s are sent to outgoing PSTN
trunks.
The Switch-Based Vocoder feature is supported on T1 and E1 voice/data trunks.
T1 voice/data trunks are four-wire voice/data trunks that carry 24 duplex channels
via 64Kb/s time slices. E1 voice/data trunks are four-wire voice/data trunks that
carry 30 duplex channels via 56Kb/s time slices.
Cell Sites
Supported by the
Switch-Based
Vocoder feature
The Switch-Based Vocoder feature supports Cell Sites (CSs) with some or all of
the following configurations:
■
All EDRUs and DRUs with vocoders in the CS
■
All EDRUs with vocoders in the DCS
■
Mixed configuration of all EDRUs with vocoders in the DCS and all DRUs
with vocoders in the CS
Use of DS1 and/or DFI boards at the cell
For TDMA Cells, the following applies:
Switch-based vocoder packet pipe (PP) has been successfully implemented on
Series II TDMA cell sites that have traditional DS1 boards installed. However, the
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
3-18
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
traditional DS1 board only supports a 56Kb packet pipe rate. Also, the DS1 board
is manufacturer discontinued and is being replaced by the 3500B DFI board. That
means that switch-based vocoder packet pipe can also be implemented on the
new TDMA PCS minicells, which have the 3500B DFI boards installed.
Additionally, the 3500B DFI board supports both the 56Kb and the 64Kb packet
pipe rates.
For CDMA Cells, the following applies:
Switch-based vocoder packet pipe (PP) implementation on CDMA cell sites
requires that DFI boards be installed at the cell.
Operation,
Administration,
and Maintenance
(OA&M)
To facilitate Operation, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M), the
Switch-Based Vocoder feature uses new and/or modified:
1.
Recent Change (RC/V) screens
2.
Technician Interface (TI) input commands and output reports
3.
Status Display Pages (SDP). These forms allow the technician to:
— Designate each cell as being configured with the vocoder in the cell
or the vocoder in the DCS
— Assign a vocoder algorithm to each PHV board at the DCS
— Assign radio timeslots to Packet Pipes (PPs)
— Assign DS0s to PPs
— Bypass the echo cancellers in the PHV boards at the DCS
To facilitate Packet Pipe (PP) maintenance, Man-Machine Language (MML)
commands are also provided with the Switch-Based Vocoder feature.
Existing input and output commands and status display pages used for
maintenance of TDMA PPs on the Executive Cell Processor Complex (ECPC), the
cell, and the 5ESS-2000 DCS Switch have been updated to reflect that PP
maintenance does not apply specifically to CDMA technology.
Cell Site OA&M
Implementing the PP protocol changes the structure of CS trunks from full rate
64Kb/s DS0s that can handle only one call, to groups of DS0s that support a
parameterized number of multiplexed calls. This impacts trunk maintenance, as
described below.
Maintenance actions (such as remove, restore, diagnostics) that were previously
performed on a trunk (DS0) basis are now also performed on a PP trunk basis, if
the Switch-Based Vocoder feature is implemented. The difference is that when a
maintenance action is performed on a DS0 it affects only one call, whereas when
a maintenance action is performed on a PP, it can affect more than one call.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
3-19
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
The Maintenance Request Administrator (MRA) at the Radio Control Complex
(RCC) continues to handle all such maintenance requests (i.e., remove, restore,
diagnostics). Those translations in the RCC have been updated to check and
report the status of PP trunks, in addition to the status of pre-existing trunks.
Maintaining PP status allows the RCC to take appropriate action for any
maintenance requested on a PP.
Therefore, a CS with a mixture of DRUs and EDRUs, and with the Switch-Based
Vocoder feature implemented, continues to support all the OA&M of pre-existing
trunks as well as that of the new PPs. The RCC also supports both
technician-initiated and autonomous maintenance actions requested for a PP.
Additionally, the RCC/EDRU detects and reports any PP failure(s) back to the
ECPC (i.e. transmit identification [XID] packets are not received in time, voice
packets do not arrive when expected, etc.). The CS receives, recognizes, and acts
on PP status messages received from the ECPC.
For CS EDRUs for which the vocoder has been relocated at the DCS,
vocoder-specific OA&M has been disabled and all other OA&M functionality
remains. EDRU testing that requires a vocoder has been re-implemented to be
independent of the need to have a vocoder at the CS.
The following radio-related OA&M subsystems that reside in the Radio Control
Complex (RCC) have been redesigned:
Configuration Utilities (CFUT)
Diagnostics (DN)
Measurement (MEAS)
These subsystems, which operate within the CS, have been redesigned because
certain functions performed by the Vocoder no longer exist in every EDRU.
In particular, for those EDRUs whose vocoders have been moved to the DCS,
there are:
■
No Vocoder MUTE/UNMUTE settings
■
No Vocoder Tx/Rx Gain settings
■
No Vocoder Tx Tones generated
The only EDRU-specific Diagnostic test impacted by the Switch-Based Vocoder
feature is the Baseband Transmission Level test. Voice-band tests include the
Baseband Transmission Level Test of the DN subsystem and Audio Level
Measurements of the MEAS subsystem. The MEAS subsystem performs Audio
Level Measurements in both Transmit (Tx) and Receive (Rx) directions.
Voice-band tests use a Clock And Tone (CAT) board to generate and detect a
tone, and a TDMA Radio Test Unit (TRTU) to emulate a mobile phone.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
3-20
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
Because the voice encoding/decoding (vocoding) functions are still necessary to
carry out voice-band tests, Vector Sum Excited Linear Predictive (VSELP)
vocoding is provided by an EDRU’s Packet Pipe Digital Signal Processor (PP
DSP) that talks only to Time Slot 2. The RCC changes the operating mode of an
EDRU’s PP DSP to VSELP vocoding mode before conducting any voice-band
test. When the PP DSP operates as a VSELP vocoder, the muting functions
default to off and the Tx/Rx Gains default to 0x4000 (i.e., there is no Vocoder Gain
setting, no MUTE/UNMUTE setting, and no Tx Tone). The RX/TX Audio Level
Measurements are not affected by the Network Transmission Level (NTL).
To perform the DN, MEAS and CFUT test functions, the RCC directly controls the
DSPs of the EDRU via the TDM message "RMRCC2DSP". This message is
relayed by the Maintenance Handler (MH) subsystem of the EDRU to an
appropriate DSP while the EDRU is in the maintenance mode.
Below is a summary of the radio-related OA&M subsystems that reside in the
RCC, and how they are affected by the Switch-Based Vocoder feature.
Diagnostic subsystem (DN)
■
The Baseband Transmission Level Test is performed only on Time Slot 2,
without any Vocoder Gain settings based on NTL.
■
The Diagnostics are not affected by the absence of the MUTE/UNMUTE
settings.
■
The pre-existing Diagnostics continue to function, without the Tx Tones
from the EDRU and the Test Radio.
■
The system performs a PP DSP version check.
Measurement subsystem (MEAS)
■
Tx/Rx Audio Level Measurements are no longer affected by NTL because
the Vocoder Gain settings are no longer supported.
■
Audio Level Measurements are only performed on Time Slot 2.
■
The other measurements made by the Technician Interface (TI) "MEAS"
remain unchanged.
Configuration Utilities subsystem (CFUT)
■
The CAT Tone can only be connected to Time Slot 2.
■
There are no MUTE/UNMUTE settings.
ECPC OA&M Support of the Cell Site
In the Switch-Based Vocoder feature, the RC/V DB for the ECPC Subsystem
allows the technician to specify a group of contiguous DS0s (1 to 8) on one DS-1
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
3-21
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
to make up one Packet Pipe (PP). The RC/V DB restricts the width of a PP to 1
DS0 for Series II CSs.
The ECPC Subsystem supports the Cell Site(s) as follows:
Feature Activation
and Installation
■
Provides the maintenance commands for PPs and notifies the CS of PP
status changes
■
Handles PP failure messages from the CS
■
Supports OA&M of trunks and PPs
■
Supports audits for pre-existing CS trunks and for the new CS PPs
The Switch-Based Vocoder feature is offered to the customer on a per cell basis.
Therefore, customers may opt to have some cells with vocoders at the DCS and
some cells with vocoders in the CS mixed within the same system. The feature is
switched on via a Qualified Feature Activation File (QFAF) (i.e., the feature is
"QFAF-able"). It does not impact the mobiles and has no external product or OEM
dependencies.
Feature activation data is downloadable to the cell sites via translations. The
ECPC RC/ V DB software and the RCV interface allow the customer to assign this
feature to particular CSs and specifies which CSs have the feature implemented,
so that the correct images can be downloaded and activated at the cell sites.
At the cell site, a new NVM image is downloaded into those EDRUs for which the
Switch-Based Vocoder Feature is activated, to support the Packet Pipe (PP)
protocol at both the DSP and the EDRU main controller.
Call processing and OA&M software execute properly for either state of an EDRU,
with this feature activated or without.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
3-22
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
Separate Access Thresholds for
DCCHs and DTCs (SEPA)
This section describes the feature called "Separate Access Thresholds for
DCCHs and DTCs"(SEPA), developed in response to AMUG 36-12. The SEPA
feature is a standard feature which does not require activation. It is being
introduced in Cell Software Release R12.0 and ECP Release 12.0 for the Time
Division Multiple Access (TDMA) Cellular (850 MHz) and PCS (1.8 GHz) Series II
product family. The SEPA feature interfaces and functions with the TDMA R12.0
cell site and the ECP R12.0 (MSC) in both the Cellular and PCS configurations.
Let us begin our discussion of the (SEPA) feature, with some definitions and
background information.
To begin, let us look at the Digital Control Channel (DCCH). The DCCH transmits
the control information needed to set-up and handle a digital call between a Cell
Site and an IS-136-compliant digital mobile station. For the purpose of discussing
the SEPA feature, the DCCH carries:
■
Page Response messages that the mobile sends to the cell site in
response to a paging messages that the cell site has sent to the mobile
■
Mobile-Origination messages that the mobile sends to the cell site to alert
the cell site that the mobile is initiating a call. The DCCH is carried on user
channel 1 of a TDMA Digital Radio Unit (DRU) or Enhanced DRU (EDRU).
Because the DRU and the EDRU carry three channels, a DCCH DRU or
EDRU can carry two Digital Traffic Channels (DTCs) in addition to the
DCCH. A DTC transmits the actual content, the digitally-encoded speech,
of a call.
The DCCH sends messages from the cell site "down to" the mobile on its
downlink (aka forward link) over three logical channels:
1.
SPACH (SMS Point-to-point, Paging, and Access Response Channel)
2.
BCCH (Broadcast Control Channel)
3.
SCF (Shared Channel Feedback)
The SMS point-to-point, Paging, and Access Response Channel (SPACH) carries
messages from the cell site to the mobile. SPACH is itself divided into the three
following subchannels according to the type of message carried:
1.
SMS Channel: Delivers short messages to a specific mobile unit when the
SMS feature is active
2.
Paging Channel: Delivers pages and orders
3.
Access Response Channel (ARCH): Conveys call handling information in
response to a mobile unit attempt to access the system
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
3-23
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
To access a digital cellular network, an IS-136 mobile must first access a DCCH.
The "Access Threshold"of a cell site is a parameter that is used to determine
whether a mobile will be granted access to the cell site. Starting with Cell Release
8.0, the determination is made by comparing the Mobile Power Class (MPC) of
the mobile to the Access Threshold of the cell site. MPCs are recognized for
Class-I, Class-II, Class-III, and Class-IV mobiles. Class I and Class II mobile are
higher-powered; Class III and Class IV mobiles are lower-powered and often used
in buildings and cars. A service provider can lower the Access Threshold
parameter to make it easier for Class III and IV mobiles to access the cell site. In
any event, the determination is left completely up to the Service Provider.
The SEPA feature allows the Service Provider to set the currently existing
minimum received signal strength required to access the DCCH, the
RSS_ACC_MIN threshold, to a relatively low value. This way, if a mobile requests
access to a DCCH but the DCCH is busy, the mobile can "camp on" the SMS
Channel (defined above) of the DCCH. For the mobile to "camp on" the DCCH,
means that the mobile will continue monitoring the busy/idle status of the DCCH
until the DCCH is free to service the mobile or until a timeout occurs.
Once a mobile has successfully accessed a DCCH and acquired synchronization,
it decodes the data sent "down" to it by the cell site over the Broadcast Control
Channel (BCCH) of the DCCH.
BCCH data is sent from the cell site "down to" the mobile on its downlink (aka
forward link).
The BCCH logical channel is used to send system-related overhead and control
information, such as system identification, neighbor lists of other DCCHs, and the
DCCH frame structure of the cell, to the mobiles. The BCCH transmits this
information to the mobile over three BCCH subchannels:
1.
Fast Broadcast Control Channel (F-BCCH)
2.
Extended Broadcast Control Channel (E-BCCH)
3.
Short Message Service Broadcast Control Channel (S-BCCH)
The Fast BCCH sends time-critical data from the cell site to the mobile. The
Extended BCCH (E-BCCH) broadcasts information that is less time-critical than
F-BCCH information, such as Neighbor Cell Lists and Signal Strength
Measurements, to the mobiles. The E-BCCH channel also plays a major role in
Mobile-Assisted Channel Allocation (MACA).
Mobile-Assisted Channel Allocation (MACA) requires an IS-136-compatible
mobile with MACA capability. MACA is the process by which a cell site asks a
mobile that has accessed one of its DCCHs to measure and report the downlink
signal strength of the serving DCCH and of the idle channels at the cell site. The
cell site uses these measurements to determine which of the available channels
offers the best downlink channel quality.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
3-24
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
The MACA_TYPE parameter, which is in the MACA message sent by the
E_BCCH from the cell site to the mobile, tells the mobile when to generate a
MACA report. In the SEPA feature, the MACA_TYPE parameter is fixed to Report
MACA at Page Responses and Origination. Therefore, every time the IS-136
mobile sends an Origination or Page Response to the cell site, it also sends a
MACA report.
The MACA_STATUS parameter, that is in the MACA message sent by the
E_BCCH from the cell site to the mobile, tells the mobile which MACA function(s)
to perform and to report back to the cell site. In the SEPA feature, the
MACA_STATUS parameter is fixed at MACA STM enabled, indicating that the
IS-136 mobile will perform and send a Short Term Received Signal Strength
(ST_RSS) measurement for the current DCCH. The ST_RSS value reported by
the mobile is an average of at least four measurements of the serving DCCH’s
signal strength. How is this measurement used? Let us return to the subject
"Access Threshold."
The Separate Access Thresholds for DCCH and DTC (SEPA) feature introduces
an additional cell site Access Threshold- the DCCH_SETUP_ACCESS parameter.
When the cell site receives an Origination or Page Response from an IS-136
mobile camped on the SMS Channel of a DCCH, it also receives the MACA report
of the serving DCCH’s signal strength (ST_RSS).
The cell compares the DCCH’s signal strength (ST_RSS) to the
DCCH_SETUP_ACCESS parameter. The call is set up only if the signal strength
of the serving DCCH (ST_RSS) is greater than or equal to the
DCCH_SETUP_ACCESS threshold. This SEPA feature is only applicable for
mobiles with MACA capability. For mobiles without MACA capability, the additional
cell site Access Threshold check is not made and the call proceeds as usual.
The DCCH_SETUP_ACCESS parameter is a per-sector, translatable parameter
for which there is an RC/V change to the ceqface form.
The SEPA feature introduces a second additional cell site Access Threshold, the
ISS_DR_DCCH parameter. The ISS_DR_DCCH parameter indicates whether the
Insufficient Signal Strength Directed Retry feature is enabled for the serving
DCCH/ sector. By setting the ISS_DR_DCCH parameter, the service provider
controls the conditions under which a Directed Retry will occur.
A call will be given directed retry when all of the following conditions are met:
■
The ST_RSS measurement is below the cell site’s
DCCH_SETUP_ACCESS threshold.
■
The ISS_DR_DCCH Directed Retry feature is enabled for the serving
DCCH/ sector.
■
In the last ISS_DR_DCCH received by the cell site, the Directed Retry bit is
not set.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
3-25
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
For either of the two combinations of conditions below:
■
The ST_RSS measurement is below the DCCH_SETUP_ACCESS
threshold.
■
The ISS_DR_DCCH’s Directed Retry bit is set for the serving sector.
- or -
■
The ST_RSS measurement is below the DCCH_SETUP_ACCESS
threshold.
■
In the last ISS_DR_DCCH received by the cell site, the Directed Retry bit is
not set.
The following two actions will be taken:
A Reorder message will be sent from the cell to the mobile to allow the mobile to
attempt an Origination.
- and A Release message will be sent to the mobile to allow it to attempt a Page
Response.
The ISS_DR_DCCH parameter is a per-sector, translatable parameter for which
there is an RC/V change to the ceqface form.
The SEPA feature also has two new Service Measurement Counters as follows:
TEDRTORIGINS is a count of the Directed Retries on DCCH Origination, which
are caused by the ST_RSS measurement being below the cell site’s
DCCH_SETUP_ACCESS threshold. TEDRTORIGINS is measured at the Cell
and pegged (i.e., counted) per Physical Antenna Face (PAF).
TEDRTRTERMINS is a count of the Directed Retries on DCCH Termination,
which are caused by the ST_RSS measurement being below the cell site’s
DCCH_SETUP_ACCESS threshold. TEDRTRTERMINS is measured at the Cell
and pegged (i.e., counted) per PAF.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
3-26
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
Two-Branch Intelligent Anntenna
(TBIA)
EDRU and DRM
implementation of
TBIA
The Two-Branch Intelligent Anntenna (TBIA) feature is implemented in the
Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU) and the Dual Radio Module (DRM), which
are both digital radios. The TBIA feature does not apply to analog equipment or to
analog signals on digital equipment.
The EDRU is in the Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) family of products and
is used in the Series II Classic, Series IIe, Series IIm, Series IImm, and Personal
Communications Systems (PCS) TDMA Minicell products. The DRM is in Lucent’s
Flexent family of products. The TBIA feature does not have or add a separate
EDRU or DRM Non-Volatile Memory (NVM) image. Both the existing EDRU NVM
images (packet pipe & non-packet pipe) incorporate the new software. The TBIA
feature requires TDMA R13 software.
The TBIA feature is implemented via software modifications in the Digital Signal
Processors (DSPs) in the EDRU and the DRM. No changes need to be made to
any Cell Site hardware. Therefore, the TBIA feature does not impact an existing
base station’s RF footprint, antennas, size, or power. The TBIA feature does not
require any external products and has no OEM dependencies. The TBIA feature
has no impact on mobiles. Therefore, no particular mobile types are required.
For both the EDRU and the DRM, the TBIA feature is applied to the:
TBIA Performance
■
Digital Traffic Channel (DTC)
■
Digital Control Channel (DCCH)
The critical aspect of the TBIA feature is that in an interference dominated
environment, it provides better voice quality on the reverse link (Mobile to Base
Station) by reducing the perceived Bit-Error Ratio (BER) on the order of 3 dB, in
the presence of co-channel interference. That is, on average, BER decreases by a
nominal 3 dB when compared to the Maximal Ratio Combining (MRC) technique
previously used by the EDRU and the DRM to combine receive diversities.
The level of improvement depends on the distribution of co-channel users in
neighboring cells. Using software processing, The TBIA feature allows each 30
kHz TDMA channel, to reduce or eliminate the effects of co-channel interference
within the EDRU’s or DRM’s field of view using baseband processing that
combines the spatially separated diversities and applies the adaptive interference
rejection. The TBIA feature’s baseband processing is able to steer a spatial null at
one co-channel interferer.
In a noise limited environment, the TBIA feature equals the performance of the
existing maximal ratio combining technique used and does not significantly
degrade the performance (received SINR or lost call rate) of the EDRU or DMR.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
3-27
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
Therefore, while the TBIA feature does not improve Carrier-to-Noise (C/N)
performance it does not degrade it.
NOTE:
When the TBIA feature is turned on, the service provider may witness lower
average C/I measurements derived from PLM data. This does not mean
that the interference levels have worsened; rather, it is due to improved BER
performance in the presence of the interference.
Finally, while the TBIA feature does not increase the existing capacity or range of
a base station in a noise limited environment, it can be used with a tower top Low
Noise Amplifier (LNA) to provide interference rejection and range extension on the
reverse link in a noise limited environment.
TBIA Availability
To expedite the TBIA feature to customers in the field, Lucent is releasing it in two
phases. Phase one incorporates the adaptive interference rejection technique,
versus the previously used Maximal Ratio Combining technique, into the
differential path of the DSPs in the EDRU and the DRM. Phase two of the feature
will add the adaptive interference rejection technique into the trellis equalization
path.
TBIA Activation
The TBIA feature is activated by a Qualified Feature Activation File (QFAF) on a
per Cell Site basis. There are no QFAF activation translations for selecting the
differential detection path versus the equalization path in the EDRU or the DRM.
The TBIA feature is enabled (or disabled) from the Mobile Switching Center
(MSC) by translations which select adaptive interference rejection mode, or
maximal ratio combining mode, on a logical face by face basis for the DTC and a
sector by sector basis for the DCCH.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
3-28
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
3-29
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
3-30
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
4
Code Division Multiple Access
(CDMA)
Contents
■
Contents
4-1
■
CDMA Overview
4-4
Transition to CDMA
4-4
CDMA Advantages Compared with AMPS and TDMA
4-5
Capacity
4-7
■
CDMA/AMPS Dual-Mode Operation
4-8
■
Lucent Technologies CDMA Architecture
4-9
Hardware Requirements
4-9
Speech-Handling Equipment at the DCS
4-10
Call Setup
4-12
Mobile-to-Mobile Calls
4-13
Radio Equipment
4-14
Radio Control Complex (RCC)
4-14
CDMA Series II Cell Site Radio Control Complex (RCC)
Shelf Changes
4-14
Cabinet Configurations
4-15
Radio Shelf
4-22
TDM Bus Addresses
4-23
Circuit Pack Light-Emitting Diodes (LEDs) and Connectors
4-24
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
4-1
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Radios and Radio Equipment
CDMA Channel Constituents
4-24
CDMA Channel Unit (CCU) - CDMA Release 1
4-25
Thirteen-kbps Channel Unit (TCU) - CDMA Release 2
4-25
Mobile Switching Center (MSC)
4-25
Enhanced CDMA Channel Unit (ECU-3V(Q)) CDMA Release 5
4-25
Enhanced CDMA Channel Unit (ECU-3V(L)) CDMA Release 7
4-26
CDMA Cluster Controller (CCC)
4-26
CDMA Channel Unit (CCU)
4-27
Bus Interface Unit (BIU)
4-30
Analog Conversion Unit (ACU)
4-30
Baseband Combiner and Radio (BCR)
4-30
Synchronized Clock and Tone (SCT)
4-31
Digital Facilities Interface (DFI)
4-31
CRTU Components
4-32
CRTU mobile (CRTUm)
4-33
4-34
Typical Configurations
4-35
4-35
Reference Frequency and Timing Generator
4-36
Installing an RFTG
4-36
Field Upgrade of an RFTG
4-36
CDMA Series II Cell Site Generator Input
4-39
New Features and Upgrades
4-40
Cell Site Synchronization Failure Warning &
Correction: Phase 1
4-40
New CDMA Cluster Controller (CCC) Board with
Increased SRAM
4-40
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Double Density Growth Frame (DDGF)
401-660-100 Issue 11
4-35
15-MHz Reference Frequency
4-42
CDMA DDGF Description
4-42
DDGF Architecture
4-42
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
4-2
4-34
CDMA Subcell Configuration
Timing Requirements
■
4-31
CRTU interface (CRTUi)
CDMA Series II Configuration Options
■
4-24
August 2000
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Frame Architecture
4-42
CDMA Radio Complex (CRC) Circuit Packs
4-42
Frame Configuration
4-46
Using the DDGF in a Series II Analog Cell Site
4-47
Cell Site Requirements
4-47
Configurations Supported for DDGF
4-47
Series II Configurations and Cell Site Line-Up
Supported for DDGF
4-47
Circuit Pack Placement for Series II Cell Site DDGF
Configurations
4-48
Recent Change and Verify (RC/V) forms
4-51
DDGF Interface
4-52
RFTG
4-52
CDMA DDGF Power Requirements and Distribution
4-55
CDMA DDGF +24 Volt Power Requirements
4-55
+24 Volt Power Distribution
4-55
Grounding Requirements
4-55
Volt DC Return (Grounding)
4-55
Frame and Base Station Grounding
4-56
Cable Installation for the DDGF
4-57
Connecting the DDGF to Frames in a Series II
4-59
Time Division Multiplex (TDM) Bus 1
4-65
TDM Bus Termination and Interconnection Cabling
4-65
CDMA Radio Test Unit Module and Interface
4-65
CRTUm and RSP Interaction
4-65
CDMA Radio Test Unit Module (CRTUm)
4-67
CRTUi/CRTUm/RCB/RSP Control And RF Interface
4-68
DDGF Impact on RF Testing
4-69
Alarms
4-69
415AE (or 415AC) DC-To-DC Converter Alarms
4-71
CDMA CRC Shelf Circuit Pack LED Indicators
4-71
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
4-3
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
CDMA Overview
CDMA is a method that increases voice traffic on the existing cellular frequency
spectrum. CDMA is defined within the IS-95 document, which was produced by
the Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) TR45.5 Subcommittee on
Wideband Spectrum Digital Technology.
CDMA promises to increase the capacity of current AMPS cellular networks by as
much as ten-fold, as well as provide for new user applications and improved
quality of service. The Series II CDMA technology conforms to the TIA IS-95
standard.
CDMA uses a direct sequence spread spectrum technology. In this technology
radio signals are spread across a single 1.23 MHz-wide frequency band.
Individual calls are modulated by the three unique Pseudo-random Number (PN)
codes during transmission and decoded using those three codes during
reception. Signals that do not contain the code matches are treated as noise and
ignored. By using this method, a large number of CDMA calls may occupy the
same frequency spectrum simultaneously. Two or more users communicate
simultaneously over the same wide frequency band. (The wide frequency band is
referred to as the CDMA carrier.) To distinguish between users, the system
assigns each user a distinct binary code.
The system spreads the transmitted power over a wide frequency band so that the
power per unit bandwidth (watts per hertz) is very small. Then, at the receiver, the
signal is compressed into its original narrow band while leaving the power of other
(interfering) signals scattered over that same extremely wide transmission band.
With CDMA, the bandwidth of a user’s data is spread over a larger bandwidth
(1.23 MHz) by multiplying it by a binary code (sequence). The same code is used
by the receiver to undo the spreading and recover the original data—
accomplished by multiplying the received signal by the known code and filtering
through a low-pass filter. The other users’ data, whose codes do not match, are
not despread in bandwidth; they contribute only to the noise and represent a selfinterference generated by the system. There is no hard limit on the number of
system users.
Transition to
CDMA
CDMA, TDMA, and AMPS can coexist in the same cellular system. Initially, CDMA
will be assigned to 1.23 MHz of the cellular frequency spectrum, which is the
minimum practical spectrum that CDMA can use.
A set of Cell Sites capable of covering the entire geographic area will be identified
and equipped with CDMA radio equipment. (The number of Cell Sites will be far
fewer than required by AMPS, as clarified in the following section, Advantages
Compared with AMPS and TDMA.) Although only the selected Cell Sites are
equipped with CDMA radio equipment, the 1.23-MHz segment of spectrum for the
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
4-4
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
CDMA carrier is set aside in all Cell Sites in the local area (that is, the area of
coverage), to prevent mutual interference between AMPS and CDMA
transmissions.
The CDMA technology can be added to the Series II Cell Site by (1) adding one or
two CDMA growth radio channel frames (RCFs), (2) replacing the reference
frequency generator with a reference frequency and timing generator (RFTG) to
support timing based on a Global Positioning System (GPS), and (3) adding a
GPS antenna.
AMPS and TDMA technologies can be supported in other RCFs, if desired. A
typical technology integrated configuration will consist of a primary RCF for AMPS
and a CDMA growth RCF for CDMA.
CDMA
Advantages
Compared with
AMPS and TDMA
The real advantage of CDMA is the way it exploits the sporadic nature of
conversation. People speak only about 35% of the time during a typical telephone
conversation. When users assigned to the CDMA carrier are not talking, all others
on the carrier benefit with less interference. The voice activity factor reduces
mutual interference by 65%, increasing the actual carrier capacity by three times.
Other advantages include:
■
One radio per site - Only one radio is needed at each omnidirectional Cell
Site or at each sector of a multi-sector Cell Site
■
Frequency reuse factor of 1 - Unlike current AMPS and TDMA access
technologies, which require frequency engineering to avoid co-channel
(same channel) interference in nearby cells, the same block of CDMA
spectrum may be reused in every cell or sector. CDMA, by its very design,
can decode the proper signal in the presence of high interference.
In AMPS and TDMA, frequency management is both a critical and difficult
task to carry out. Since the frequency reuse factor is 1 for CDMA, no
frequency management is needed for CDMA.
■
No hard capacity limit - The number of users that can use the same CDMA
carrier and still have acceptable performance is determined by the total
interference power that all of the users generate in the receiver.
The question is NOT, “Is there a conflict that will produce interference?”, but
“Do enough conflicts occur often enough to degrade the quality to an
unacceptable level?” Spread spectrum takes advantage of the fact that at
any given time, there will be enough open holes in the spectrum for enough
information to get through.
The odds of a conflict depend only on the likelihood of two or more users
landing on the same frequency at the same time. The more users, the more
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
4-5
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
collisions. Signal quality is measured as a bit error rate (BER). For voice, a
BER of 10-3 or better (10-4 is better) is considered acceptable. (A BER of
10-3 means that one out of a thousand bits is faulty.)
■
Low RF power - CDMA requires less RF power than AMPS or TDMA to
transmit and receive over the same distance with comparable quality. Thus,
mobile subscribers with portable equipment will require lower RF power
levels to obtain acceptable call quality, thereby lengthening portable battery
life and talk times.
The reduced RF power requirement also provides the ability to transmit
over greater distances with the same power level used for existing
technologies. The reduced RF power requirement is, in part, due to the
presence of multipath RF signals.
■
Multipath exploitation - Whereas AMPS and TDMA suffer losses and
interference due to naturally occurring multipath RF signals, CDMA signal
quality actually improves under such conditions. This characteristic greatly
improves in-building RF penetration.
CDMA receivers (called rake receivers) use three or four parallel
correlators to receive and track separately the strongest of signals in
multiple paths. The receiver then combines the signals constructively (inphase) and uses the result to demodulate the signal. While there is fading
on each arrival, the fades are usually independent of one another. A loss in
performance occurs only when all correlators experience fades at the same
time.
The multiplicity of correlators is also the basis for soft handoff.
■
Soft handoff - Soft handoff permits a call to be carried by two or more cells
or two or more sectors at the same time while the mobile station is traveling
through a handoff zone. The difference in arrival time of signals from the
cells or sectors is treated just as multipathing—the mobile receiver
combines the signals constructively.
A handoff in AMPS or TDMA, referred to as a hard handoff, is performed on
a “break before make” basis: the old link is dropped before the new link is
established. In contrast, a soft handoff in CDMA is performed on a “make
before break” basis: the old link is dropped only after the mobile chooses
the new link—the one carrying the best quality signal.
A soft handoff virtually eliminates the interference, clipping, and clicks
commonly associated with a hard handoff. Since every cell uses the same
CDMA carrier, the only difference in transmission is the binary codes
(sequences); there is no handoff from one frequency to another frequency.
The probability that a CDMA call will be discontinued if the handoff
command is received in error is substantially reduced.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
4-6
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Capacity
■
High level of security - Should a spread-spectrum signal be intercepted, the
data cannot be decoded without the knowledge of the appropriate binary
code.
■
Spread-spectrum transmission is not totally secure, but it is private. A
casual listener will not be able to intercept the message.For microcell and
in-building systems - CDMA is a natural waveform suitable for microcell and
in-building wireless systems because of its tolerance to noise and
interference.
The major system factors determining the capacity of the CDMA system are as
follows:
■
Voice duty cycle (@ 3.5)
■
Frequency reuse factor (1)
■
Number of sectors in the cell (1 to 6)
■
Processing gain
■
Required Ec/Io
The processing gain of the CDMA system is given by the ratio of the binary code
rate (1.2288 Mbit/s) to the baseband data rate (9.6 or 14.4 kbit/s). For a baseband
data rate of 9.6 kbit/s, the processing gain is approximately 21 dB.
Ec/Io is a signal-quality measurement, where Ec is the energy per bit, and Io is the
interference power per hertz. (Ec/Io at the baseband is closely related to the
carrier-to-interference [C/I] ratio received at the RF.) The higher Ec/Io, the better
the signal quality.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
4-7
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
CDMA/AMPS Dual-Mode Operation
The GPS equipment provides precise timing of data packets between the 5ESS2000 Switch DCS and the Series II Cell Site. The GPS also provides precise
timing for the 20-ms packets transmitted by the Code Division Multiple Access
(CDMA) radios. The SCT boards are added to the TDM bus (which should be
installed "red stripe up"). The DFI is REQUIRED for CDMA packet pipes.
A CDMA/AMPS dual-mode mobile station complying with the TIA IS-95 standard
can obtain service by communicating with either CDMA radios or AMPS radios at
the Cell Site. Whether the communication is CDMA or AMPS depends on the
availability of either system in the geographic area of the mobile station as well as
the preferred call mode of the mobile station. The preferred call mode can be
CDMA-only, AMPS-only, or dual-mode CDMA (either CDMA or AMPS).
There are two types of CDMA/AMPS dual-mode mobiles:
■
IS-95A compliant mobiles
■
IS-95B compliant mobiles
IS-95A compliant mobiles can only access the CDMA system via 8-kbit/s
vocoders, whereas IS-95B compliant mobiles can access the CDMA system via 8kbit/s or 13-kbit/s vocoders. A 13-kbit/s vocoder, as compared to an 8-kbit/s
vocoder, provides better sound fidelity.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
4-8
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Lucent Technologies CDMA
Architecture
The Lucent Technologies CDMA architecture (see Figure 4-1) is built on the
current Series II platform, consisting of the Series II Cell Site, the 5ESS®-2000
Switch DCS, and the ECP complex (See). CDMA requires new speech-handling
equipment at the switch and new radio equipment at the Cell Site.
5ESS®-2000 SWITCH DCS
BIT/S
CM
VOCODER
TX RX ANTs
ANT DIV0DIV1
PACKETS
PACKET
MUX/
DEMUX
BIT/S
CM
VOCODER
Figure 4-1.
Hardware
Requirements
SERIES II Cell Site
PACKET PIPE
CDMA
CLUSTER
(T1 LINE)
CDMA
RADIO SET
LAC &
AIF
PACKETS
High-Level View of the Lucent Technologies CDMA Architecture
New hardware required to implement Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) in a
Series II Cell Site. Series II Cell Sites must be equipped with the following CDMA
equipment:
■
One CDMA growth radio cabinet, which includes one shelf of CDMA
radio equipment per antenna face
■
Global Positioning System Receiver (GPS), Reference Frequency and
Timing Generator (RFTG), and associated Synchronized Clock and Tone
(SCT) boards
■
Digital Facilities Interface (DFI) supporting two T1 or E1 and providing
two physical DS1 (Digital Signal - Level 1) interfaces.
■
Radio Control Complex (RCC) shelf, which requires 8 Mbytes of RAM
(Random Access Memory) for Cell Release 6.0
■
Optional test equipment
To support CDMA, the DCS must have a 5ESS-2000 Switch DCS as one of its
switch elements. As an alternative, existing DCSs can be used as hub switches for
CDMA Cell Sites. That is, CDMA traffic can be routed through the Definity DCS to
a 5ESS-2000 Switch for processing.
With R12.0, vocoders have been relocated to the switch. This feature is referred to
as “Switch-Based Vocoder." To know more about this feature and the benefits it
provides, refer to Chapter 3.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
4-9
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Transmission trunking for CDMA traffic between the MSC and the Cell Site is
known as a packet pipe. A CDMA packet pipe, which has a variable bandwidth
from two to eight DS0s, saves T1 (or E1) facilities by concentrating conversations
approximately 3.5 to 1. For example, assuming 8-kbit/s vocoders and 64-kbit/s T1
channels, two-, four-, and eight-DS0 wide packet pipes can handle respectively 6,
14, and 30 simultaneous CDMA calls. (One vocoder is required for each CDMA
call.) Each packet pipe is dedicated to one and only one CDMA cluster at the Cell
Site. Switch-based vocoder packet pipe (PP) implementation on CDMA cell sites
requires that DFI boards be installed at the cell.
All CDMA trunks must be located in the 5ESS-2000 Switch DCS, but AMPS and
TDMA trunks can still be located in a DEFINITY Switch DCS.
NOTE:
Currently, a CDMA cluster can support up to 14 traffic channels (one user
per channel), requiring a 4-DS0 wide packet pipe for 8-kbit/s vocoders or a
6-DS0 wide packet pipe for 13-kbit/s vocoders. (Packet pipes configured for
wider bandwidth are reserved for future, higher capacity CDMA clusters.)
You can use the variable width packet pipe feature to set or change the size
of packet pipes.
Up to 90 simultaneous CDMA calls can be carried on a single T1 facility. A T1 (or
E1) facility can carry any combination of AMPS, TDMA, and CDMA traffic, as well
as Cell Site data links (signaling channels).
The remaining new circuitry consists of the CDMA Radio Module (CRM) that
serves one face. The CRM is located on the CDMA radio shelf. The CRM will be
discussed in detail later in this chapter. The basic Radio Frequency (RF)
combiners, Linear Amplifier Frame (LAF), and filter assemblies have not changed
from the AMPS/TDMA. Series II Linear Amplifier Circuits (LACs) in existing
systems require a Version 12 firmware upgrade.
Speech-Handling
Equipment at the
DCS
To process CDMA calls, the 5ESS-2000 Switch DCS must be equipped with a
packet switching unit (PSU) cabinet. The interface to the PSU is through the
switching module (SM) of the 5ESS-2000 Switch; an SM can interface with only
one PSU.
The PSU handles CDMA traffic to and from the mobile station through the Cell
Site. The following types of plug-in units within the PSU perform the CDMA voice
processing:
■
Protocol Handler for Voice (PHV) - The PHV contains 12 CDMA vocoder
circuits and, therefore, can support up to 12 CDMA calls. The PHV
transmits packets to and receives packets from the mobile station through
the Cell Site.
In the forward direction (toward the mobile station), the vocoder
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
4-10
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
compresses 64-kbit/s pulse-code modulation (PCM) digital voice to
produce a much lower data rate, and then assembles the compressed data
into packets. In the reverse direction (from the mobile station), the vocoder
reverses the operation.
Two different types of vocoders are available: one that compresses data to
8 kbit/s and one that compresses data to 13 kbit/s. (The 8 kbit/s vocoders
are located on PHV-1s, and the 13-kbit/s vocoders are located on PHV-2s.)
The higher the compression rate (13 kbit/s is higher), the better the sound
fidelity in terms of both frequency response and inherent noise.
The vocoder generates data at one of four variable rates depending upon
the speech activity of the user. The data rate may be full rate, half rate,
quarter rate, or eighth rate. Variable rate signal coding permits “bandwidth
on demand” for data transmission, thereby raising capacity.
NOTE:
Currently, a 5ESS-2000 Switch DCS can have either all 8-kbit/s vocoders or
all 13-kbit/s vocoders but not a mixture of both. In addition, an entire cellular
geographic service area (CGSA) must operate at the same vocoder rate:
the mixing of 8-kbit/s and 13-kbit/s vocoders in a CGSA is not supported.
■
Frame Relay Protocol Handler (FRPH) - The FRPH provides the interface
between the packet pipes (Refer to Table 4-1) and the frame relay packet
switching platform.
Table 4-1.
No.
of
DS0s
Packet Pipe Capacity
8-kbit/s Service
13-kbit/s Service
56-kbit/s Channels
(No. Of DS0s x 4 - 3)
64-kbit/s Channels
(No. Of DS0s x 4 - 2)
56-kbit/s Channels
(No. Of DS0s x 3 - 3)
64-kbit/s Channels
(No. Of DS0s x 3 - 2)
10
13
14
10
17
18
12
13
21
22
15
16
25
26
18
19
29
30
21
22
■
A single FRPH can handle 46 CDMA calls when 8-kbit/s vocoders are
employed, or 42 CDMA calls when 13-kbit/s vocoders are employed.
Accordingly, a single FRPH can terminate three packet pipes, assuming
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
4-11
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
that the packet pipes connect to CDMA clusters each having a 14 traffic
channel capacity. For lower capacity CDMA clusters, a single FRPH can
terminate considerably more packet pipes.
Each FRHP is dedicated to certain packet pipes and therefore certain
CDMA clusters. A packet pipe is a static (dedicated) connection path from
the FRPH to the CDMA cluster. All hardware, DS0s, and TDM bus
timeslots in the path are assigned statically (“nailed up”) in accordance with
the translations.
■
Call Setup
Protocol Handler for Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) (PHA) - The PHA
provides the ability to interconnect to other PSUs. This allows packet pipes
terminating at the FRPH in one PSU to communicate with a PHV residing
in another PSU. PHAs may be connected directly using a point-to-point
connection, or can be connected through an ATM center stage for larger
offices.
A CDMA traffic-channel path is static except for the connections between the
FRPH and the PHV, and the PHV and the PSTN. Those connections are set up
and torn down dynamically by the call processing and data base node (CDN). The
CDN receives a call setup message from one of the following: the PSTN or Cell
Site via a DCS or Cell Site data link. The CDN, working with the 5ESS-2000
Switch DCS, decides how to complete the call.
The 5ESS-2000 Switch DCS chooses a PHV to handle the call and then sends
the PHV identification to the CDN. The CDN, in turn, sends the PHV identification
to the Cell Site. (The Cell Site includes the PHV identification in the address
portion of the packets so that the FRPH knows how to route the packets through
the switch.) The CDN also sends the trunk group and member associated with the
packet pipe to the 5ESS-2000 Switch DCS so that the switch knows which FRPH
to use to complete the traffic-channel path (see Figure 4-2).
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
4-12
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
5ESS®-2000 SWITCH DCS
Administrative
Module
ATM
Interconnect
Communications
Module
SWITCHING MODULE
PACKET SWITCHING UNIT (PSU-2)
PHV
FRAME
VOCODERSELECTOR
SM
100-MBIT/S BUS
FRPH
PHA
TSIU
PSTN
PCM
ECSU DFI
(T1)
(64-KBIT/S
CIRCUIT
SWITCH)
DFI
PACKET PIPE
(T1)
CELL
DFI
* ECHO CANCELLER
Cell Site DATA LINKS (BX.25)
CNI
DLN SS7N
DCS DATA LINKS (SS7)
RPCN
DLN SS7N
DFI
ECP
CNI/ IMS
DLN SS7N ACDN CDN CSN
DCI LINKS
OMP
RPCN
DUAL X.25 LINKS
DLN SS7N CDN CDN CSN
DEFINITIONS PERTAINING TO CDMA HARDWARE:
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode
FRPH Frame Relay Protocol Handler
Figure 4-2.
PHA Protocol Handler For ATM
PHV Protocol Handler For Voice
Series II Cell Site Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Communications Path
Mobile-to-Mobile Calls
Because the voice processing is performed at the switch, vocoders are bypassed
for mobile-to-mobile calls, which improves call quality. Packet exchange at the
switch involves only the two FRPHs participating in the mobile-to-mobile call. (It
could involve only one FRPH if both mobiles are communicating through the same
CDMA cluster.)
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
4-13
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Radio Equipment
Radio Control Complex (RCC)
The Central Processing Units (CPUs) of the fully redundant Radio Control
Complexes, RCC 0 and RCC 1, communicate over the update bus (See Figure).
The active RCC updates the standby RCC memory over the update bus. Each
RCC uses its own system bus to communicate with the:
■
Alarm/FITS (Factory Installation Test Set) interface, which monitors up to
18 user-assignable external alarms
■
Network Control Interface (NCI), which provides communications between
the active RCC and the Time Division Multiplex (TDM) bus (which should
be installed "red stripe up"); one NCI is required per TDM bus
■
Communications Processor Interface (CPI) to send and receive data link
messages
■
Random Access Memory (RAM)
■
CDMA Radio Test Unit (CRTU) Interface Board (CRTUi) -
■
Peripheral units, such as Clock And Tone (CAT), Radio Channel Unit
(RCU), etc., over the TDM bus.
The CDMA equipment connects directly to the TDM bus. A CDMA growth frame
may be added to an existing system by either extending the current TDM bus, or
by adding a new NCI in each RCC and connecting the CDMA growth frame to the
new TDM bus. A TDM bus should always be installed "red stripe up."
CDMA Series II Cell Site Radio Control Complex (RCC)
Shelf Changes
CDMA uses the traditional RCC shelf (see Figure 4-3). However, there are several
changes to the RCC memory. When the RCC is used with Cell Release 5 and
earlier, only four Mbytes of RAM memory is required (TN169). However when the
RCC is used with Cell Release 6 and later, the CDMA software requires more
than 4 Mbytes of memory; 8 Mbytes of RAM is required. This applies when any
Radio Frame Set (RFS) is equipped with CDMA radios. Within a single RCC, 2 4Mbyte boards could be placed on each side of the RCC, or a new 8-Mbyte board
(TN1710) could be used to replace the 4-Mbyte boards in slots 072 and 102.
The CRTUi, which resides in RCC Slot 15, acts as an interface between the RCC
(via the TDM bus) and the CRTU Mobile (via RS-422). The CRTUi controls all
CRTU functions that are needed to support functional and diagnostic processes.
Although the CRTUi sits in the RCC shelf, it is not considered part of the RCC
maintenance object at the MSC. In addition, the CRTUi is accessible from either
side of the RCC regardless of which RCC side is active as long as there is power
to the side on which the CRTUi resides.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
4-14
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
The heart of the CDMA system is the CDMA radio shelf, which consists of both
CDMA modem equipment and RF equipment. Only a single RF transmitter/
receiver is required for each antenna.
Each of the two CDMA clusters in a CDMA radio shelf holds multiple CDMA
modems referred to as channel elements. A channel element can be configured
as an overhead channel or voice (traffic) channel. The main function of a channel
element configured as a traffic channel is to spread the narrowband signal coming
from the MSC and despread the wideband signal coming from the air interface.
In the forward direction, each CDMA cluster merges its multiple channel-element
output into a serial digital stream for input to the CDMA radio set. The CDMA radio
set combines the serial digital streams from the CDMA clusters, converts the
serial digital baseband data to analog baseband signals, and up-converts the
analog baseband signals to RF. The RF passes through a high-power amplifier
(LAC) and a transmit filter to the transmit antenna. In the reverse direction, the
received RF passes through the receive antennas, receive filters, and low-noise
amplifiers to the CDMA radio set. The CDMA radio set down-converts the RF to
analog baseband signals, converts the analog baseband signals to serial digital
baseband data, and passes the data to the CDMA clusters for processing.
The timing to the CDMA system is provided by a GPS receiver in the RFTG. The
original application of the satellite-based GPS was to precisely locate a ship or
airplane in latitude, longitude, and altitude. The satellite-based GPS has grown to
have other applications such as establishing precise worldwide time that could aid
in synchronizing digital communications. In a CDMA system, the importance of
the combined synchronization process between transmitter and receiver cannot
be overstated; if synchronization is not both achieved and maintained, the desired
signal cannot be detected by the receiver.
The GPS antenna, which is approximately one foot high, can be placed anywhere
near the Cell Site that is appropriate for the best reception of the required number
of GPS satellites. The GPS antenna is usually mounted on the outside of a
building, not on a tower.
NOTE:
For GPS antenna installation procedures, refer to the CDMA GPS Antenna
Installation Guidelines (401-610-160).
Cabinet
Configurations
A typical Series II CDMA configuration (see Figure 4-3) contains a CDMA growth
frame attached to one existing FDMA/TDMA frame. Initially, only two radio cabinet
configurations are supported. Future configurations will support up to three CDMA
radio frames, including a CDMA-equipped RCC frame. This configuration will yield
a total of 15 CDMA radio shelves, three in the first frame and six in the remaining
two frames.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
4-15
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
CDMA GROWTH RCF
SHELF 0
CDMA RADIO SHELF
SHELF 1
CDMA RADIO SHELF
SHELF 2
CDMA RADIO SHELF
AIF
RFTG
FANS
SHELF 3
CDMA RADIO SHELF
SHELF 4
CDMA RADIO SHELF
SHELF 5
CDMA RADIO SHELF
Figure 4-3.
CDMA Cell Site Equipment
There are certain Series II cabinet configuration rules that apply to how CDMA
and FDMA/TDMA radio equipment are configured:
1.
The FDMA/TDMA radio shelves may not occupy the same radio cabinet as
CRMs.
2.
If both FDMA/TDMA and CDMA are required, a minimum of two RCF
frames is required.
3.
There is a maximum of one CDMA shelf for omni, and three CDMA shelves
for a three-sector configuration, (i.e., one per face). The CDMA shelves
must be located within the same RCF frame.
An all-CDMA system has a maximum of 15 CDMA shelves: three in RCF0, six in
RCF1, and six in RCF2 (see Figure 4-4).
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
4-16
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
There are three types of equipment shelves on the CDMA Growth Radio Frame.
These shelves are listed below:
1.
The interconnect panel which is used to distribute the 15.00-MHz
reference frequency from the RFTG to the radio shelves and to
interconnect Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) radio equipment to
both existing transmit and receive antenna faces
2.
CDMA radio shelves (numbered 0 through 5 from top to bottom) which
contain the following equipment:
■
Power converters that require +24 volt, 45 amp. feeder and return
■
One or two CCCs - each CCC contains 7 CCUs
■
As many as 14 CCUs (CDMA Channel Units) - each CCU contains
two CEs (8-kbps vocoders)
■
One or two Baseband, Bus and Analog (BBA) trio circuits
For CDMA 1.0, there is one radio shelf per antenna face. Because CDMA
1.0 supports omni, two-sector, and three-sector cells, there may be 1, 2, or
3 CDMA radio shelves. Additional shelves will be supported in future
CDMA releases.
3.
Fan units - Provide cooling to both upper and lower equipment shelves.
The Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) shelf contains the circuit packs
needed to perform the spread spectrum processing on CDMA channels. A CDMA
channel consists of the following equipment:
■
A CDMA Channel Unit (CCU)
■
CDMA Channel Elements (CEs)
CDMA radios are installed in their own growth RCF, which is designed to house 12
CDMA radios—two (redundant) radios per shelf. (One CDMA radio is active and
one is standby). CDMA radios cannot be installed in the primary RCF, nor can
they be intermixed with RCUs, SBRCUs, DRUs, or EDRUs in the same growth
RCF. Since there can be up to two growth RCFs in a radio frame set, the Series II
Cell Site can accommodate up to 24 CDMA radios.
The TDM buses interconnect the RCC with the other units in the primary and
growth RCFs. TDM buses are installed "red stripe up." The interconnections are
accomplished as follows:
■
On the primary RCF, the TDM bus interconnections are accomplished via
AYD4 and AYD12 paddleboards (circuit boards) that mount onto the wiring
side of certain backplane pinfields. Each of these paddleboards has a
connector that provides termination to flat ribbon cable, thus providing the
means to complete the necessary interconnections.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
4-17
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
T1
Interconnection
Panel Assembly
Interconnection
Panel Assembly
Interconnection
Panel Assembly
CDMA Shelf
CDMA Shelf
Shelf 0
12 RCU
CDMA Shelf
CDMA Shelf
Shelf 1
12 RCU
CDMA Shelf
CDMA Shelf
Shelf 2
RCC0
TDM0
TDM1
RCC1
Fans
1 RTU
8 RCU
CDMA Shelf
CDMA Shelf
Shelf 3
12 RCU
CDMA Shelf
CDMA Shelf
Shelf 4
12 RCU
CDMA Shelf
CDMA Shelf
Shelf 5
Primary—RCF0
CDMA Growth—RCF1
TDM1
CDMA Growth—RCF2
RCC1
RCC0
AFI
MEM
Update
Bus
CPU
System
Bus 0
CPI
T1
(≤5 DFIs)
TDM0
DS1
DFI
(2)
CAT
(≤3 DFIs)
DS1
DFI
NCI0
NCI1
(≤56)
RCU
(2)
RTU
CRTUi
SCT
TDM1
Cluster
(2)
SCT
Figure 4-4.
■
401-660-100 Issue 11
(≤16)
Cluster
(≤8)
Radio Set
(≤16)
Radio Set
Radio Frame Set Having Two CDMA Growth RCFs (TDMs
install "red stripe up")
On the CDMA growth RCFs, the TDM bus interconnections (see
Figure 4-5) are accomplished via P3 and P30 connectors located on the
wiring side of each of the backplanes. Each connector provides termination
to flat ribbon cable, thus providing the means to complete the necessary
interconnections.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
4-18
(≤8)
August 2000
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Front View Of Primary RCF—RCF0
SLOT NUM
TDM0
RCC
Shelf 0
RCC 1
W300
SLOT ADDR
0 1
TDM0
RCU
Shelf 2
22
W302
RTU
Shelf 3
TDM0
RCU
Shelf 4
22
W304
RCU
Shelf 5
KEY:
11 1213141516171819 20 21 22
TDM1
22
RCU
Shelf 1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RCC 0
12
0 1
12
G G G N G C N M
R R R C R P C E
WWW I W I I M
T T T 1 T
H H H
7D6D5D 4D3D2D1D0D
M N C C
E C P R
M I I T
G G G
R R R
WWW
T T T
H H H
4D 5D6D7D0D 1D2D3D
10
11
12
D P
F C
I U
7F
13 14 15 1617
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
C P
A C
T U
0B 0C
10
11
12
13 14 15 1617
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
0 1
0E
1E
2E
3E
4E
5E
6E
7E
0 1
10
11
12
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
D P B B
S C B B
1 U N N
5 1 1
2B 2C
0 1
10
11
12
13 14 15 1617
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
12
12
12
= AYD4
Figure 4-5.
= AYD12
= AYD3
C P
A C
T U
1B 1C
11 12 13 1415
D P B B
S C B B
1 U N N
5 1 1
1F 2F
0F
22
W301
10
TDM0
TDM0
22
W303
13 14 15 1617
D P B B
S C B B
1 U N N
5 1 1
3B 3C
= TDM-BUS SLOT CONNECTION
BTO/ FROM SHEET 2
Physical View of TDM Buses at the CDMA Series II Cell Site
(TDMs install "red stripe up") (Sheet 1 of 3)
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
4-19
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Front View Of First CDMA Growth RCF (GRCF1)
CDMA
Shelf 0
Slot NUM
22
22 A
W113
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112 13141516171819202122 23 24 25
A B C C
C I C C
U U U U
7 6
CDMA
Shelf 1
22
W115
40
SLOT ADDR
TDM0
CDMA
Shelf 4
22
W118
43
A B C C
C I C C
U U U U
7 6
C C
C C
U C
C C C C
C C C C
C U U U
1 2 3
C B A
C I C
U U U
51 52
53
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112 13141516171819202122 23 24 25
A B C C
C I C C
U U U U
7 6
C C
C C
U C
C C C C
C C C C
C U U U
1 2 3
C B A
C I C
U U U
61 62
63
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112 13141516171819202122 23 24 25
A B C C
C I C C
U U U U
7 6
C C
C C
U C
C C C C
C C C C
C U U U
1 2 3
C B A
C I C
U U U
71 72
73
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112 13141516171819202122 23 24 25
A B C C
C I C C
U U U U
7 6
C C
C C
U C
C C C C
C C C C
C U U U
1 2 3
C B A
C I C
U U U
01 02
03
0C
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112 13141516171819202122 23 24 25
A B C C
C I C C
U U U U
7 6
Figure 4-6.
= AYD3
C C
C C
U C
C C C C
C C C C
C U U U
1 2 3
C B A
C I C
U U U
11 12
= TDM-Bus Slot Connection
13
W116
7C
22
TDM0
6C
22
W117
5C
W114
22
4C
KEY: = P3,P30
TDM1
1C
To/From
Physical View of TDM Buses at the CDMA Series II Cell Site
(TDMs install "red stripe up") (Sheet 2 of 3)
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
10
4-20
C B A
C I C
U U U
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112 13141516171819202122 23 24 25
00
CDMA
Shelf 5
70
TDM1
60
CDMA
Shelf 3
C C C C
C C C C
C U U U
1 2 3
41 42
50
CDMA
Shelf 2
C C
C C
U C
TDM1
August 2000
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Front View of Second CDMA Growth RCF (GRCF2)
Slot Num
DMA
Shelf 0
22
W119
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17181920 21 22 23 24 25
A B C C
C I C C
U U U U
7 6
40
Slot Addr
C C
C C
U C
C C C C
C C C C
C U U U
1 2 3
C B A
C I C
U U U
41 42
43
4C
TDM1
from
GRCF1
22
W124
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17181920 21 22 23 24 25
A B C C
C I C C
U U U U
7 6
TDM1
DMA
Shelf 1
22
W123
50
DMA
Shelf 2
DMA
Shelf 3
22
W121
=P3,P6,P30
C B A
C I C
U U U
53
5C
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17181920 21 22 23 24 25
A B C C
C I C C
U U U U
7 6
C C
C C
U C
C C C C
C C C C
C U U U
1 2 3
C B A
C I C
U U U
61 62
63
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17181920 21 22 23 24 25
A B C C
C I C C
U U U U
7 6
C C
C C
U C
C C C C
C C C C
C U U U
1 2 3
C B A
C I C
U U U
71 72
73
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17181920 21 22 23 24 25
A B C C
C I C C
U U U U
7 6
C C
C C
U C
C C C C
C C C C
C U U U
1 2 3
C B A
C I C
U U U
01 02
03
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17181920 21 22 23 24 25
A B C C
C I C C
U U U U
7 6
= AYD3
Figure 4-7.
C C
C C
U C
C C C C
C C C C
C U U U
1 2 3
C B A
C I C
U U U
11 12
13
= TDM-Bus Slot Connection
TDM1
22
W120
0C
W122
7C
22
TDM1
6C
10
Key:
00
DMA
Shelf 5
70
DMA
Shelf 4
C C C C
C C C C
C U U U
1 2 3
51 52
60
TDM1
C C
C C
U C
1C
=To/From
Physical View of TDM Buses at the CDMA Series II Cell Site
(TDMs install "red stripe up") (Sheet 3 of 3)
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
4-21
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
In addition, all TDM buses are terminated via AYD3 termination paddleboards that
mount onto the wiring side of certain backplane pinfields. (TDMs install "red stripe
up").
If the radio frame set consists of only the primary RCF and a CDMA growth RCF
and assuming that shelf 4 and/or shelf 5 of RCF1 is populated with CDMA
equipment, an AYD3 termination paddleboard is installed on the wiring side of
RCF1 shelf 5, slot 24. In addition, to generate clock signals for TDM1, redundant
CAT units are installed in RCF1 shelf 4, slot 24, and RCF1 shelf 5, slot 24.
NOTE:
The CDMA radio test unit interface (CRTUi) board installed in shelf 0, slot
15, of the primary RCF allows the RCC to communicate with the IS-95B
compliant mobile station located in the CRTU module (CRTUm).
Radio Shelf
The CDMA radio shelves use a new backplane that is not compatible with FDMA/
TDMA radio frames or shelves.
There is a maximum of one CDMA shelf for omni configuration, and one CDMA
shelf per face for three-sector configuration. Figure 4-8 shows the CDMA radio
shelf.
CDMA radio shelves may be configured per face. However, cabinet configurations
may allow the CCUs on a shelf to service any of three associated faces. CDMA
radio shelves may be configured per face (A dual shelf arrangement will be
available in the future)..
SIDE 1
(5V)
A B C C
C I C C
U U U U
7 6
SIDE 2
C C
C C
U C
C C C C
C C C C
C U U U
1 2 3
BBA
CDMA CLUSTER
Figure 4-8.
CDMA CLUSTER
401-660-100 Issue 11
(5V)
BBA
Fully Loaded CDMA Radio Shelf With BBA Redundancy
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
4-22
C B A
C I C
U U U
August 2000
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
A single shelf connects to one input of a 4:1 combiner located in the
interconnection panel assembly (IPA). The output connects to the appropriate
LAC. A dual shelf connects to two inputs of a 4:1 combiner in the IPA. The output
connects to the appropriate LAC. This configuration allows more radios on an
antenna face.
CDMA radio shelves may be configured nonredundant with only side 2 (right)
equipped or redundant where both sides are equipped.
Each CDMA radio shelf (See Figure 4-8 on page 22) contains:
■
One or two CDMA Channel Unit Clusters (CUCs). A CUC consists of the
following equipment types:
— One CCC
— CCUs, TCUs, or ECUs
The use of 8-kbps speech vocoders or 13-kbps vocoders must be uniform
within an MSC. An MSC is will support either 8-kbps speech vocoders or
13-kbps vocoder, but not both.
■
One or two Baseband Combiner and Radio (BCR), Bus Interface Unit (BIU)
and Analog Conversion Unit (ACU) trios. One (right side) is always active;
the other (left side) is optionally redundant.
The BCR, BIU, and ACU are known collectively as the BBA.
■
Either a SCT board or DFI board - The SCTs provide timing to all CDMA
circuits in the frame, while DFIs terminate the T1 facilities between the Cell
Site and the Mobile Switching Center (MSC). Later versions will support
Nonvolatile Memory (NVM)updating.
TDM Bus Addresses
TDM bus cables are installed "red stripe up." There are TDM bus addresses for
the following slot positions in the CDMA shelf: slots 4, 12, 13, 21, and 24. Sheets
2 and 3 of the figure identify the TDM bus addresses—in hexadecimal format—for
the various slot positions within the CDMA RCF1 and RCF2.
The pin designations for the slot address are BA0 (LSB) through BA6 (MSB). The
logic values for BA0 through BA6 are unique for each of the slot positions
connected to the TDM bus. The 7-bit address for a slot position is established by
grounding an address pin for a logic 0, and leaving an address pin unconnected
for a logic 1. The 7-pin address for a slot position is realized only when a unit is
installed in that slot position: each of the seven address pins is connected to a
pull-up resistor on the installed unit.
The backplanes for the CDMA shelves are identical; therefore, each CDMA shelf
has an associated, four-pole switch used to select unique logic values for the
upper slot-address bits BA4, BA5, and BA6. The switches, identified as SW1
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
4-23
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
SHLF ADR, are soldered to 8-pin paddleboard connectors that mount onto the
wiring side (rear side) of the backplane. Refer to the following tables for the default
switch settings in the primary RCF, first CDMA growth RCF, and second CDMA
growth RCF.
TDM bus cables are installed "red stripe up." The TDM1 cabling in the CDMA
RCF2 starts at the top of the frame, whereas the TDM1 cabling in the AMPS/
TDMA RCF2 starts at the bottom of the frame. The cabling arrangement allows
the redundant SCT boards to be installed in shelves 0 and 1 of CDMA RCF2
instead of shelves 4 and 5, which allows the SCT boards to be accessed at TDM
bus addresses 2C and 3C instead of 6C and 7C. (SCT units configured for TDM
bus timing—also applies to CAT units— must be located near the center of the
TDM bus to achieve similar clock delays throughout the bus.) The relocation of
SCT boards in CDMA RCF2 compensates for the following software limitation:
software cannot access the SCT board at TDM bus address 7C (shelf 5) because
address 7C is too high—address 78 is the uppermost limit.
Circuit Pack Light-Emitting Diodes (LEDs) and Connectors
The Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) on the Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
radio shelf are almost identical to the existing Series II equipment. There are three
LEDs; one red, one yellow, and one green. The red LED indicates that an alarm
has occurred on the circuit pack. The yellow LED indicates that NVM is in the
process of being updated into this circuit pack from the MSC. The Green LED
indicates that the circuit pack is active.
The BCRs, SCT, and 430AA 5-volt power converters each have ON/OFF switches
to manually control the circuit pack.
Each BCR has an output adjustment screw that can be used to set its output
power.
The SCT has two SMA (subminiature A) connectors that can be used to connect
to external test equipment, such as the HP8921A.
The 430AA 5-volt power converters have + and - 5 volt test access points. These
jacks provide a test point for VOM (volt-ohm-meter) test access.
The inputs and outputs to the IPA function the same as FDMA/TDMA signals.
Radios and Radio
Equipment
The following paragraphs provide a description of the CDMA radio architecture.
Refer to Figure 4-9 while reading the following discussion.
CDMA Channel Constituents
A CDMA Channel Element (CE) contains the circuitry necessary to perform
forward and reverse link CDMA spread spectrum processing. CDMA CEs are held
in circuit packs called:
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
4-24
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
1.
)CDMA Channel Unit (CCU) - CDMA Release 1
2.
)Thirteen-kbps Channel Unit (TCU) - CDMA Release 2
3.
)Enhanced CDMA Channel Unit (ECU-3V(Q)) - CDMA Release 5
4.
)Enhanced CDMA Channel Unit (ECU-3V(L)) - CDMA Release 7
CDMA Channel Unit (CCU) - CDMA Release 1
CDMA Release 1 introduced a CDMA Channel Element (CE) that is comprised of
one CDMA modulator/demodulator (modem) that supports one 8-kbps voice
coder/decoder (vocoder) (i.e., one CDMA channel).
The CDMA Channel Unit (CCU) is a circuit pack that holds two 8-kbps CEs.
The CDMA Channel Unit Cluster (CUC) can contain up to 7 CCUs = 14 8-kbps
CEs.
The CDMA radio shelf can support two CUCs = 14 CCUs = 28 8-kbps CEs.
Thirteen-kbps Channel Unit (TCU) - CDMA Release 2
CDMA Release 2.0 introduced a CDMA Channel Element (CE) that is an
Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) modem that supports either 8-kbps
or 13-kbps vocoding, but not a combination of both.
A Thirteen-kbps Channel Unit (TCU) is a circuit pack that holds two of these 8kbps or 13-kbps CEs.
The CDMA Channel Unit Cluster (CUC) can contain up to 7 CCUs = 14 8-kbps or
13-kbps CEs.
The CDMA radio shelf can support two CUCs = 14 CCUs = 28 8-kbps or 13-kbps
CEs.
Mobile Switching Center (MSC)
The use of either 8-kbps vocoders or 13-kbps vocoders must be uniform within an
MSC. An MSC is restricted to support either 8-kbps vocoders or 13-kbps
vocoders, but not both.
Enhanced CDMA Channel Unit (ECU-3V(Q)) - CDMA Release 5
CDMA Release 5.0 introduced the Enhanced CDMA Channel Unit (ECU-3V(Q));
a circuit pack that holds ten 8-kbps or 13-kbps CEs.
A CDMA Channel Unit Cluster (CUC) can contain up to 4 ECUs = 40 8-kbps or
13-kbps CEs.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
4-25
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Enhanced CDMA Channel Unit (ECU-3V(L)) - CDMA Release 7
CDMA Release 7.0, introduced the ECU-3V(L); a form, fit and function
replacement to the ECU-3V(Q). Initially, the ECU-3V(L) circuit pack holds ten 8kbps or 13-kbps CEs.
Also, like the ECU-3V(Q), the CDMA Channel Unit Cluster (CUC) can contain up
to 4 ECUs = 40 8-kbps or 13-kbps CEs.
The software for the ECU-3V(L) is released in two phases.
In Phase 1, the ECU-3V(L) operates identically to the ECU-3V(Q) introduced in
Release 5.0. That is, the Phase 1 software allows the ECU-3V(L) to support 10
CEs. Additionally, its maintenance is the same as that for the ECU-3V(Q) and
there are no changes to the Recent Change/Verify (RC/V) screen or the Status
Display Pages (SDP).
The Phase 2 software implements the major difference between the ECU-3V(L)
and the ECU-3V(Q), which is that the ECU-3V(L) will support 16 CEs instead of
10 CEs. In addition to supporting 8 kbps and 13 kbps for voice applications, the
ECU-3V(L) also supports 9.6 kbps and 14.4 kbps full duplex, or raw, data rates.
From a maintenance interface perspective (Technician Interface(TI),RC/V,SDP,
etc.), this pack can continue to be called a “CCU”. However, the increased number
of channel elements in Phase 2 need to be reflected in the RCV screen. The
RCV screen at the MSC must be updated to reflect that a ECU-3V(L) has been
installed.
The ECU-3V(L) is slot-compatible with the ECU-3V(Q), TCU, and CCU.
The ECU-3V(L) can be mixed with the ECU-3V(Q) in the same cluster. However,
the ECU-3V(L) and/or the ECU-3V(Q) cannot be mixed with TCUs or CCUs in a
single CDMA cluster.
The ECU-3V(L) provides Joint Test Action Group (JTAG) support for the Cell Site
Modem (CSM) ASIC chips and the digital combiner .
The ECU works with mobiles that conform to ANSI-J008 and EIA/TIA/IS-95A
standards.
CDMA Cluster Controller (CCC)
Provides a control and data interface between the TDM bus and up to seven
CDMA channel units (CCUs). The CCC manages the CCUs.
A CCC and its CCUs form a CDMA cluster; there may be up to two CDMA
clusters on a shelf. Both CDMA clusters may be active.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
4-26
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Each CCC terminates the dedicated packet pipe associated with its CDMA
cluster. The CCC extracts the voice data from the incoming packets and
distributes the data to the appropriate CCUs for processing. In the reverse
direction, the CCC receives voice data from its CCUs, assembles the data into
packets, and then multiplexes the packets onto the packet pipe.
CDMA Channel Unit (CCU)
A CCU is a circuit pack that hold the CEs. A CE contains the necessary circuitry to
support one CDMA channel. It can be configured as an overhead channel (pilot/
sync/access or page) or a traffic (voice) channel.
The CCU performs the digital baseband signal processing, including spreading
and despreading. Currently, four types of CCUs are supported, as follows:
1.
CDMA Channel Unit (CCU) contains two 8-kbps CEs
2.
Thirteen-kbps Channel Unit (TCU) contains two 8-kbps or 13-kbps CEs
3.
Enhanced CDMA Channel Unit (ECU-3V(Q))contains ten 8-kbps or 13kbps CEs
4.
Enhanced CDMA Channel Unit (ECU-3V(L)) contains ten to sixteen 8-kbps
or 13-kbps CEs
NOTE:
Each CE can be configured to interface with either an 8-kbit/s or 13-kbit/s
vocoder
Table 4-2 List shelf number and switch position settings.
Table 4-2.
Shelf Number and Switch Position Settings
Switch Position Settings*
Shelf Number
Don’t Care
ON
ON
ON
Don’t Care
ON
ON
OFF
Don’t Care
ON
OFF
ON
Don’t Care
ON
OFF
OFF
* ON = Logic 0, OFF = Logic 1
The CDMA radio shelf can contain up to 14 CCUs and each CCU can be
configured with either 2, 10, or 16 CEs.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
4-27
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
GPS
Antenna
GPS Time
1PPS
CDMA Radio Shelf
Common Equipment
RFTG
15-MHz Reference Frequency
CDMA Clock
GPS Time, 2PPS, & 19.6608 MHz
TX RX Ants
Ant Div0 Div1
Generator
CDMA Cluster
To/ From Packet Pipe
MSC
CDMA Radio Set
D÷A
CDMA Modems
IF÷RF
LAC &
AIF
Digital Analog
CDMA Cluster
To/ From Packet Pipe
MSC
CDMA Modems
Definitions:
1PPS One Pulse Per Second (1.0 Hz) Strobe
2PPS One-half Pulse Per Second (0.5 Hz) Strobe
(Also Known As 2-second Tic)
Figure 4-9.
IF
RF
Intermediate Frequency
Radio Frequency
CDMA Radio Architecture
Groups of CCUs are logically connected to form clusters. Each cluster is
controlled by a single CDMA Cluster Controller (CCC). The CDMA Radio Channel
Frame shelf can hold two CCCs, and therefore, two CDMA Clusters.
The CCC provides the interface between the CCUs and the RCC. The CCC
supports the call processing functions for each of the channel elements.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
4-28
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Table 4-3.
Shelf Number and Switch Position Settings
Switch Position Settings*
Shelf Number
Don’t Care
OFF
ON
ON
Don’t Care
OFF
ON
OFF
Don’t Care
OFF
OFF
ON
Don’t Care
OFF
OFF
OFF
Don’t Care
ON
ON
ON
Don’t Care
ON
ON
OFF
* ON = Logic 0, OFF = Logic 1
Table 4-4.
Shelf Number and Switch Position Settings
Switch Position Settings*
Shelf Number
Don’t Care
ON
OFF
ON
Don’t Care
ON
OFF
OFF
Don’t Care
OFF
ON
ON
Don’t Care
OFF
ON
OFF
Don’t Care
OFF
OFF
ON
Don’t Care
OFF
OFF
OFF
* ON = Logic 0, OFF = Logic 1
NOTE:
Currently, an entire cellular geographic service area (CGSA) must operate
at the same vocoder rate; the mixing of 8-kbit/s and 13-kbit/s vocoders in a
CGSA is not supported.
In addition, each CDMA shelf contains a BIU/BCR/ACU, known as a BBA trio and
an optional redundant BBA trio. The BBA contains the Bus Interface Unit (BIU)
(TN1702), the Analog Conversion Unit (ACU) (TN1853), and the Baseband
Combiner and Radio (BCR) (44WRI)
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
4-29
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Bus Interface Unit (BIU)
The Bus Interface Unit (BIU) provides the interface between the BCR, ACU and
the TDM bus (which is installed "red stripe up"). It provides power conversion and
alarm control functions. The BIU provides a control bus interface between the
TDM bus and its associated analog conversion unit (ACU) and baseband
combiner and radio (BCR). It also provides power conversion for its associated
ACU and BCR.T
The BIU has an on-board converter circuit that converts +24 Vdc to a precise +5
Vdc, +5.2 Vdc and +12 Vdc. The ACU sources the + 5 Vdc and +5.2 Vdc, while
the BCR sources all three voltages.
Analog Conversion Unit (ACU)
The ACU performs baseband combining from the CEs, digital/analog and analog/
digital conversion, filtering, and IF mixing. The output is a 1.2288 Mbps to the
BCR associated with the particular face for CDMA 1.0, and to the BCR associated
with any equipped face for CDMA 2.0 and later. The ACU also combines the
digital transmit signals from the two CDMA clusters and then converts the signals
to analog for input to the BCR. The Analog Conversion Unit (ACU) digitally
combines signals form the CCUs, performs a Digital-to-Analog conversion, and
limits the signal with a low-pass filter. Each ACU has six analog outputs, which
represent the I and Q signals to each of three sectors. In the reverse direction, the
baseband signals from up to three (in the cross-connected configuration) BCRs
are ' sampled and sent to each CE.
In the reverse direction, the ACU converts the analog receive signals from the
BCR to digital and then distributes the digital signals to the two CDMA clusters.
Baseband Combiner and Radio (BCR)
The BCR is a wideband Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) RF transceiver,
that combines the 1 (inband) and Q (Quadrature) signals form the ACU and
converts them to RF with an RF upconverter. In the reverse path, the BCR
receives RF signals and down-converts them to baseband for the ACU. The BCR
is always associated with one face.
Accepts analog signals from and sends analog signals to its associated ACU. The
BCR is responsible for RF transmission and reception. The Baseband Combiner
Radio (BCR) combines (sums) the I and Q signals from each of the ACUs and
converts the signals to RF with an RF up-converter. In the reverse path, it receives
RF signals and down-convert to Baseband.
A BCR and its associated BIU and ACU form a CDMA radio set—the BBA (for
BCR-BIU-ACU). Since the BBA is a single point failure for a sector, redundant
BBAs—one active and the other in standby mode—may be installed for increased
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
4-30
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
reliability. (A BBA pair is redundant.) For OA&M purposes, the BBA is treated as a
single maintenance unit.
Synchronized Clock and Tone (SCT)
Generates the CDMA clock signals for the entire CDMA growth RCF. In addition, if
so configured, the SCT can perform the following TDM bus functions: bus clock
generation and monitoring for the TDM bus, maintenance tone generation, and
maintenance tone detection.
Usually, redundant SCTs are installed in a CDMA growth RCF, in shelves 0 and 1.
Each CDMA radio shelf has a TDM enable switch (SW2) on the wiring side (rear
side) of its backplane. The TDM enable switch only has meaning for a shelf if an
SCT is installed in that shelf. When the switch is in the DISABLE position (switch
arm on DISABLE side pressed in), the SCT provides only CDMA clock signals.
When the switch is in the ENABLE position (switch arm on ENABLE side pressed
in), the SCT provides both CDMA clock signals and TDM bus functions. The TDM
bus functions include all functions performed by the CAT: bus clock generation
and monitoring for the TDM bus, maintenance tone generation, and maintenance
tone detection and measurement. TDM bus cables are installed "red stripe up."
Digital Facilities Interface (DFI)
Provides serial-to-parallel and parallel-to-serial data conversion between the T1 or
E1 lines and the TDM buses internal to an RCF. The DFI provides two physical
carrier line interface ports; currently, only one port is supported.
The Series II platform uses TDM timeslots to “nail up” the logical connection
between a packet pipe on the T1 or E1 line and the associated CDMA cluster.
Usually, one or two DFIs are installed in a CDMA growth RCF, depending upon
how many CCUs are installed in the frame. DFIs may be installed in shelf 2 and/or
shelf 3 of a CDMA growth RCF.
NOTE:
The DFI is not dedicated to the CDMA radio architecture; it can also
interface with RCUs, SBRCUs, DRUs, and EDRUs. A DFI may reside in any
slot previously reserved for the DS1 plug-in unit.
The CDMA clusters and radio sets are controlled through the RCC. The RCC
consults with resident translations data base to set up the logical connections
between the packet pipes on the T1 or E1 lines and the associated CDMA clusters
in the cell
CRTU
Components
The CRTU consists of two hardware components(see Figure 4-10); The CRTU
interface (CRTUi), and the CRTU module (CRTUm). The CRTUi is a plug-in board
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
4-31
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
installed in the primary RCF through which the RCC communicates with an IS95B compliant mobile station in the CRTUm. From an RCC perspective, the
CRTUi and CRTUm together look like a single maintenance unit, just like the RTU
or TRTU.
The term CRTU will be used in this document except when it is necessary to
distinguish between the CRTUi and CRTUm components.
NOTE:
The term CRTU will be used in this document except when it is necessary
to distinguish between the CRTUi and CRTUm components.
NOTE:
Be aware that the port designations J1 and J2 on the PCS CDMA Minicell
RSP map to port designations J2 and J1 on the Series II Cell Site RSP or
Cellular CDMA Minicell RSP—the port designations are reversed. As
clarification, J1 on the PCS CDMA Minicell RSP allows access to the
transmit filter panels, whereas J1 on the Series II Cell Site RSP allows
access to the receive filter panels.
CRTU interface (CRTUi)
The CRTUi provides a transparent communication interface between the RCC
and the CRTUm, and between the RCC and the RSP. The CRTUi plugs into TDM
bus 0 (TDM0) at shelf 0, slot 15 of the primary RCF, and has a translation
indicating its installation. The CRTUi apparatus code is TN1854.
The CRTUi contains the firmware needed to run the CDMA functional tests. In
response to functional test messages from the RCC, the CRTUi carries out the
specified actions and returns the test information to the RCC. The message
exchange is through TDM0. TDM bus cables are installed "red stripe up."
The CRTUi faceplate has three light-emitting diode (LED) indicators: one red, one
yellow, and one green. Their meanings are as follows.
Red LED
Controlled by the CRTUi; lighted during the self-test initiated upon powerup or
after a reset and goes off after successful completion of the self-test; lighted
during normal operation if the CRTUi has a board error or is insane.
Yellow LED
Controlled by Cell Site system software; lighted during non-volatile memory
(NVM) update.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
4-32
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Green LED
Controlled by the CRTUi; lighted when a CDMA functional test is executing.
CRTU mobile (CRTUm)
The CRTUm consists of an IS-95B compliant CDMA/AMPS dual-mode mobile, a
duplexer containing a three-port RF circulator, an EIA-422 to TTL signal converter,
and a 24-Vdc to 12-Vdc power converter. The duplexer provides separate RF
transmit and receive paths for the single-ported, CDMA/AMPs dual-mode mobile.
The CRTUm has RF connections through the RCB-associated RF switches and
RSP to the directional couplers of the transmit and receive filter panels at the
antennas. The CRTUm is mounted in the facilities interface frame (FIF) or on a
Cell Site wall, and uses standard 24-Vdc power.
To/From
PSTN
Series II Cell Site
MSC
5ESS®-2000 Switch DCS
TDM
Bus
RCC
T1 Lines
T1 Lines
Digital
DIGITAL
Facilities
TRUNK
UNIT
Interface
MOST
Tone
Generator
Time Slot
Interchange
Unit
Digital
Facilities
Interface
PCM
Packet Pipe
Protocol
Handler
for Voice
Frame Relay
Protocol
Handler
CRTUi
DFI
CRTUm RF
TX
Ant
TDM
Bus
RX Ants
Div0 Div1
AMPS
LAC &
AIF
CDMA
RSP
CDMA Path
Series II Cell Site
ECP Complex
CRTUi
CRTUm RF
TX
Ant
TDM
Bus
DFI
OMP
TDM
Bus
RCC
RX Ants
Div0 Div1
AMPS
LAC &
AIF
CDMA
RSP
Definitions:
CRTUi
CDMA Radio Test Unit Interface
CRTUm CDMA Radio Test Unit Module
MOST MObile Station Test (feature)
RSP
Radio Switch Panel
Figure 4-10. High-Level View of the CRTU Test System
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
4-33
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
The CRTUm in the Series II Cell Site or Cellular CDMA Minicell is identified as
KS-24237 L1 (407537018). The CRTUm in the PCS CDMA Minicell is identified
as KS-24237 L2 (407537026).
The CRTUm in the Series II Cell Site is used to test CDMA radio equipment but
not AMPS radio equipment; the RTU is used to test AMPS radio equipment.
NOTE:
The CRTUm in the Series II Cell Site or Cellular CDMA Minicell is identified
as KS-24237 L1 (407537018). The CRTUm in the PCS CDMA Minicell is
identified as KS-24237 L2 (407537026).
The CRTUm in the Series II Cell Site is used to test CDMA radio equipment but
not AMPS radio equipment; the RTU is used to test AMPS radio equipment.
ANALOG
BASEBAND
DIGITAL
BASEBAND
1/ CLUSTER
2/ CLUSTER
α, β, γ
α, β, γ
ACU
RF
α
α
β
α
γ
α
α
β
β
β
γ
β
α
γ
β
γ
γ
γ
BCR
TO/ FROM
SECTOR 1/ 4
BCR
TO/ FROM
SECTOR 2/ 5
BCR
TO/ FROM
SECTOR 3/ 6
SHELF 0/ 3
1/ CLUSTER
2/ CLUSTER
α, β, γ
α, β, γ
ACU
SHELF 1/ 4
1/ CLUSTER
2/ CLUSTER
α, β, γ
α, β, γ
ACU
SHELF 2/ 5
Figure 4-11. CDMA Subcell Configuration—BBA Interconnections Shown
Only For One Side (Side 1, Side 2)
CDMA Series II
Configuration
Options
CDMA Subcell Configuration
In the CDMA growth RCF, two sets of three consecutive shelves may be
interconnected to form two subcells see Figure 4-11. The top three shelves form
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
4-34
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
one subcell, and the bottom three shelves form the second subcell. Any CE within
a subcell is available to any of the three sectors formed by the subcell.
The electrical interconnections between the side-1 BBAs or the side-2 BBAs of a
subcell are accomplished via backplane cabling. However, the actual enabling of
the
interconnections is controlled via translations, specifically, via the Sub Memb field
on screen 13 of the RC/V Series II Cell Equipage Common form (ceqcom2). The
following configurations are possible using the Sub Memb field:
■
All three CDMA shelves interconnected to form a subcell
■
Any two of the three CDMA shelves interconnected to form a subcell
■
No CDMA shelves interconnected and hence no subcell configuration—
each CDMA shelf operates independently.
The CDMA subcell configuration is required for the softer handoff feature.
Typical Configurations
Finally, Table 4-7 below contains different configurations available for the Series II
Cell Site with CDMA. Note that each row represents a different set of
configurations options. The table does not represent all possible combinations.
Because AMPS and TDMA may be combined within a single RCF, listing all
possible configurations would produce a very large table. The table reflects
combinations of RCFs where AMPS and TDMA are NOT mixed within a frame.
Combinations of AMPS and TDMA may be derived from the data specified in the
table.
Timing
Requirements
15-MHz Reference Frequency
The RTU and each Radio Channel Unit (RCU) require a stable 15-MHz reference
frequency signal. This signal is supplied by the RFG in the AIF and is applied to a
1:6 RF power divider in the Interconnection Assembly. The reference signal is
distributed to the RTU shelf and four RCU shelves by a 1:12 RF power divider
located on each shelf.
The sixth port on the 1:6 power divider in the Interconnection Assembly is not
used and must be terminated into a 50-ohm resistive load. The 1:12 power divider
on the RTU also has unused ports that must be terminated into 50-ohm resistive
loads.
However, due to the requirement that CDMA components at neighboring sites be
synchronized, the Reference Frequency Generator (RFG), used for AMPS and
TDMA is not adequate. Instead, a Reference Frequency and Time Generators
(RFTG) and a Global Positioning System (GPS) antenna is required to
synchronize the Cell Sites, and the MSC to Universal Coordinated Time (UCT).
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
4-35
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Reference Frequency and Timing Generator
The RFTG is similar to the standard reference frequency generator in that it
provides a precise and stable 15-MHz reference frequency signal to all of the Cell
Site radios.
The RFTG is different from the standard reference frequency generator in that it
has an internal GPS receiver, which is used to synchronize CDMA transmission
and reception. The reference frequency generators, themselves, are disciplined
(synchronized) by GPS timing.
For Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) to work within the stringent timing
requirements, synchronization must be maintained between neighboring Cell
Sites and between the Cell Sites and the Mobile Switching Center (MSC). The
Global Positioning System (GPS) is used in performing this function by providing
pulses to synchronize the Cell Sites and the MSC to Universal Coordinated Time
(UCT). The GPS received signal is used to distribute a universal synchronized
reference clock to the CDMA components. If the GPS signal is lost or the GPS
receiver fails, the system clock at the Cell Site will drift. This does not immediately
affect system performance since back-up timing is provided by a rubidium
oscillator, which will maintain synchronization with the other Cell Sites to within +/10 us for 24 hours. Synchronization can be assumed for no more than 24 hours
without relocking on to the GPS signal. If that time period elapses without
resynchronizing, all CDMA radiation will stop. If the rubidium oscillator also fails,
there is a backup oscillator which may be either an ovenized crystal or another
rubidium oscillator. The ovenized crystal can maintain synchronization to within
the +/-10 us for 4 hours after loss of the GPS signal (provided Cell Site
temperature remains constant to within 2 degrees Celsius); the backup rubidium
oscillator can maintain synchronization for up to eight hours after loss of GPS
signal.
Installing an RFTG
The RFTG, KS24019 L1, mounts in the Series II AIF J41660E-2. To mount the
RFTG, remove the existing RFG shelf ED-2R849-31, and replace it with the RFTG
shelf. To mount the RFTG, you need a field mounted GPS Antenna kit 847683349.
You also need a GPS surge protector kit 847780475 to protect the GPS antenna
input. You need one surge protector kit per GPS antenna.
Field Upgrade of an RFTG
Cells equipped with a 50dB gain antenna may include the installation of a 24dB inline attenuator instead of replacing the 50dB antenna with a 26dB gain antenna.
Otherwise, a 10dB in-line attenuator may be installed instead of replacing the
50dB antenna with a 40dB gain antenna.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
4-36
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
RFTG KS24019, L1 (407 163 500) is field upgradeable to KS24019, LIB (407 658
269) using the field upgrade kit 847 849 866 in Table 4-5 below.
Table 4-5.
Field Upgrade Kit
Field Upgrade Kit 847 849 866
Item
Description
Part Number
Qty
Rubidium Controlled
Oscillator
KS 24019
L102A
Crystal Controlled Oscilla- KS 24019
tor
L104B
Label
KS 24019 LIB
RFTG KS24019, L1A (407 529 132) is field upgradeable to KS24019, LIB (407
658 269) using the field upgrade kit 847 849 874 in the Table 4-5 below.
Table 4-6.
Field Upgrade Kit
Field Upgrade Kit 847 849 874
Item
Description
Part Number
Qty
Crystal Controlled Oscillator
KS 24019
L104B
Label
KS 24019 LIB
KS24019, LIB is the replacement for both KS24019, L1 and KS24019, LIA.
To remove and replace the RFTG modules without disrupting CDMA service, the
Cell software must be R7.1 Beta 02 build (APX07.10), or later. For Cells not
equipped with R7.1 or later, removal and replacement of the RFTG modules
should be done during those hours when traffic is light. The RFTG module
remove/replace procedure is not disruptive to AMPS/TDMA service regardless of
cell software. Traffic, transmission, AC and DC power drain, service, maintenance,
and reliability are not adversely affected. To remove/replace RFTG modules:
1.
Remove a all CDMA sectors from service.
2.
Perform the in-field change of modules as per the ECP.
3.
Return cells to service.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
4-37
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Table 4-7.
Examples of CDMA (with Series II) Configurations
Primary (RCF0)
Growth (RCF1)
Traffic Channels
Physical
Config
TDMA
28 DRU
Growth (RCF2)
Traffic Channels
Config
TDMA
56 EDRU
Physical
36 DRU
Traffic Channels
CDMA
72 EDRU
Analog
56 RCU
TDMA
TDMA
28 DRU
Analog
36 DRU
168 2-*CE/CCU
360 8-CE/CCU
CDMA
72 EDRU
72 RCU
Physical
Config
168 2-CE/CCU
360 8-CE/CCU
CDMA
56 EDRU
168 2-CE/CCU
360 8-CE/CCU
Analog
56 RCU
Analog
72 RCU
CDMA
TDMA
28 DRU
CDMA
168 2-CE/CCU
CDMA
168 2-CE/CCU
360 8-CE/CCU
56 EDRU
360 8-CE/CCU
Analog
56 RCU
CDMA
CDMA
84 2-CE/CCU
CDMA
168 2-CE/CCU
360 8-CE/CCU
CDMA
360 8-CE/CCU
180 8-CE/CCU
CDMA
84 2-CE/CCU
CDMA
168 2-CE/CCU
84 2-CE/CCU
CDMA
168 2-CE/CCU
CDMA
84 2-CE/CCU
84 2-CE/CCU
CDMA
168 2-CE/CCU
TDMA
36 DRU
84 2-CE/CCU
72 EDRU
Analog
84 2-CE/CCU
TDMA
72 EDRU
Analog
72 RCU
84 2-CE/CCU
72 EDRU
TDMA
TDMA
36 DRU
84 2-CE/CCU
Analog
72 RCU
None
180 8-CE/CCU
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
4-38
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
36 DRU
Analog
72 RCU
Analog
72 RCU
72 EDRU
180 8-CE/CCU
CDMA
36 DRU
72 EDRU
180 8-CE/CCU
CDMA
72 RCU
None
180 8-CE/CCU
CDMA
36 DRU
360 8-CE/CCU
180 8-CE/CCU
CDMA
TDMA
360 8-CE/CCU
180 8-CE/CCU
CDMA
168 2-CE/CCU
360 8-CE/CCU
360 8-CE/CCU
180 8-CE/CCU
168 2-CE/CCU
360 8-CE/CCU
CDMA
360 8-CE/CCU
180 8-CE/CCU
CDMA
168 2-CE/CCU
168 2-CE/CCU
None
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
CDMA Series II Cell Site Generator Input
J6
J9
J8
On
Stdby
15 MHz
Alm
No GPS
J2
J7
Ref1
Ref0
Switch
P1
J1
10 MHz Test
Point
J3
Ref0
J4
Ref1
J5
J9
J8
Ref. Freq. & Timing Gen.
Antenna
In Figure 4-12 the leftmost divider is used for the 15.00-MHz reference generator
input, just like the standard Series II Cell Sites. The topmost SMA connector on
the divider, (J7), is used for the 15.00-MHz input from the RTFG in the AIF. The six
other SMA connectors (J1 through J6) are outputs. There is one output for each
CDMA shelf used. Each output connects to a 1:3 divider on the CDMA radio shelf.
One output from the 1:3 divider provides timing to Base Band Combiner and
Radio 1 (BCR1), a second output provides timing to BCR2, and a third output
provides timing to the SCT (if an SCT is on the shelf).
Figure 4-12. Reference Frequency and Timing Generator (RFTG)
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
4-39
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
New Features and Upgrades
Cell Site
Synchronization
Failure Warning &
Correction: Phase 1
This section covers the Phase 1 implementation of Cell Site Synchronization
Warning and Failure Correction for the Reference Frequency and Timing
Generator (RFTG) and its associated base station Global Positioning System
(GPS) antenna.
The Reference Frequency Timing Generator (RFTG) consists of two redundant
plug-in modules interconnected by a housing frame. The left module is referred to
as REF0 and the right module is referred to as REF1. Hardware errors from these
two modules are now treated separately and generate a new status display icon
on Status Display Page (SDP) 2138. Therefore, there are now two icons on SDP
2138: one for each RFTG module, REF0 and REF1.
There is also a third icon, labelled “Cell_Sync”, on SDP 2138. The Cell_Sync icon
warns against a possible synchronization problem. Cell_Sync status is sent to the
Read-Only Printer (ROP) and is displayed as MINOR, MAJOR, or CRITICAL,
based on combinations of errors from the:
■
RFTG modules
■
Synchronized Clock and Tone (SCT) board
■
CDMA Cluster Controller (CCC)
Additionally, GPS Status has also been modified to display only hardware errors
directly related to the GPS hardware (i.e., the GPS Receiver and the GPS
Antenna).
This feature does not require File Activation File (FAF) execution.
New CDMA
Cluster Controller
(CCC) Board with
Increased SRAM
CDMA R7.0 introduces new hardware: a new CDMA Cluster Control (CCC) board
with increased Static Random Access Memory (SRAM). SRAM is a type of
memory which requires electrical power to maintain its contents but does not
require constant refreshing. This new CCC board was designed with larger SRAM
to ensure that it would accommodate the growth in software loads beyond Cell/
ECP R12 and CDMA R7.0, with their ever increasing growth of features and
capabilities.
Although the new CCC board is not required in Cell/ECP R12.0 or in existing
CDMA systems, its implementation is strongly recommended because its need
will increase substantially when software load sizes increase after R12.0.
Additionally, all new CDMA Cell Site systems produced after CDMA R7.0 will use
the new CCC board.
Whether used exclusively or in combination with existing CCC boards, the new
CCC boards perform all existing OA&M and Call Processing functions using PCS,
traditional Cells, or analog radios. While the new CCC board (TN1852B) is not
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
4-40
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
compatible with cell loads prior to G50Y11.00 (CDMA R6.0), it is compatible with
G50Y11.00 and subsequent cell loads.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
4-41
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Code Division Multiple Access
(CDMA) Double Density Growth
Frame (DDGF)
CDMA DDGF
Description
The Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) Double Density Growth Frame
(DDGF) is a new product designed in response to customer requests for higher
CDMA channel capacity, with full-power amplification, made available at the
lowest cost possible. In particular, the DDGF increases CDMA channel capacity in
a Series II Analog Cell Site. When used with a full-power SII MLAC amplifier, the
DDGF supports up to 12 CDMA carriers partitioned into two-six-sector
configurations.
DDGF
Architecture
Frame Architecture
Figure 4-13 shows how the DDGF frame is partitioned into four quadrants: two
quadrants in the top of the frame, two quadrants at the bottom of the frame, and
the fan shelf in between. The two quadrants on the top left and bottom left of the
frame are numbered 1 and 2. The 2 quadrants on the top right and bottom right of
the frame are numbered 3 and 4.
Each of the four quadrants in the DDGF contains an independent, triple-height
(i.e., containing three rows of shelves) CDMA Radio Complex (CRC). Each CRC
contains three CDMA half-shelves arranged one on top of the other in a vertical
stack. There are a total of 12 half-shelves in the DDGF. The six half-shelves from
the top left to the bottom left of the frame are numbered 0 to 5. The six halfshelves from the top right to the bottom right of the frame are numbered 6 to 11.
Figure 4-14 shows the half-shelves.
Each half-shelf of the DDGF contains 10 circuit pack slots, numbered 1 to 10
beginning with the left-most slot and proceeding to the right. An example is shown
in Figure 4-14, which illustrates the circuit packs and where they are placed in
shelves 6, 7, and 8 of the DDGF.
CDMA Radio Complex (CRC) Circuit Packs
In the following discussion regarding the DDGF circuit packs, the term CDMA
Channel Unit (CCU) will apply to either, or both of, the Two-Channel Element CCU
or the enhanced Ten-Channel Element CCU. In addition, a grouping of one to four
CCUs is called a "cluster." Each cluster is supported by a CDMA Cluster
Controller (CCC).
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
4-42
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Q u ad ran t 1
S h elf 0
S h elf 6
S h elf 1
S h elf 7
S h elf 2
S h elf 8
S h elf 3
S h elf 9
S h elf 4
S h elf 10
S h elf 5
S h elf 11
Q u a d ra n t 3
Fans
Q u ad ran t 2
Q u a d ra n t 4
Figure 4-13. Quadrant and Half-shelf Numbering of DDGF (Front View)
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
4-43
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
B P3 P4 P5
P7 P8 P9
n EQLEQL EQL EQL EQL EQL EQL
k 016 022 028 034 040 046 052
P10
P13 P15
EQL EQL EQL n
062 072 080 k
Slot
#8
Slot Slot
#9 #10
B P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9
n EQLEQL EQL EQL EQL EQL EQL
k 016 022 028 034 040 046 052
EQL EQL EQL n
062 072 080 k
Slot
#8
B P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9
n EQLEQL EQL EQL EQL EQL EQL
k 016 022 028 034 040 046 052
Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot
#1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7
Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot
#1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7
Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot
#1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7
Slot
#8
P10
Slot Slot
#9 #10
P13 P15
Slot Slot
#9 #10
Shelf 6
SCT boards are
always installed
in half-shelves 6 & 7
of quadrant 3.
The SCT slots in
all the other
quadrants are
left unequipped.
Shelf 7
The older 415AC
may also be used.
Shelf 8
EQL EQL EQL n
062 072 080 k
P10
P13 P15
Quadrant 3 (Front View)
Figure 4-14. Illustration of Circuit Packs Populating the CRC
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
4-44
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
CRC circuit packs are enumerated below and Table 4-C lists the Circuit Pack
apparatus code, half-shelf location, slot location, and function of all circuit packs.
The circuit packs that populate the CRC are:
1.
One to Four CDMA Channel Units (CCU), or a "cluster"
2.
One CDMA Cluster Controller (CCC)
3.
One Baseband Combiner/Radio (BCR)
4.
One Bus Interface Unit (BIU)
5.
One Analog Conversion Unit (ACU)
There are no redundant BCRs, ACUs, or BIUs in each CRC quadrant.
The BIU contains the:
1.
TDM bus interface to support the BCR and ACU
2.
DC-DC converters required to supply voltages of +5V, -5.2V, and
_ 12V
Together, the BCR, BIU, and ACU are commonly known as the BBA. For each
quadrant, if the BBA and the CDMA cluster are not interconnected, any handoff
will be a soft hadoff. The BBA and the CDMA cluster can also be interconnected
for softer handoff. Interconnection is controlled by a translation.
6.
Two Synchronized Clock and Tone Units (SCTs) and one Digital Facilities
Unit (DFI)
The two Synchronized Clock and Tone (SCT) circuit packs in the CRC are always
installed in the two uppermost, front-right half-shelves, numbered 6 and 7, of
quadrant 3. The SCTs generate 19.6608 MHz and the TDM bus clocks. The TDM
SCT switches must be enabled on the backplane of shelves 6 and 7.
The Digital Facilities Interface (DFI) for each CRC is located in the lowest halfshelf. The DFI provides the software interface between the TDM bus and one T1
or E1 digital transmission line. Each DS1 can carry 24 Digital Level 0 signals
(DS0s time slots in the domestic DS1 mode). The T1/E1 line links the DDGF site
to the Mobile Switching Center (MSC).
7.
One Power Converter Unit (PCU)
Lastly, each half-shelf has one 415AE DC-to-DC power converter to convert the
+24 VDC main power to +5 VDC. (The older 415AC may also be used.)
NOTE:
There is no difference between one CRC quadrant and another except that
the SCT boards are always installed in the two uppermost, right-most halfshelves, numbered 6 and 7, of quadrant 3. The SCT slots in the other CRC
quadrants are left empty.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
4-45
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Table 4-8.
Table of CRC Circuit Packs Apparatus, Slot Installation, and Function
Slot(s) Installed In
Circuit Packs
Apparatus Code
Eql
Shelves Installed In
Board Function
01
CCC
TN1852B
016
0 to 11
CDMA
Cluster
Controller
02
ECU1/
TCU1
TN1711, TN1712,
TN1716, TN1718
022
0 to 11
CDMA Channel
Unit (CCU)
03
ECU2/
TCU2
TN1711, TN1712,
TN1716, TN1718
028
0 to 11
CCU
04
ECU3/
TCU3
TN1711, TN1712,
TN1716, TN1718
034
0 to 11
CCU
05
ECU4/
TCU4
TN1711, TN1712,
TN1716, TN1718
040
0 to 11
CCU
06
BIU
TN1702
046
0 to 11
Bus
face
07
ACU
TN1853
052
0 to 11
Analog
Conversion Unit
08
BCR
44WR1
062
0 to 11
Baseband Combiner and Radio
09
SCT
TN1703
072
Only 6 & 7
Synchronized
Clock and Tone
unit
09
DFI
TN3500B or
TN1713B
072
2, 5, 8, & 11
Digital
Facilities Interface
10
PCU
415AE or the older
415AC
080
0 to 11
DC/DC Power
Converter Unit
InterUnit
Frame Configuration
In addition to the partitioning of the DDGF frame and the circuit packs it supports,
the DDGF is configured with:
■
A fan shelf for cooling
■
A15-MHz reference frequency distribution network, to support CDMA
timing
■
An RF distribution network located in the Interconnection Panel Assembly
(IPA) on top of the DDGF
■
DC power distribution
■
DC power circuit breakers
■
An optional CDMA Radio Test Unit module (CRTUm), in the bottom of the
frame, to support CDMA testing requirements
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
4-46
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
These will be examined more closely in the sections that follow.
Using the DDGF
in a Series II
Analog Cell Site
Cell Site Requirements
The CDMA DDGF may only be installed in an indoor, controlled-access Series II
base station operating on DC power. To install a DDGF into an Analog SII cell site,
the Cell Site must be equipped with the following:
1.
Linear Amplifier Frame (LAF): The LAF contains the Modular Linear
Amplifier Circuits (MLACs) that amplify and transmit signals. Each transmit
amplifier can support up to four CDMA radios. There can be up to two LAFs
depending on the configuration of the Cell Site.
2.
Antenna Interface Frame (AIF): The AIF houses:
1.
Transmit and receive filters
2.
Receive pre-amplifiers
3.
The Reference Frequency and Timing Generator (RFTG/RFTGm-II)
The DDGF is a CDMA growth frame and therefore needs a Global Positioning
System (GPS) antenna, in addition to an RFTG/RFTGm-II in order to establish
proper frame timing.
The DDGF usually replaces one of the two growth frames in a Series II cell site.
(System software allows up to two growth frames in a Series II cell site).
Configurations Supported for DDGF
The DDGF supports the three configurations listed below and illustrated in
Figure 4-15, Figure 4-16, and Figure 4-17. The three configurations supported
are:
Configuration 3: DDGF with SII Primary Frame
Configuration 4: DDGF with SII Primary and SII CDMA Growth Frames
Configuration 5: DDGF with SII Primary and SII Analog Growth Frames
Configurations 1 and 2 are no longer supported and so are not listed here.
However, for historical reasons Configurations 3, 4, and 5 have retained their
original numbering and will continue to be referred to as Configuration 3,
Configuration 4, and Configuration 5.
Series II Configurations and Cell Site Line-Up Supported for DDGF
Each of the three Series II cell site configurations which use the DDGF contains at
least one and no more than two LAFs and at least one and no more than two
AIFs. All the frames used for each configuration, and the way in which the DDGF
is used in each configuration, are illustrated in the three figures below and in the
table following the figures.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
4-47
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Because of RCC and MLAC limitations, the maximum number of CDMA radios
that a Series II cell site can support is 12. Therefore, all the CRC quadrants of the
DDGF cannot be populated with CDMA radios. The quadrants that can be
populated depends on how the DDGF is being used at the Series II cell site.
Because the SCT boards are always installed in CRC quadrant 3, the TDM bus
cable from the other radio frame always connects to CRC quadrant 3 first.
Additionally, TDM bus cables are always installed "red stripe up." Therefore, the
sequence in which the CRC quadrants are populated is:
1.
Quadrant 3
2.
Quadrant 4
3.
Quadrant 2
4.
Quadrant 1
Table 4-9.
DDGF Configuration Schemes
Configuration
Number
Primary RCF
1st Growth RCF
Configuration 3:
SII Analog RCF
DDGF
Configuration 4:
SII Analog RCF
CDMA RCF
Configuration 5:
SII Analog RCF
SII Analog RCF
2nd Growth RCF
DDGF Quadrants Populated
1 2 3 4
DDGF is
2nd CDMA RCF
DDGF is
1st CDMA RCF
Circuit Pack Placement for Series II Cell Site DDGF Configurations
For each of the configurations 3, 4, and 5, already defined, the information below
lists the following:
■
How the quadrants of the DDGF are populated
■
The specific circuit packs used for each configuration
■
The slot into which each circuit pack may be installed for each configuration
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
4-48
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Configuration 3: All four CRC quadrants (i.e., the entire frame) can be populated
to obtain the maximum number of CDMA radio channels supported by the SII cell
site.
RCV Configuration 3 (s2-ddgf) is a four quadrant ddgf (12 shelves).
Circuit Pack
Shelf Number(s)
Slot Number(s)
SCTs
6, 7
DFIs
2, 5, 8, 11
CCCs
All
CCUs
BBAs
2, 3, 4, 5
All
6, 7, 8
T1
Receive
(Rx)
Alarm
Transmit
(Tx)
AIF 1
AIF 0
LAF 1
LAF 0
TDM
RCF 0
FIF
DDGF
Figure 4-15. Configuration 3: AIF, LAF, and SII Primary, with DDGF as 1st
CDMA Growth Frame
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
4-49
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Configuration 4: Two of the CRC quadrants can be populated, to obtain the
maximum number of CDMA radio channels supported by the SII cell site.
RCV Configuration 4 (s2-c-ddgf) is a two quadrant ddgf (6 shelves).
Circuit Pack
Shelf Number(s)
Slot Number(s)
SCTs
6, 7
DFIs
8, 11
CCCs
CCUs
2, 3, 4, 5
BBAs
6, 7, 8
T1
AIF 1
AIF 0
LAF 1
Receive
(Rx)
Alarms
Transmit
(Tx)
TDM
LAF 0
RCF 0
SII
CDMA
Growt
FIF
DDGF
Figure 4-16. Configuration 4: AIF, LAF, SII Primary, SII CDMA Growth, with
DDGF as 2nd CDMA Growth Frame
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
4-50
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Configuration 5: Four of the CRC quadrants can be populated, to obtain the
maximum number of CDMA radio channels supported by the SII cell site.
RCV Configuration 5 (s2-s2-ddgf) is a four quadrant ddgf (12 shelves).
Circuit Pack
Shelf Number(s)
Slot Number(s)
SCTs
6, 7
DFIs
2, 5, 8, 11
CCCs
All
CCUs
2, 3, 4, 5
BBAs
All
6, 7, 8
T1
Receive
(Rx)
Alarm
Transmit
(Tx)
AIF 1
AIF 0
LAF 1
LAF 0
TDM
RCF 0
RCF 1
FIF
DDGF
Figure 4-17. Configuration 5: AIF, LAF, SII Primary, SII Analog
(i.e., non-CDMA) Growth, with DDGF as 2nd Growth
Frame and 1st CDMA Growth Frame
Recent Change and Verify (RC/V) forms
The Recent Change and Verify (RC/V) forms used with the DDGF are:
■
cell2: How the DDGF frame is being used (e.g., first growth frame, etc.)
■
ceqcom2: Operation of equipment, such as circuit boards, on the DDGF
shelves
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
4-51
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
■
ceqccu: Configure the CCCs
■
ceqcloc: Configure timing, such as the timing of the SCT and DFI boards
■
ceqface: PN offset, Pilot/Sync/Page, etc
■
pptg: Trunks
■
pptm: Set up Packet Pipes, trunk status, DS1 board number, DS0 channel
assignment, etc
■
sub: CRTU information
DDGF Interface
Table 4-10, lists the connections between the DDGF and supporting SII
equipment.
Table 4-10.
RFTG
Connections Between DDGF and Supporting SII Equipment
Connections between DDGF and AIF (RFTG/RFTGm-II) and GPS timing signals
(RS-485, 15 MHz)
RF receive cables
Connections between DDGF and LAF
RF transmit cables
Connections between DDGF and FIF
T1 or E1 lines
Connections between DDGF and Primary Frame
TDM bus,
Alarm lines
The RFTG, which is housed in the Series II Antenna Interface Frame (AIF),
provides CDMA radio equipment with the clock generation and distribution it
needs to meet CDMA timing requirements.
The RFTG consists of two reference units that are disciplined by Global Position
System (GPS) signals received by the GPS antenna.
1.
The unit on the left-hand side (side 0) is identified as REF0. REF0 of the
RFTG is a 15-MHz Rubidium oscillator (Rb) unit (RFTG-Rb). It provides a
15 MHz sine wave reference frequency and one pulse per second (1 PPS)
timing signal. The 15-MHz reference frequency is distributed over a 50ohm system incorporating power splitters and coaxial cable, shown in
Figure 4-18, below. The RFTG distributes the 1PPS timing signal to the
DDGF SCT.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
4-52
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
15 MHz
Reference
Signal
from
RFTG/
RFTGm-II
6 db
Pad
1 to 6
Power
Divider
Part of IPA (top of the DDGF)
1 to 3
Power
Divider
Terminated 50 Ohm
BCR
BCR
1 to 3
Power
Divider
Terminated 50 Ohm
BCR
BCR
1 to 3
Power
Divider
Terminated 50 Ohm
BCR
BCR
1 to 3
Power
Divider
Terminated 50 Ohm
BCR
BCR
1 to 3
Power
Divider
BCR
BCR
SCT
1 to 3
Power
Divider
BCR
BCR
SCT
Shelf 6
and
6KHOI 
Figure 4-18. 15-MHz Reference Frequency Distribution Scheme
2.
The unit on the right-hand side (side1) is identified as REF1. REF1 is a 15MHz Ovenized temperature-controlled Crystal Oscillator (XO) unit with a
built-in GPS receiver, RFTG-XO. The GPS receiver generates the 1PPS
and GPS time message.
The REF0 and REF1 units work together as redundant units. These two units are
interconnected to provide:
■
Phase lock
■
Failure detection
■
Autonomous switching
During normal operation, the Rb unit is active, and supplies the 15-MHz reference
frequency and a 1PPS timing signal. The XO unit is activated by an autonomous
failure triggered sequence if the Rb unit fails. The RFTG is shown in Figure 4-19.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
4-53
J9
J8
Ref. Freq. & Timing Gen.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
J7
P1
Ref1
Ref0
Switch
Figure 4-19. Reference Frequency and Timing Generator (RFTG)
4-54
On
Stdby
15 MHz
Alm
No GPS
J2
J1
10 MHz Test
Point
J3
Ref0
J4
Ref1
J5
J9
J8
J6
Antenna
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
RS-485 communication data ports are provided by both RFTG units for unit status
inquiry and GPS Time information. The RS-485 duplex serial interface
communicates to and from the RFTG to both the SCTs in CRC shelves 6 and 7 of
the DDGF.
If you are installing a new RFTG, refer to Base Station CDMA Reference
Frequency Timing Generator and Antenna System - Description, Operation,
Installation and Maintenance Guidelines, document number 401-660-128.
CDMA DDGF
Power
Requirements,
Distribution, and
Calibration
CDMA DDGF +24 Volt Power Requirements
Because of losses in the power distribution system, the input voltage available at a
DDGF can range from 0.75 to 0.5 volts below the battery plant voltage. The input
voltage range measured at the frame input can vary between +25 to 27.25 V DC.
This range varies depending on the float voltage of the batteries used in the cell
site. For simplicity, the nominal input voltage specified is +24 V DC.
+24 Volt Power Distribution
The 24-volt Returns in the DDGF connect to a Common Return Bus Bar inside the
frame. The twelve +24-volt feeders are then distributed to a series of 20-amp,
three-amp, and two-amp circuit breakers located in the power distribution
assembly. They are shown in Figure 4-19. The outputs from the twelve 20-amp
circuit breakers feed the 415AE DC-to-DC converters on each CRC shelf. (The
older 415 AC may also be used.These DC-to-DC converters supply the +5 volts at
60 amps maximum required for the circuit packs on each CRC shelf. The twelve
20-amp circuit breakers also feed the +24-volts required on each CRC shelf for
the BIU/CCC/SCT circuit packs. The three three-amp circuit breakers feed the
+24 volts required for the three fan groups, and the two-amp circuit breaker feeds
the optional CRTUm module.
Power feeder connections on the top of the DDGF IPA are run to the 30-amp
circuit breakers in the Series II Power Cabinet.
CDMA Power Calibration
Installation Engineering Handbook 226, Section 31 contains power calibration
procedures for all 850 CDMA products including:
1.
Cellular CDMA Growth Frame
2.
Double Density Growth Frame (DDGF)
3.
CDMA Hybrid Minicell
4.
Classic CDMA Minicell
5.
CDMA Adjunct
6.
Cellular CDMA Compact Minicell
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
4-55
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
These procedures should be performed after integrating the CDMA frame to the
MSC and after all CDMA diagnostics have passed all tests. The CDMA product
being calibrated must be installed and integrated before performing the
procedures in Handbook Section 31.
Table 4-11 contains a list of the CDMA integration handbook sections that MUST
be completed before starting CDMA power calibration.
Table 4-11.
Related Installation Engineering Handbook Sections
Section
Description
Glossary
Terms and Acronyms
Equipment Description And Planning
30
Test Equipment Calibration
414
CDMA Database Translations
424
CDMA Minicell and Compact Minicell Integration
441
CDMA Growth Frame Integration
442
CDMA Double Density Integration
443
CDMA Adjunct Integration
445
CDMA Compact Growth Integration
This power calibration procedure requires that the CDMA cabinet has been
successfully booted to an ECP via datalinks. The CSC (RCC) must be updated to
the correct NVM and all diagnostics (CSC and CDMA) must pass. If these
requirements have not been met, refer to the appropriate CDMA Integration
Handbook Section (see Table 4-11).
Test equipment (CSTS, BSTS, or power meter) MUST be calibrated prior to
beginning the CDMA power calibration. For test equipment calibration, refer to
Handbook 226, Section 30.
CAUTION:
Proper Electrostatic Discharge practices, including use of wrist straps, must
be used when handling circuit packs to prevent damage of components
sensitive to ESD.
CAUTION:
To prevent personal injury and/ or damage to cell equipment, never
disconnect RF cables while any RCU or BCR is in the TRANSMIT state (TX
LED ON).
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
4-56
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
CAUTION:
The HP8481H Power Sensor Head may be permanently damaged if a 30dB
attenuator is not connected between the sensor head and the foam jumper
measurement point.
Pilot-only calibration is used for the LAC/MLAC amplifiers. The pilot-only
calibration generates a constant pilot with the paging, sync, and traffic channels
disabled.
[1] Update cell translation forms with the following data. Note the original data so
that it can be restored after power has been set:
■
Update ceqface:
Pilot Channel Gain (dgu)108
Paging Channel Gain (dgu)0
Sync Channel Gain (dgu)0
■
Update ceqcom2:
LAC Typel
Max Power13.5
BCR Attenuation Factor (dB)10
NOTE:
The BCR Attenuation Factor was in the ceqface form prior to ECP 12.0.
NOTE:
Repeat this procedure for the CDMA clusters associated with each carrier.
There should be one cluster for each carrier.
[2] If inhibited, allow call processing:
alw:cell a, cp
[3] Switch all faceplate switches (BCR and RCU) to OFF.
[4] Remove all BBAs from service:
rmv:cell a, bba b; ucl
CAUTION:
To prevent personal injury and damage to cell equipment, never disconnect
RF cables while radio units are transmitting.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
4-57
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
[5] Disconnect the foam jumper cable from the transmit antenna associated for
the CDMA cluster being adjusted. The foam jumper is the cable connecting the
transmit filter J4 port to the antenna cable at the cell hatch plate.
[6] Use an ITE-6924 test cable to connect the HP8921A or HP8935 RF In port to
the foam jumper cable, or connect the HP437B/ HPE4418A power meter sensor
through the 30dB attenuator to the foam jumper cable. Do not use a test cable
with a power meter unless an offset value is entered in the meter.
[7] Operate the faceplate switch on the BCR to be adjusted to AUTO and use the
following command to unconditionally restore the BBA for the desired sector and
carrier:
rst:cell a, bba b; ucl
b = BBA member being adjusted.
[8] Verify the BCR ACT LED comes on.
[9] If this is a new CDMA cell site and there is no analog service, then the pre-amp
may have never been adjusted. If the pre-amp has never been adjusted for this
cell site, then adjust the LAC/MLAC pre-amp to electrical center before adjusting
the first BCR. To do this, turn the LAC pre-amp from its minimum power level to its
maximum power level and then set it at the electrical mid-point.
NOTE:
Anytime a LAC pre-amp is adjusted, all the RCUs and BCRs transmitting on
that LAC must be re-adjusted.
[10] The metering device should display the approximate desired power. If the
reading is beyond the maximum and minimum values shown in Table 4-12, ensure
that the ceqface and ceqcom2 forms are correct and verify the BCR transmit path
before attempting to adjust the BCR.
[11] Adjust the BCR faceplate pot to achieve the desired level as specified in Table
4-12.
Table 4-12.
Metering
Device
Approximate
Minimum
Desired
Power
Approximate
Maximum
CSTS
BSTS
29 dBm
0.8 W
33 dBm
2W
41 dBm
13 W
HP437B
HPE4418A
(30dB Attn)
-1 dBm
0.8 mW
3 dBm
2 mW
11 dBm
13 mW
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
4-58
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
BCR Attn = 10, Pilot DGU = 108, Page/Sync DGU = 0/0
Amplifier type = l, Max_power = 13.5
[12] When the desired level is set, operate the BCR faceplate switch to OFF.
[13] To set power on a multiple carrier system, repeat steps [7] through [12] for
each remaining carrier cluster on the sector the metering device is connected to.
If a LAC/MLAC pre-amp was adjusted to electrical center, do not re-adjust it.
[14] When BCR power for all carriers of this sector have been set, disconnect the
metering device from the foam jumper and connect the foam jumper back to the
antenna cable.
[15] Repeat steps [5] through [14] for each BCR associated with the remaining
sectors.
[16] When power is set for all BCRs, restore the original Pilot, Page, Sync, Max
Power, and BCR Attenuation values to the ceqface and ceqcom2 forms.
[17] Ensure that all the CDMA clusters have been adjusted and that the transmit
antennas have all been reconnected.
[18] Switch all faceplate switches (BCR and RCU) to AUTO.
[19] Perform a cell stable clear:
init:cell a: sc
Grounding
Requirements
The DDGF requires two separate kinds of grounding, as follows:
1.
24 Volt DC Return (Grounding)
2.
Frame Grounding (FRM_GRD)
Volt DC Return (Grounding)
The +24 V DC return feeders are connected to the return bus at the Battery/
Rectifier power plant. The return bus in the Battery/Rectifier power plant is bonded
to the grounding system with the appropriate grounding conductor.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
4-59
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Shelf Circuit Breakers (11 through 0)
11
CRTU
Fan 2 Fan 0
Fan 1
Fans
CRTUm
Figure 4-20. Double Density Growth Frame (top panel removed to expose
circuit breakers - Rear View)
Frame and Base Station Grounding
All equipment frames are bonded to the grounding system at a minimum of two
locations. Additionally, the DDGF is bonded to adjacent existing radio equipment
frames. All base station grounding must follow the guidelines provided by Lucent
Technologies document 401-200-115, Grounding and Lightning Protection
Guidelines for Lucent Technologies Network Wireless System Cell Site, or the
warranty may be voided.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
4-60
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Cable Installation for the DDGF
Cable installation for the DDGF is as follows:
Transmit coax connections are made from the DDGF Transmit Power Combiner
in the IPA to the LAF Transmit In.
Receive coax connections are made from the AIF Receive Power Dividers to the
DDGF Receive Power Dividers.
Front of Frame
Knock Out
Ground Wire
Double Terminal Lug
Rear of Frame
Figure 4-21. Frame Ground From Adjacent Cabinet
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
4-61
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Existing Knock Out in Frame
Green Wire 5 Inches Radius Minimum
(Back View)
Figure 4-22. Ground Wire Connections Between Frames
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
4-62
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Connecting the
DDGF to Frames
in a Series II
Connecting the DDGF to Series II frames requires cables similar to those used
when connecting a CDMA Growth Radio Frame. The following guidelines apply to
installing these cables:
1.
The nominal impedance for all RF paths is 50 ohms.
2.
CDMA transmit path: The transmitter outputs from the BCR are cabled to
a common 4:1 power combiner in the IPA. The IPA can accommodate up to
six 4:1 transmit power combiners for either an omni, three-sector or sixsector configuration. The outputs from the 4:1 power combiners at the top
of the DDGF IPA are then cabled to the appropriate LAF input.
3.
CDMA receive path: A 1:4 dividing scheme similar to the transmit path
combining scheme is used for the receive path. There are two receive
paths (RX0 and RX1). The IPA can accommodate up to twelve 1:4 power
dividers (six for RX0 and six for RX1) for either an omni, three-sector or sixsector con-figuration. The inputs to the 1:4 power divider at the top of the
DDGF IPA for the installer are cabled from the appropriate AIF output.
4.
Transmit/Receive: J101/J102 are transmit/receive signaling for quadrants
3 and 4. J105/J106 are transmit/receive signaling for quadrants 1 and 2.
Additionally, the following note applies to all cabling connected to the DDGF.
The alarm cables are to be run on the cable racks to the proper bay. Additional
slack is to be stored on the rack or top of the bay in a neat manner. All protection
requirements are to be followed.
CAUTION:
! No nylon ties are to be used to secure cables on the cable racks.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
4-63
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
(Rear of IPA) DC Power Input
+24 V (Red) +24 Rtn (Gray)
Shelf 0 1 2 3 4 5
T1 Out
To Halo
Ground
6 7 8 9 10 11
T1 In
To Halo
Ground
15 MHz
Reference
Cable from
RFTG
Alarms
J101
J102
RS-485/1-PPS
J103
J104
J105
J106
Attenuator
To Next
Cabinet
Ground
To Next
Cabinet
Ground
RX0 1
TX 1
TX 0
TX 2
RX0 0 RX0 2
RX1 1
RX1 0 RX1 2
(Top of Cabinet - Front of IPA)
Figure 4-23. DDGF IPA
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
4-64
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Filter 3
Filter 2
Filter 1
Filter 0
LAC 0
LAC 2
LAC 3
LAC 1
Figure 4-24. Top of LAF 0, MLAC Power Divider Inputs
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
4-65
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Filter 3
Filter 2
Filter 1
Filter 0
LAC 4
LAC 6
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
LAC 5
Figure 4-25. Top of LAF 1, MLAC Power Divider Input
4-66
August 2000
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Top View
J2 J3 J4 J5 J6 J7
Diversity 0
J2 J3 J4 J5 J6 J7
Diversity 1
(PD7 - Antenna 3)
(PD8 - Antenna 3)
(PD5 - Antenna 2)
(PD6 - Antenna 2)
(PD3 - Antenna 1)
(PD4 - Antenna 1)
(PD1 - Antenna 0)
(PD2 - Antenna 0)
Front of Cabinet
Figure 4-26. Top of AIF 0, RX 0, and RX 1 Power Divider Outputs (front view)
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
4-67
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Top View
J2 J3 J4 J5 J6 J7
J2 J3 J4 J5 J6 J7
Diversity 0
Diversity 1
(PD13 - Antenna 6)
(PD14 - Antenna 6)
(PD11 - Antenna 5)
(PD12 - Antenna 5)
(PD9 - Antenna 4)
(PD10 - Antenna 4)
Front of Cabinet
Figure 4-27. Top of AIF 1, RX 0, and RX 1 Power Divider Outputs
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
4-68
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Time Division Multiplex (TDM) Bus 1
A Series II Cell Site equipped with a DDGF is installed using two TDM buses, with
the DDGF using the second TDM Bus (TDM Bus 1). The TDM Bus is a 2.048MHz 8-bit Time Division Multiplexed bus which provides voice, data, or control
connectivity to the CCC, BIU, and SCT/DFI circuit packs on the CRC backplane.
Transfer of TDM bus control channel messages between the core processor (RCF
0, RCC Shelf) and a port board are performed by the RCF 0, RCC shelf Network
Control Interface (NCI). The CAT in RCF 0 provides the clock timing for TDM Bus
0, while the SCT in the DDGF provides the clock timing for TDM Bus 1. TDM bus
cables are installed "red stripe up."
TDM Bus Termination and Interconnection Cabling
TDM bus 1 (installed "red stripe up") is always terminated at the DDGF backplane
connector (P13, shelf 0) by inserting a AYD3 TDM bus termination board.
Some newer TDM bus cables include a strain relief. The cable is doubled back
across the top of the connector, and a plastic strain relief is added to hold the
cable in place. This causes the cable to extend further from the backplane,
making the latch clamps insufficiently long enough to capture the connector.
Remove the strain relief. Depress the small tab located at each end of the
connector with a ballpoint pen while pulling the plastic strain relief away from the
connector.
CDMA Radio Test
Unit Module and
Interface
CRTUm and RSP Interaction
Through an RS-422 data link, the CRTUm (CDMA Radio Test Unit module - an
embedded CDMA test mobile) along with a Radio Test Unit (RTU) Switch Panel
(RSP) allows for on-site radio diagnostics and repair as well as diagnostics from a
central office. The CRTUm consists of two major components:
1.
CRTUm
2.
CRTUm interface (CRTUi) circuit pack that plugs into growth slot #15 of
the RCC shelf in RCF 0
NOTE:
The CRTUi and CRTUm communicate on the RS-422 link using the
CRTUm data port. The Radio Test Unit (RTU) Switch Panel (RSP) enables
testing of CDMA hardware. AMPS and Digital (CDMA only for DDGF)
testing is done in conjunction with the RSP Control Board (RCB), AYD8,
residing in the rear of the RTU shelf in RCF 0. An AYD12 adapter board
allows the CRTUi to communicate with the RS-422 data links.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
4-69
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Internal Backplane Trace
Cables installed when shipped
P1 or P14
TDM Bus 1 Cable to be installed
T AYD3 BusTermination
(P13)
TDM Bus 1 Connects to CCC, BIU,
SCT/DFI slot.
EQL 162 (AYD4)
EQL 042 (AYD3)
TDM Bus 1
P14
Shelf 6
Shelf 0
Shelf 7
Shelf 1
P13
AYD12
EQL 120
Shelf 0
Shelf 1
(TDM Bus 0)
EQL 024
Shelf 2
Shelf 8
Fans
Fans
Shelf 9
Shelf 3
Shelf 10
Shelf 4
Shelf 11
Shelf 5
DDGF
RCF 0 (Primary)
(Back View)
(Back View)
Figure 4-28. TDM Bus Installation. TDM bus cables are installed "red stripe
up." (Configuration 3)
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
4-70
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
AYD4 Bus Connector
P1 or P14A
T AYD3 BusTermination
(P13)
TDM Bus Connects to CCC, BIU,
SCT/DFI slot.
TDM BUS 1
TDM BUS 0
Shelf 6
Shelf 0
Shelf 7
Shelf 1
AYD12
EQL 66-120
EQL042
AYD3
Shelf 2
Shelf 8
Fan
Fan
Fan
Shelf 9
Shelf 3
Shelf 10
Shelf 4
Shelf 11
Shelf 4
Shelf 5
Shelf 5
EQL 13-162
DDGF
(Back View)
RCF 1 (Analog or CDMA Growth)
(Back View)
RCF 0 (Primary)
(Back View)
Figure 4-29. TDM Bus Installation. TDM bus cables are installed "red stripe
up." (Configurations 4 and 5)
CDMA Radio Test Unit Module (CRTUm)
The CRTUm data interface is a nine-pin data connector. Power is supplied to the
CRTUm through a two-pin connector. The CRTUm communicates with the
Baseband CDMA Radio (BCR) via a test RF path established by the RSP test
switch matrix. The RF interface is coupled from a mobile antenna coupling
adapter through a duplexer and filter circuit to SMA Jacks for separate transmit
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
4-71
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
and receive ports for test purposes. External attenuators are required to balance
out the transmit and receive path losses. The (Tx and Rx) attenuators, which are
external to the CRTUm, are part of the overall CRTU test path.
There are two options for mounting the CTRUm, and a different CTRUm is used
for each option. The CTRUm may be:
1.
Wall-mounted
2.
Housed in the bottom of the DDGF
Installation kits include power jumpers and instructions. A DDGF circuit breaker
provides the power to the CRTUm.
Rear of Unit
To RCB RF Switch
or RSP Test Switch
Matrix
+24 VDC From
Circuit Breaker
in Power
-26 db -40 db Distribution Shelf
(2 pin connector)
SMA Jacks
Tx
Rx
9-Pin Data
Connector
to AYD12
Slot #15 of
RCC of RCF 0
(EQL # 120)
CRTUm
Front of Unit
Figure 4-30. CDMA Radio Test Unit Module
Table 4-13.
CRTUm RF and DC Power Requirements
CRTUm Requirements
Units
TX Output at Mobile Antenna Connector
-57 to +23 dBm (200 milliwatts max.)
RX Input at Mobile Antenna Connector
-25 dBm to -104 dBm (869 MHz to 894 MHz)
DC Voltage
+19.0 to +28.5 V dc
DC Current
2.0 amps max at 19 V dc
CRTUi/CRTUm/RCB/RSP Control And RF Interface
The CRTUi connects directly to the RSP, or through the RCB RF switch interface
via a coaxial interface. In a cell site with multiple Test Units (TUs), i.e., AMPS RTU,
TDMA RTU (TRTU) or CDMA RTU (CRTU), the RCB is responsible for switching
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
4-72
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
the RF interfaces between the multiple TUs to the test paths. Only the TRTU and
the CRTUi can control the RCB for their test functions. The RCB defaults to RTU
control normally. The RSP responds to commands from the CRTUi via the RCB to
determine which test paths need to be established. The CRTUi, upon request of
the RCC, is able to request parameter reporting, update parameter changes and
autonomous actions of the CRTUm.
DDGF Impact on RF Testing
RF testing of a cell site is done by connecting the CDMA Radio Test Unit module
(CRTUm) to the cell site transmit and receive path filter panels. An RTU Switch
Panel (RSP) is used in the interconnection to allow the CRTUm to interact with
any chosen sector.
Addition of the DDGF to the cell site does not change how this RF testing is done
because the DDGF adds radio capacity only; it does not affect the RF paths of the
cell. Therefore, RF testing will continue to be based on the primary frame type,
and will be independent of whether the growth frame is DDGF or another allowed
frame type.
Alarms
The Alarm/FITS Interface (AFI) circuit pack in the RCC shelf of RCF 0 provides
the interface for all the cell and hardware alarms. (In addition, the FITS testing
computer can also be connected to the AFI board through a RS-488 connector at
the front).
The four major alarm categories are:
1.
Amplifier alarms
2.
Frame alarms
3.
Users alarms
4.
AIF alarms.
Table 4-14.
CRTUi/CRTUm/RCB/RSP Control Interface
CRTUi
Backplane
Pin
CRTUi
Signal
AYD12
Backplane
Pin
RSP
Signal
Signal
Description
046
SAGECTR
314
Sage Control Signal
147
GPIO
215
General Purpose I/O and
Hard Reset
040
SER0RXDR
308
Serial Port 0 Receive
043
SER0RXDR
311
Data from CRTUm
142
SER0TXDR
210
Serial Port 0 Transmit
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
4-73
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Table 4-14.
CRTUi/CRTUm/RCB/RSP Control Interface (Contd)
140
SER0TXDR
208
Data to CRTUm
139
SER1TXD
207
ANT_SEL+
Serial Port 1
137
SER1TXD
205
ANT_SEL-
Transmit Data to RSP
035
RSPREQ1
303
RTU_ACT
Control Request of RSP by
CRTUi
033
SER1RXD
301
ANT_MSG_ACK+
Serial Port 1
032
SER1RXD
300
ANT_MSG_ACK-
Receive Data from RSP
138
Ground
206
Ground
134
Ground
202
Ground
The DDGF uses the same type of frame alarms as the Series II CDMA Growth
Frame. Therefore, the frame alarm handling is identical to Series II. The alarms
are connected to the AFI pins normally allocated to a Series II growth frame.
These AFI pins are located in the Primary Radio Channel Frame.
Frame alarms provide the status of the Power Converter Units (PCUs),
temperature, and fans of the frame. There are 12 alarm signals (six for PCUs and
six for fans) routed via cable to the IPA at the top of the DDGF.
Shelf alarms carry the status of the shelf PCU. The PCU alarms in the DDGF are
wired such that an alarm can indicate a failure of the power converter in DDGF
shelf 0, or in DDGF shelf 6, or both.
Fan alarms provide the status of the fans. For any fan that stops rotating, a failure
alarm is generated for the fan and the failure is reported back to the AFI using the
same interface cabling as the 415AE (or 415AC) alarms.
Table 4-15.
DDGF Alarms
Alarm Name
Description
IPA J103 Pin Number
FAL0L
Fan 0 Failure
FAL1L
Fan 1 Failure
FAL2L
Fan 2 Failure
FAL3L
Fan 3 Failure
10
FAL4L
Fan 4 Failure
11
FAL5L
Fan 5 Failure
12
PWR_AL_SH0_SH6
PCU Failure Shelf 0, 6
PWR_AL_SH1_SH7
PCU Failure Shelf 1, 7
PWR_AL_SH2_SH8
PCU Failure Shelf 2, 8
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
4-74
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Table 4-15.
DDGF Alarms (Contd)
PWR_AL_SH3_SH9
PCU Failure Shelf 3, 9
PWR_AL_SH4_SH10
PCU Failure Shelf 4, 10
PWR_AL_SH5_SH11
PCU Failure Shelf 5, 11
415AE (or 415AC) DC-To-DC Converter Alarms
The alarms on each CRC shelf are 415AE (or the older 415AC) power unit alarm
and circuit pack alarms. Alarms and/or faults associated with the circuit packs are
handled at the pack level.
The Power Unit Alarm (relay contact) and LED Indicators are as follows:
■
Low output voltage alarm if the output voltage falls below 80% of nominal
(RED LED turns ON, relay contacts close)
■
High output voltage alarm if the output voltage is greater than 120% of
nominal (output turns OFF, unit latches OFF, RED LED turns ON, relay
contacts close). The input voltage must be disconnected before the latch
will clear
■
Red LED on faceplate indicates an alarm
■
Green LED on faceplate indicates the presence of input voltage
■
Single isolated contact closure upon LV alarm or HV shutdown
■
Relay contacts connected to the backplane [ALM1 (Pin 113) and ALM2
(Pin 014)]. The ALM2 pin is connected to ground. A relay closure connects
ALM1 to ALM2 which indicates an alarm (Logic 0)
+5 V DC performance is not guaranteed below +20 V DC input to 415AE (or the
older 415AC).
CDMA CRC Shelf Circuit Pack LED Indicators
The CDMA CRC shelf Circuit packs have various Light Emitting Diode (LED)
indicators on their faceplates. These LEDs indicate either operational or alarm
conditions.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
4-75
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
4-76
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
5
Series II Cellular CDMA Adjunct to
Small Cells
Contents
■
Contents
5-1
■
CDMA Adjunct
5-3
Overview
5-3
High Level Interface for the CDMA Adjunct
5-3
Supported Technologies
5-4
Traffic Capacity
5-5
RF Coverage Area
5-5
Physical Aspects of CDMA Adjunct
5-5
CDMA Adjunct Components
5-5
Dimensions and Weight
5-8
Physical Appearance of the CDMA Adjunct
5-8
CDMA Adjunct Physical Positioning and External Equipment
5-8
CDMA Adjunct Frame LineUp
5-8
External Equipment Supported by the CDMA Adjunct
5-9
CDMA Adjunct Antenna Connections
5-9
CDMA Adjunct to Host Cell Inter-frame Hardware Interfaces
5-10
RF Distribution Paths
5-11
Transmit Paths
5-11
Radio Testing
5-16
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
5-1
Series II Cellular CDMA Adjunct to Small Cells
Radio Test Paths
5-16
CDMA Adjunct Testing Hardware Connections
5-17
Transmit Amplifiers
5-19
Input Voltage and Power
5-20
Environmental, Safety, and Handling Requirements
5-21
Environmental Requirements
5-21
External Controlled Environment
5-22
External Uncontrolled Environment
5-22
Internal Environment
5-22
Safety Requirements
5-22
UL and Cell Site A
Electromagnetic Compatibility
5-23
Electrostatic Discharge
5-23
Suggested DFI and DS-1 Configurations for use with the
CDMA Adjunct
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
5-2
401-660-100 Issue 11
5-23
August 2000
5-24
Series II Cellular CDMA Adjunct to Small Cells
CDMA Adjunct
Overview
High Level
Interface for the
CDMA Adjunct
The CDMA Adjunct is one of several members of the CDMA Minicell product
family. Its development was driven by the need to add a small amount of CDMA
capacity to existing Series IIm (Minicell) and Series IImm (Microcell) cell sites. In
particular, the CDMA Adjunct is a single frame that adds CDMA capability to
Series IIm (Minicell) and Series IImm (Microcell) cells. When used with a Series
IIm (Minicell) or Series IImm (Microcell) cell site, the CDMA Adjunct Frame adds:
■
Omnidirectional CDMA Service with 1 to 3 Carriers
■
Two-Sector CDMA Service with 1 Carrier per Sector
■
Three-Sector CDMA Service with 1 Carrier per Sector
Most of the external interfaces supported by the CDMA Adjunct are to the host
Series IIm (Minicell) or Series IImm (Microcell) cabinets, and there are no external
interfaces to the MSC. The Global Positioning System (GPS) antenna signal
interface and the power interface are the only ones that do not connect directly to
the host cell.
Figure 5-1 shows the following high level external interfaces supported by the
CDMA Adjunct Frame to the host (Series IIm (Minicell) or Series IImm (Microcell))
cell:
■
Global Positioning System (GPS) Interface
■
Transmit (Tx) and Receive (Rx) Interfaces to the host’s antennas
■
DC (only) prime Power Interface
■
CRTU Control and Test Interfaces
■
TDM Bus Interface
■
Reference Frequency and Timing Generator (RFTG) Interface
■
Alarm Interface
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
5-3
Series II Cellular CDMA Adjunct to Small Cells
GPS Interface
Tx & Rx Interface
Cellular
Power Interface
CRTUm Interface
CDMA
TDM Bus Interface
Adjunct
RFTG Interface
Alarm Interface
Note: All interfaces, except for power, connect to a SIIm or SIImm host cell.
Figure 5-1.
Supported
Technologies
CDMA Adjunct Frame External Interfaces
The CDMA Adjunct supports only CDMA technology at cellular frequencies as
defined in FCC Code of Federal regulations, Part 22, Subpart K. AMPS and
TDMA technologies are not supported by the CDMA Adjunct or by any member of
the CDMA Minicell product family. These products are focused on international
start-up systems with no embedded AMPS subscriber base, or on domestic and
international applications where CDMA is overlaid on an existing AMPS or TDMA
system. When the CDMA Adjunct is added to a Series IIm (Minicell) or Series
IImm (Microcell) host cell, the host cell supports only the AMPS technology; it can
not support the TDMA technology.
For reference, the U. S. domestic cellular transmit and receive frequency bands
are given in Table 5-1.
Table 5-1.
Frequency Band
A’
A”
B’
U. S. Domestic Cellular Transmit And Receive Frequency Bands
Transmit Frequency, MHz
870.030 to 879.990
890.010 to 891.480
869.040 to 870.000
880.020 to 889.980
891.510 to 893.970
Receive Frequency, MHz
825.030 to 834.990
845.010 to 846.480
824.040 to 825.000
835.020 to 844.980
846.510 to 848.970
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
5-4
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cellular CDMA Adjunct to Small Cells
Traffic Capacity
The CDMA Adjunct hardware does not limit its traffic capacity; instead, the air
interface is the limiting factor for traffic.
RF Coverage Area
The RF coverage area of a cell depends upon the RF rating of its transmit
amplifier and the internal losses in the transmit path from the amplifier’s output to
the antenna. The CDMA Adjunct with the Series IIm (Minicell) supports only 1
high-power, 13-watt carrier per directional sector. The CDMA Adjunct with the
Series IImm (Microcell) supports only 1 low-power carrier per directional sector.
Physical Aspects
of CDMA Adjunct
CDMA Adjunct Components
The CDMA Adjunct components are illustrated in Figure 5-2 and listed below:
■
Zero to Three Transmit Amplifiers
■
CDMA Radio Complex
■
DC Distribution Hardware
■
Environmental Conditioning Equipment
■
Synchronized Clock And Tone (CAT) boards
■
CRTUm
■
Cascade and Notch Filters, as needed
■
Miscellaneous RF Interconnection Hardware.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
5-5
Series II Cellular CDMA Adjunct to Small Cells
Tx
Amps
Power
CDMA
Radio
Complex
DC Distribution
Environmental Eqpt
CRTU & RF
Notch/Cascade
Figure 5-2.
CDMA Adjunct Frame
Figure 5-2 is not an exact representation and is not intended to show exactly
where within the CDMA Adjunct frame each piece of equipment is mounted.
The equipage is based on the following assumptions concerning the host cell:
■
TDMA radios are not installed when the CDMA Adjunct is installed.
■
The CDMA Radio Test Unit interface (CRTUi) is mounted in the host cell’s
Radio Control Complex (RCC) shelf.
■
The single-antenna Test Radio Switch Panel (TRSP) is replaced with the
multiple-antenna TRSP), suitable for supporting CDMA radio testing.
■
CAT boards remain in the host cell and SCT boards are installed in the
CDMA Adjunct.
■
Unused DFIs in the Small Cell’s Radio Control Complex and Channel
Service Unit slots in the frame are populated as needed for additional
CDMA traffic.
■
The RFG is replaced with the RFTG.
New cables are added to:
■
Bring the GPS input from the CDMA Adjunct to the RFTG
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
5-6
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cellular CDMA Adjunct to Small Cells
■
Deliver the 15 MHz reference frequency and 1 second clock pulse from the
RFTG to the CDMA Adjunct
■
Connect Transmit (Tx) and Receive (Rx) signals from the CDMA Radio Test
Unit module (CRTUm) in the CDMA Adjunct to the Radio Test Unit control
board in the host cell
■
Control the CRTUm.
When there are no transmit amplifiers in the CDMA Adjunct, it uses the transmit
power amplifier located in the host cell. When the CDMA Adjunct contains its own
amplifier, the allowable number of amplifiers varies from 1 to 3 based on the
number of sectors in the cell.
The CDMA Adjunct uses the facilities interfaces provided in the host cell to
communicate with the MSC. In other words, the CDMA Adjunct uses the DFI and
DS1 lines that are in the host cell or connected to the host cell. The CDMA
Adjunct and the host cell share a common TDM Bus (installed "red stripe up").
Therefore, the DFI and Cell Site Unit boards needed to support CDMA traffic do
not reside in the CDMA Adjunct frame. Because the host cell RCC already has
enough slots to house the number of DFI boards needed to support the additional
CDMA traffic, and because there is sufficient mounting space elsewhere in the
host for the Cell Site to support both the analog and digital traffic, no mounting
space for these items is required in the CDMA Adjunct.
Table 5-2.
CDMA Adjunct Line Connections
Series IIm
(Minicell)
3 DS1s
Series IImm
(Microcell)
11 DS1s
21 Voice Channels
63 Voice Channels
2 Data Links
(analog radios)
2 Data Links
(analog radios)
49 DS0s
199 DS0s
As shown in Table 5-2, the Series IIm (Minicell) supports up to 3 DS1s. Because
Series IIm (Minicell) has at most 21 voice channels and 2 data links (assuming
analog radios), there are up to 49 DS0s available for CDMA.
As shown in Table 5-2, Series IImm (Microcell) supports up to 11 DS1s. Because
Series IImm (Microcell) has at most 63 voice channels and 2 data links (assuming
analog radios), there are up to 199 DS0s available for CDMA.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
5-7
Series II Cellular CDMA Adjunct to Small Cells
Dimensions and Weight
The nominal dimensions of the CDMA Adjunct Frame are 75" H x 30" W x 30" D.
The nominal weight of the CDMA Adjunct Frame less than or equal to1000
pounds.
Physical Appearance of the CDMA Adjunct
The physical design and appearance of the CDMA Adjunct Frame is similar in
size, color, and markings to the following members of the CDMA Minicell product
family: MiniPrimary, MiniGrowth, and MiniAntenna Interface.
CDMA Adjunct
Physical
Positioning and
External
Equipment
CDMA Adjunct Frame LineUp
The CDMA Adjunct is a single frame. Therefore its allowable frame lineup is just 1
frame. This frame is added to a Series IIm (Minicell) or Series IImm (Microcell)
frame lineup that can consist of 1 to 3 frames.
Although the CDMA Adjunct is just a single frame, it supports several
configurations. The frame lineup shown in Figure 5-3 does not necessarily show
the exact placement of frames within a particular lineup; it is only intended to list
the number of frames required. Frame electrical design drawings give the relative
frame locations within each lineup.
SIIm/mm Adjunct Adjunct
Sectors
Series II m
or SII mm
CDMA
Adjunct
Frame
( 1, 2, or 3
Cabinets)
Figure 5-3.
Sectors Carriers/Sector
1 to 3
CDMA Adjunct Frame LineUp
The CDMA Adjunct to small cells is a single frame of equipment for all supported
configurations. Regardless of the number of sectors in the host cell, there is only 1
CDMA Adjunct Frame associated with each host cell. The CDMA Adjunct does
not include any auxiliary frames of equipment needed to power the CDMA Adjunct
or to provide battery backup; these must be supplied independently.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
5-8
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cellular CDMA Adjunct to Small Cells
The CDMA Adjunct Frame supports the following configurations:
■
1 Sector, 1 to 3 Carriers per Sector
■
2 Sectors, 1 Carrier per Sector
■
3 Sectors, 1 Carrier per Sector
The configurations relative to the Series IIm/mm sectors are shown in Table 5-3.
Table 5-3.
Frame Equipage Table
Series IIm/mm
Sectors
CDMA Adjunct
Sectors
CDMA Adjunct
Carriers per Sector
1 to 3
The current Series IIm (Minicell) and Series IImm (Microcell) cells do not support
omnidirectional cells with more than 2 transmit antennas, thus setting the
limitation above for an omnidirectional, 2 carrier CDMA Adjunct configuration. If a
Series IIm (Minicell) or Series IImm (Microcell) configuration with three transmit
antennas becomes available, then the CDMA Adjunct will be expected to support
it.
The CDMA Adjunct Frame is equipped with the same number of sectors as its
host cell. Because the CDMA Adjunct must use the antennas of the host cell, it
must have the same configuration as the host cell. Series IIm (Minicell) and Series
IImm (Microcell) are available in 1-sector, 2- sector, or 3-sector configurations,
where the 1-sector configuration may have 360° of coverage. Therefore, the
CDMA Adjunct is available in 1- sector, 2- sector, and 3-sector configurations. This
availability does not permit multiple directional CDMA sectors to be added to an
omnidirectional (1-sector) host cell.
External Equipment Supported by the CDMA Adjunct
The CDMA Adjunct Frame provides a termination for an external GPS antenna.
The GPS antenna cable terminates at an RFTG.
CDMA Adjunct Antenna Connections
The CDMA Adjunct connects to antennas that reside in the host Series IIm
(Minicell) or Series IImm (Microcell) cell. Each radio in the CDMA Adjunct requires
access to 1 Transmit (Tx) port and 2 Receive (Rx) ports in the host cell. The
CDMA Antenna Connections are shown in.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
5-9
Series II Cellular CDMA Adjunct to Small Cells
Tx0/Rx0
Tx1/Rx1
Duplex Filter
Panel
~ 7 dB
~ 7 dB
Tx0
GPS
Rx0
BCR
Rx1
Tx
Duplex Filter
Panel
Tx1
Rx0
SIIm/mm Tx
Ampl.
SIIm or SIImm
Figure 5-4.
CDMA Adjunct to
Host Cell Interframe Hardware
Interfaces
CDMA Tx Ampl.
Rx1
CDMA Adjunct
CDMA Adjunct Antenna Connections
The host cell does not supply power to the CDMA Adjunct. The CDMA Adjunct
accepts only DC as its power source; it does not operate directly from AC power.
The CDMA Adjunct does not have a direct connection to the DS-1 or E1 lines that
go to the MSC; it accesses these facilities through its TDM Bus connection to the
host cell.
Also, note that the Transmit (Tx) cables that connect the CDMA Adjunct to the
input of the amplifier in a Series IImm (Microcell) may be a smaller size than the
Transmit (Tx) cables that connect the CDMA Adjunct to the transmit input of a
duplex filter panel.
Figure 5-5 shows the physical interfaces to the CDMA Adjunct. The CDMA
Adjunct’s external interfaces are listed below:
■
Input cable from the GPS antenna
■
Output cable to connect the GPS signal to the host cell
■
3 RF transmit cables connected to the host cell (1 antenna per supported
sector)
■
External source of nominal 24 Volts DC power
■
3 RF Receive cables to support Diversity 0 (1 antenna per supported
sector)
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
5-10
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cellular CDMA Adjunct to Small Cells
■
TDM Bus (with "red stripe up") supplied from the host cell
■
Alarm cable connected to the host cell to report alarms
■
3 RF receive cables to support diversity 1 (1 antenna per supported sector)
■
CRTU control interface cable from the host cell
■
Transmit (Tx) cable connected to the Radio Test Unit Control Board in the
host cell
■
Receive (Rx) cable connected to the Radio Test Unit Control Board in the
host cell
■
1 second clock pulse cable from the RFTG in the host cell
■
15 MHz RFTG output to the host cell
GPS signal from ant.
GPS signal to host
1 to 3 Tx Signals
Power
TDM Bus
Alarms
Cellular
1 to 3 Rx0 Signals
CDMA
1 to 3 Rx1 Signals
CRTUm Control
Adjunct
Tx & Rx from CRTUm
to RCB
1 sec. clock pulse
Figure 5-5.
RF Distribution
Paths
15 MHz RFTGm Input
CDMA Adjunct Frame External Interfaces
Transmit Paths
Direct Connections to Filter Panels in the Host Cell
The transmit path for each sector served by a CDMA Adjunct is connected at a
high RF power level to Series IIm (Minicell) or to Series IImm (Microcell) through
duplex filter panels in the host cell. Figure 5-6 shows the complete CDMA Adjunct
transmit path with direct connections to duplex filter panels in the host cell.
■
1 CDMA radio for each CDMA carrier
■
1 Transmit Amplifier for each CDMA carrier
■
Interconnecting Cables
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
5-11
Series II Cellular CDMA Adjunct to Small Cells
■
Duplex filter panels to provide transmit access to the host cell’s Receive
Diversity 1 Antenna (Rx Div 1).
■
Notch and Cascade filter for the B-Band Transmit Filter Assembly.
■
Duplex Filter Panel is for the A-Band Receive Filter Assembly
Tx/Rx
CDMA Adjunct
Baseband
Tx
Combiner
Ampl.
Host Cell
Transmit
Filter
Dir. Cplr.
Receive
Filter
Radio
Note: SIIm & SIImm use identical duplex filter panel components, but different
mounting hardware; therefore, the adjunct transmit paths are electrically the
same, except for the gain setting of the transmit amplifier in the adjunct.
Figure 5-6.
CDMA Adjunct/Host Cell Transmit Path
The above applies to single sector cells with 1 or 2 CDMA carriers. Therefore,
when 2 CDMA carriers are used, 2 transmit amplifiers and 2 distinct filter panels
for the CDMA transmit inputs must be provided. All transmit filter panels, simplex
or duplex, are located within the host cell; thus, they are not required in the CDMA
Adjunct. However, they must be accounted for when determining the overall
CDMA transmit link budget.
The transmit amplifier has an output power rating sufficient for the CDMA downlink
RF coverage area to equal or exceed to that of the host cell’s downlink AMPS
coverage area. This allows the cell to serve the existing AMPS coverage area with
acceptable quality CDMA service. Therefore, the AMPS and CDMA coverage
areas are consistent.
The transmit path loss from the output of the transmit amplifier in the CDMA
Adjunct to the Transmit (Tx) output port of the host cell’s filter panel does not
exceed 3.5 dB. Note that this implies an allowable range for the loss of the RF
cable between the CDMA Adjunct and the Transmit (Tx) filter panel in the host
cell.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
5-12
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cellular CDMA Adjunct to Small Cells
If the transmit amplifier’s gain adjustment range is insufficient to work with both
Series IIm (Minicell) and Series IImm (Microcell) when the Baseband Combiner
Radio is adjusted for full power output, then the Baseband Combiner Radio output
may need to be attenuated for the Series IImm (Microcell) application. This
approach retains the full range of Baseband Combiner Radio output power
adjustment for power control.
Direct Connections to a Series IImm (Microcell) Host Cell
The transmit path for each sector served by a CDMA Adjunct, connected to Series
IImm (Microcell) through the low level input of the Series IImm (Microcell) transmit
amplifier, contains:
■
A CDMA radio for each CDMA carrier
■
Interconnecting cables.
NOTE:
This implementation cannot be used when a CDPD CDMA Adjunct is
present because the CDPD CDMA Adjunct must use the amplifier’s low
level input port. When it is used, the available output power of the transmit
amplifier must be partitioned between the analog and the CDMA channels.
Also, Series IIm (Minicell) cannot support this implementation because Series IIm
(Minicell) employs narrow band, high power, auto-tuned cavity combiners that
cannot pass the nominal 1.23 Megahertz CDMA signal.
Figure 5-7 shows the complete CDMA Adjunct Transmit Path With Direct
Connections to the Input of the Transmit (Tx) Amplifier in a Series IImm
(Microcell), including both the CDMA Adjunct and the Series IImm (Microcell) cell.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
5-13
Series II Cellular CDMA Adjunct to Small Cells
Path Using SIImm Amplifier
Part of SIImm Equipment
AMPS
Radio
21:1
Coupler
2:1
Transmit
Amplifier
Tx
Filter
To Tx
Antenna
50
Ohms
Tx
Baseband
Combiner
CDMA Adjunct
Radio
Figure 5-7.
Series IImm (Microcell)/CDMA Adjunct Transmit (Tx) Path
Using Series IImm (Microcell) Amplifier
Receive Paths
The receive path between the CDMA Adjunct and the host cell is the same for
both Series IIm (Minicell) and Series IImm (Microcell).
Figure 5-8 shows a complete receive path, including both the CDMA Adjunct and
the host. The receive path for each sector served by the CDMA Adjunct contains:
■
1 CDMA radio with 2 Diversity Receive (Rx) inputs for each CDMA carrier.
■
Interconnecting Cables and RF Combiners and Splitters.
■
An attenuator to provide signal strength to the CDMA Adjunct radio (BCR)
that is identical to that of the RCU.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
5-14
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cellular CDMA Adjunct to Small Cells
Cellular
Adjunct/Host Cell Receive Paths
Tx0/R
CDMA Adjunct
Host Cell
To RCUs
Transmit
Filter
Rx0
eband
biner
1:N
Attenuator
Preamp
Dir. Cplr.
Receive
Filter
Splitter
Duplex Filter Panel
io
To CDPD Adjunct
: Only 1 diversity path is shown.
Figure 5-8.
CDMA Adjunct/Host Cell Receive Paths
Table 5-4.
The following values apply to Figure 5-8
Series IIm
Series IIm
N (Splitter outputs in host)
Nominal Attenuation (in CDMA
Adjunct)
7 dB
7 dB
There are other RF splitters downstream of the 1:6 splitter in the host cell.
However, the exact value of these downstream splitters has no effect on the
receive path gain from the antenna in the host cell to the CDMA radio in the
CDMA Adjunct.
All receive filter panels, which include low noise preamplifiers, are located within
the host cell; thus, they are not required in the CDMA Adjunct. However, the gain
and noise figure of the receive panels must be accounted for in determining the
gain and noise figure to allocate to the equipment in the CDMA Adjunct. The host
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
5-15
Series II Cellular CDMA Adjunct to Small Cells
cell must contain duplex transmit/receive filter panels to support the CDMA
Adjunct. If the cell has only simplex receive and transmit panels, the panels must
be replaced with duplex panels.
Receive Path Gain and Noise Figure
Because the CDMA Adjunct contains the same CDMA radio as the CDMA
Minicell, it is designed for the same noise figure and for the same range of receive
signal input as the CDMA Minicell. However, the receive path of the CDMA
Adjunct differs from the receive path of the CDMA Minicell in one important
aspect. The CDMA Adjunct’s receive path consists of an attenuator in the CDMA
Adjunct itself, plus a 1:N splitter in the common part of the receive path in the host
cell. The components in the host cell are not changed because host cells are
already in the field. Therefore, all components necessary to make the receive path
gain of the interconnected CDMA Adjunct and host cell match that of the CDMA
Minicell were added to the CDMA Adjunct.
The major components in the receive path are the receive preamplifier, the
receive filter, miscellaneous RF dividers and directional couplers, the radio, and
the interconnecting cables.
The receive path gain measured from the antenna input of the duplex filter panel
in the host cell to one diversity input of the baseband combiner radio in the CDMA
Adjunct is 23 ± 3 dB.
The noise figure measured from the antenna input of the duplex filter panel in the
host cell to one diversity input of the baseband combiner radio is 5.5 dB or less at
midband.
The receive path gain and noise figure of the total path, consisting of some
components in the host cell and other components in the CDMA Adjunct, are
equal to the values that are acceptable for the CDMA Minicell.
Radio Testing
Radio Test Paths
The CDMA Adjunct maintenance strategy uses the units below:
■
CDMA Radio Test Unit module (CRTUm)
■
CDMA Radio Test Unit interface (CRTUi)
■
Test Radio Switch Panel (TRSP).
These units will be jointly referred to as CRTUm/CRTUi/TRSP. The TRSP is
illustrated in Figure 5-9. The CRTUm resides in the CDMA Adjunct. The CRTUi
resides in the small cell controller of the host cell. The TRSP also resides in the
Host Cell. The CRTUm in the CDMA Adjunct is controlled by the CRTUi in the
Host Cell over an RS-422 interface link.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
5-16
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cellular CDMA Adjunct to Small Cells
The CDMA Adjunct provides an RF Test Signal Distribution Circuit that consists of
2 parts:
1.
Test the components in every diversity receive path
2.
Test the components in every transmit path.
The circuit provides all the components needed to test any of the CDMA Adjunct
configurations.
The receive transmit test path in the CDMA Adjunct is designed so that no
software changes from Series II cell tests are necessary. The CDMA Adjunct is
tested using the Series II functional and diagnostic software. The test path losses
are within the range tolerable by this software so that no changes are necessary.
The CDMA Adjunct is capable of testing both simplex and duplex antenna
configurations. Duplex configurations require additional transmit/receive
separation circuitry for the TRSP. This capability is provided by a combiner/divider
on the duplex filter panel.
The CDMA Adjunct is capable of testing both diversity receive paths. Each
diversity receive path is tested, though not simultaneously. The TRSP is switched
between the diversity receive paths to connect each one to the test radio RF
ports.
The CDMA Adjunct does not provide for the testing of analog or TDMA radios.
When the CDMA Adjunct is used with a Series IIm (Minicell) or Series IImm
(Microcell) host cell, the host cell tests the analog radios, and no TDMA radios
may be equipped.
All unused RF ports in the test circuitry are terminated with 50 Ohm loads.
CDMA Adjunct Testing Hardware Connections
This section describes the hardware connections needed to execute functional
and diagnostic tests related to the CDMA radios in the CDMA Adjunct. All the
hardware associated with testing the CDMA radio, except for the radio itself and
the CRTUm, is located in the host cell. Figure 5-9 is a high level sketch of the Test
Radio Switch Panel (TRSP), located in the host cell, that is used to perform the
CDMA radio tests. This switch panel is the same one currently used in the CDMA
Minicell. AMPS test connections are made directly to the test ports, while CDMA
test connections require external RF combiners and splitters for some
configurations.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
5-17
Series II Cellular CDMA Adjunct to Small Cells
From 1 to 6 Tx
Reflected Ports
1:7
From 1 to3
Rx0Reflected
Ports*
1:7
From 1 to3 Rx1
Reflected Ports*
1:7
From 1 to 6 Tx
Incident Ports
From 1 to3 Rx0
Incident Ports*
From 1 to3 Rx1
Incident Ports*
R0 R1
To CRTU Rx via RCB
To CRTU Tx via RCB
* Small cells allow only 3
sets of diversity antennas,
so all 6 ports are never
used.
RTU Switch Panel
Figure 5-9.
Test Radio Switch Panel (TRSP)
For CDMA testing the Test Radio Switch Panel (TRSP) in the host cell is able to
switch each of the incident transmit input ports to the test radio; these ports
cannot be combined into a single signal. If all incident Transmit (Tx) signals from
independent sectors were combined, and they contained multiple CDMA signals
using the same RF carrier, the CRTU could not uniquely determine which carrier
to synchronize to.
This restriction precludes using the existing small cell Test Radio Switch Panel
(TRSP). Nevertheless, when there are multiple CDMA carriers, all at the same
frequency, serving the same sector (e.g. a multi-carrier omnidirectional
configuration), these carriers at the same RF frequency must be combined to
permit CDMA testing. This is accomplished with RF combiners external to the Test
Radio Switch Panel (TRSP) for CDMA inputs only. These combiners are not
required for sectorized cells with one CDMA carrier serving each sector. No
combiners are used on any test ports that are associated only with AMPS signals
so that existing AMPS test software and its pass/fail thresholds remain unchanged
when the CDMA Adjunct is installed.
The incident Transmit (Tx) test ports of all antennas serving CDMA traffic, that are
radiating into the same sector, at the same RF frequency are combined via an RF
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
5-18
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cellular CDMA Adjunct to Small Cells
combiner external to the Test Radio Switch Panel (TRSP). The common output of
that combiner is connected to only one Transmit (Tx) incident port of the Test
Radio Switch Panel (TRSP). So, even though CDMA may require 2 Transmit (Tx)
antennas to serve a common sector, only one Test Radio Switch Panel (TRSP)
port for Transmit (Tx) incident is used on the Test Radio Switch Panel (TRSP).
Thus, an omnidirectional host cell with a two-carrier CDMA Adjunct (where each
carrier is at the same RF frequency) needs 2 Transmit (Tx) incident port
connections to the Radio Test Unit (RTU).
Transmit
Amplifiers
The CDMA Adjunct previously supported only the Transmit Power Amplifier (TPA).
In CDMA release 6.0, the TPA for CDMA Minicells has been replaced with the
Enhanced TPA. The Enhanced TPA improves CDMA Minicell Call Processing and
Operations, Administration & Maintenance and Performance. Its installation,
however, does not alter the functionality of the CDMA Cellular Minicell.
The enhanced High-power TPA (HTPA) is identical in function to its predecessor
except that it is more resistant to thermal stress and therefore more
environmentally adaptable. The power constant for an HTPA amplifier is
0.0001834, which increases the maximum power to 9 Watts. This change affects
the ceqcom2 form, in which the maximum power allowed in the form is also 9
Watts. Additionally, the following RC/V error message is generated for out of range
values:
"The Max Pwr of a BBA assigned to an HTPA LAC must be 0.5 - 9.0 watts."
The Enhanced TPA can be equipped on one Physical Antenna Face (PAF) or all
PAFs.
The alarm signals for the transmit power amplifier are software compatible with
those of the Series II Cell Site’s Modular Linear Amplifier Circuits (MLACs).
The CDMA Adjunct obtains its receive signal inputs from the host cell’s Receive
(Rx) antennas and the associated RF distribution from the antenna. The Series
IIm (Minicell) and Series IImm (Microcell) cells were designed to have sufficient
receive ports to do this. Figure 5-10 is a sketch of the receive path connections
between the host cell and the CDMA Adjunct. Neither Figure 5-10 or Figure 5-11
are intended to show complete interconnection details.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
5-19
Series II Cellular CDMA Adjunct to Small Cells
Tx2
Tx0/Rx0 Tx1/Rx1
Note: Only 1 sector is shown, other
sectors are similar.
Rx0
Duplex Filter
Panel 0
Rx1
Baseband
Combiner
Radio
1:6
Divider
Rx0
RCU
Rx1
Figure 5-10. CDMA Adjunct Receiver Paths
The CDMA Adjunct is capable of sharing the host cell’s duplexed Transmit (Tx)
antennas on a per-sector basis, and it is also capable of using a simplex Transmit
(Tx) antenna in the host cell on a per-sector basis. Because the CDMA Adjunct
contains no filters, except for cascade and notch filters, the CDMA Adjunct can not
support its own antennas; it must use the antennas of the host cell. Figure 5-11 is
a sketch of this implementation of the transmit path interconnection between the
Series IIm (Minicell) host cell and the CDMA Adjunct.
Input Voltage and
Power
The CDMA Adjunct is powered independently of the host cell and can only be
powered from a +24 Volt DC (+24 VDC) source.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
5-20
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cellular CDMA Adjunct to Small Cells
Rx0
Tx0
Rx1
Note: Only 1 sector is shown, other sectors
are similar.
Small Cell
Tx Amp.
Baseband
Combiner
Radio
N:1
Dir. Cplr.
for CDPD
CDMA Tx
M:1
RCU
SIImm
CDMA Adjunct [no antennas]
Figure 5-11. CDMA Transmit Path (Smm Only)
Environmental,
Safety, and
Handling
Requirements
Environmental requirements: The conditions under which the equipment must
operate. Safety requirements: How the equipment affects the well-being of
personnel who operate the equipment or who are in its vicinity
Handling requirements: How the equipment survives the rigors of shipping and
storage. The specifications that follow call for the CDMA Adjunct to meet the same
environmental, safety, and handling requirements as the host cell to which it is
connected.
Environmental Requirements
The 3 basic environments in which the equipment can operate are listed below.
Because the environment is defined from the viewpoint of the equipment, an
external environment, as seen by the equipment, does not necessarily imply that
the equipment is outdoors.
External controlled environment: An environment in which the equipment is
located inside a building that has its own heating and air conditioning systems to
control the temperature and humidity to which the equipment is subjected.
External uncontrolled environment: An environment in which the equipment is
located outdoors with no heating or cooling equipment provided externally.
Internal environment: The environment inside the equipment; does not
necessarily imply that equipment is indoors.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
5-21
Series II Cellular CDMA Adjunct to Small Cells
External Controlled Environment
The CDMA Adjunct designated for use in an external controlled environment
(commonly assumed to be an "indoor" environment) meets its performance
requirements under the environmental conditions shown in Table 5-5.
Table 5-5.
Controlled
Environmental Range
CDMA Adjunct External Controlled Environment Specifications
Temperature, deg. C
Relative Humidity,
Non-Condensing
Altitude, Feet
Above Sea Level
Basic Range
+4.5 deg. C to +38 deg. C
20% to 55%
-200 ft. to +10,000 ft.
Short Term Range
+ 2 deg. C to +49deg. C
0% to 80%
-200 ft. to +10,000 ft.
The basic environmental conditions apply for steady state operation. The short
term environmental conditions apply for not more than 72 consecutive hours, and
not more than 15 days per year.
External Uncontrolled Environment
CDMA Adjunct designated for use in an external uncontrolled environment
(commonly assumed to be an "outdoor" environment) meets its performance
requirements under the environmental conditions shown in Table 5-6.
Table 5-6.
CDMA Adjunct External Uncontrolled Environment
Specifications
Controlled
Environmental Range
Temperature, deg. C
Relative Humidity,
Non-Condensing
Altitude, Feet
Above Sea Level
Basic Range
-40 deg. C to +46 deg. C
5% to 95%
-200 ft. to +10,000 ft.
The basic environmental conditions apply for steady state operation.
Internal Environment
The environmental control system within the CDMA Adjunct is designed such that
all components operate within a safe temperature and humidity range and satisfy
all performance and reliability requirements when the frame is subjected to the
external environmental conditions given in Table 5-6.
Safety Requirements
Lightning Protection and Grounding
A ring ground arrangement as described in Customer Information Bulletin (CIB)
148 is installed and all the CDMA Adjunct frames are connected to it.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
5-22
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cellular CDMA Adjunct to Small Cells
All equipment that ultimately interfaces with an RF antenna will not be damaged or
degraded by 10 strikes of an input surge waveform of 8 x 20 microseconds
duration, 20 kilovolts open circuit voltage, and 10 kilo-amperes maximum current
capacity applied at the frame RF antenna interface connector. The equipment has
the same level of protection typically used for equipment located outdoors with
direct connections to towers and long facility feeders (see ANSI-C62.41).
All equipment that ultimately interfaces with the input DC power feeders and the
user alarm interface is protected from lightning strike, except that 500 volt/500
amperes surge values apply.
All equipment that ultimately interfaces with the facilities input and the RS-422
amplifier alarm interface, when connected to transmit amplifiers in either the
Linear Amplifier or External Transmit Amplifier Frames, is also protected from
lightning strikes.
UL and Cell Site A
The CDMA Adjunct complies with UL 1950, 3rd edition, and with Cell Site A-C22.2
approval guidelines. The CDMA Adjunct as a whole is UL listed and its
components is UL recognized.
Electromagnetic Compatibility
FCC regulations in "Code of Federal Regulations, Telecommunications", Part 15,
Subpart C, and Part 22, Subpart K, published by the Office of the Federal
Register, National Archives and Records Administration, 1992, is satisfied by each
CDMA Minicell product; and the CDMA Adjunct complies with Part 15, Subpart C
as a Class B device. Compliance with part 15 as a Class B device means that the
product could be installed in a residential environment.
The CDMA Adjunct has interfaces to other frames and circuits in an actual
installation. FCC testing was done with terminations that best represent the actual
operating environment that the given product will experience. Because the CDMA
Adjunct is part of a system that also includes Series IIm (Minicell) or Series IImm
(Microcell) cabinets, the effects of that system on the CDMA Adjunct’s
performance was accounted for in the product test.
Electromagnetic emission and susceptibility requirements in IS-56B is satisfied by
the CDMA Adjunct.
Electrostatic Discharge
The CDMA Adjunct is designed to have a reliability of no more than 5900 failures
in 109 hours. Because the CDMA Adjunct is similar to a MiniPrimary Frame
without a Radio Control Complex, its reliability is that of the frame, after
subtracting the failure rate allocation for filters and for the Radio Control Complex.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
5-23
Series II Cellular CDMA Adjunct to Small Cells
Suggested DFI and
DS-1
Configurations for
use with the
CDMA Adjunct
The following table shows some possible assignment of DFIs and DS1s that
minimize the effects of a single DFI or DS1 failure on the combined traffic handling
capacity of the host cell plus the CDMA Adjunct. Other assignments may
accomplish the same end. There may be other possible assignments.
Table 5-7.
Facilities
Configurations
1 DFI, 1 DS1
1 DFI, 2 DS1
2 DFI, 2 DS1
2 DFI, 4 DS1
DFI-1
DS1-A
3 DFI, 3 DS1
DFI-2
DS1-B
DS1-A
DFI-3
DS1-B
DS1-A
AMPS
α
AMPS
β
AMPS
γ
CDMA
α
CDMA
β
CDMA
γ
DL-0
Loss of
1 DFI or
1 DS1 causes total
loss of service
DL-1
AMPS
α
CDMA
α
AMPS
β
CDMA
β
CDMA
γ
AMPS
γ
DL-0
Loss of
1 DFI causes total
loss of service.
Loss of
1 DS1 maintains at least
1 technology on each sector.
DL-1
AMPS
α
CDMA
α
AMPS
β
CDMA
β
CDMA
γ
AMPS
γ
DL-0
α
AMPS
β
DL-1
CDMA
γ
CDMA
α
AMPS
γ
DL-0
Loss of
1 DFI or
1 DS1 maintains at least
1 technology on each sector.
CDMA
β
Loss of
1 DFI or
1 DS1 maintains at least
1 technology on each sector.
DL-1
AMPS
α
AMPS
β
AMPS
γ
CDMA
γ
CDMA
α
CDMA
β
AMPS
β
DL-0
AMPS
CDMA
α
β
DL-1
AMPS
CDMA
α
γ
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
5-24
401-660-100 Issue 11
Comments
DS1-B
DL-0, DL-1
AMPS
3 DFI, 3 DS1
Suggested DFI and DS-1 Configurations for use with CDMA Adjunct
August 2000
Loss of
1 DFI or
1 DS1 maintains at least
1 technology on each sector.
CDMA
γ
Loss of 1 DFI or
1 DS1 maintains at least
1 technology on each sector.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
5-25
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
5-26
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
6
Series II Cellular Digital Packet Data
(CDPD)
Contents
■
Contents
6-1
■
CDPD Overview
6-3
Interfaces
6-3
Transmit (Tx)
6-4
Diversity Receive (Rx)
6-4
Channel Assignment, Hopping Versus
Dedicated Channel
6-4
Sectorized Setup Versus Omni
6-4
Linear Amplifier Circuits (LACs), per Sector,
which CDPD Will Sniff
6-4
LACs, per Sector, which CDPD Will Transmit
6-5
Channels per Sector
6-5
T1 Multiplexer
6-6
Typical Configurations
6-6
Hardware
6-8
Combiner Network Assembly KS21604, L23
6-9
4:1 Combiner KS21604, L22
6-9
LAC Splitter Network KS21604, L24
6-9
Detailed Diagrams of Supported Configurations
6-10
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
6-1
Series II Cellular Digital Packet Data (CDPD)
Grounding and Lightning Protection
6-23
Related Documentation
6-23
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
6-2
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cellular Digital Packet Data (CDPD)
CDPD Overview
CDPD interfaces with the Series II Cell Site to provide wireless data services
through a commercial public mobile data communications network. CDPD
provides this data communication in a manner that routes each data packet
individually, based on the destination address carried in the packet and the
knowledge of current network topology. CDPD also allows for multiple destination
data (multicasting) packets on a single channel.
External packet data equipment is able to access the Cell Site Radio Frequency
(RF) transmission and reception paths when the CDPD feature is enabled by a
"Feature Activation File" (FAF) entry. Functional and diagnostic tests will not work
properly unless the feature is enabled and the appropriate new translations are
entered for the cell.
New Cell Site hardware (6-port LAF combiner) interfaces the packet data
equipment to the Linear Amplifier Circuit (LAC) for amplification and transmission
of the packet data signal. The CDPD equipment samples the Cell Site radio
transmitter signals to detect any packet data that may be transmitted over the
normal cellular RF frequencies. The CDPD detector monitors Cell Site radio
channel activity to prevent packet data radios from simultaneously using the same
channel as a voice Cell Site radio.
Interfaces
Series II systems configured with CDPD all share some basic connections see
Figure 6-1 However, Since Series II systems have many variations, the
corresponding CDPD system has variations as well. The parameters that may be
different for each system and contribute to differing Series II/CDPD hardware
configurations are described in the following paragraphs.
TX
RX0
Series
SII II
RX1 (optional)
SNIFF (optional)
DS1
To T1 facilities
CDPD
CDPD
Alarms (optional)
T1 Mux
T1 MUX
(Add/Drop)
(ADD/
DS0
Interface Panel
Figure 6-1.
Series II CDPD Connections
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
6-3
Series II Cellular Digital Packet Data (CDPD)
Transmit (Tx)
All Series II CDPD systems are configured such that the CDPD transmit signal is
amplified by the Series II Linear Amplifier Circuit (LAC).
Diversity Receive (Rx)
The standard Series II/CDPD system uses receive diversity (connections from two
independent receive paths) for improved performance. If only a signal receive
antenna is available, the second CDPD receive input must be properly terminated.
Channel Assignment, Hopping Versus Dedicated Channel
CDPD may be implemented on Series II either with sniffing and hopping or on a
fixed channel. The sniffing and hopping configuration allows CDPD to use
channels assigned to the Cell Site when they are idle, thereby providing much
more CDPD capacity during off-peak Cell Site radio usage. This configuration
requires a sniff connection.
A dedicated channel configuration always provides CDPD capacity, even if all Cell
Site channels are in use, as may be the case during peak usage hours. This
configuration does not require a sniff connection.
A combination of the two may be used if more than one CDPD radio is in service.
Sectorized Setup Versus Omni
Sectorized setup more preferable than omni, because it requires no additional
hardware to support CDPD sniffing.
Omni setup is supported, but it requires combining the omni setup transmission
path with each of the other sector transmission paths. This is necessary for two
reasons:
1.
Setup radio diagnostics use idle voice channels to conduct tests; when the
omni path is combined and made available to the CDPD sniffer, CDPD will
not interfere with the setup radio diagnostics
2.
Sniffer diagnostics require the setup channel for measurement purposes. A
4:1 combiner is used to support these diagnostics. This combiner may also
be used to support sniffing on multiple Linear Amplifier Circuits (LACs) (see
next paragraph).
Linear Amplifier Circuits (LACs), per Sector, which CDPD Will Sniff
The most basic CDPD system that supports hopping will sniff only one Linear
Amplifier Circuit (LAC) on each sector. This configuration requires one direct
connection on each sector between the Series II sniff port and the CDPD sniff port
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
6-4
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cellular Digital Packet Data (CDPD)
on the Mobile Data Base Station (MDBS) Interface Panel (except for cells with
omni setup, which require a combiner in the path).
Series II systems with more than one LAC per sector will support sniff combining
on up to four LACs (three if omni setup is used), thereby providing a larger
selection of channels to the CDPD and increased CDPD capacity. This
configuration requires a combiner (a 4:1 is provided) between the Series II sniff
ports and CDPD sniff port. However, combining sniff ports is beneficial only if
there is ample excess power (headroom) on the LAC selected as the CDPD
transmit amplifier. This LAC must have enough headroom available to amplify all
the CDPD radios connected to the LAC in addition to the Cell Site radios already
on the LAC. For example, if all Cell Site channels are in use on LAC 1 and CDPD
selects a channel typically used by the Cell Site on LAC 2, then the first LAC must
have enough power to supply all of its Cell Site radio channels plus one more for
CDPD.
For Series II systems with more than one LAC per sector and no headroom on
LACs, CDPD should be configured to sniff on one LAC only. This LAC must be the
same one that amplifies the setup channel. The setup channel must be available
to be measured by CDPD sniffer diagnostics.
LACs, per Sector, which CDPD Will Transmit
All CDPD system configurations transmit packet data through only one Linear
Amplifier Circuit (LAC) on each sector. If CDPD is sniffing and hopping among
channels that are normally transmitted on this LAC, total power required from this
LAC is unchanged from normal Cell Site radio operation.
If CDPD is sniffing and hopping among channels that are not normally transmitted
on this LAC, CDPD may be transmitted through either of the LACs, so long as
sufficient power is available from the LAC to handle the additional CDPD radios.
Channels per Sector
The must basic CDPD system will have one CDPD radio per sector. Series II will
support up to four CDPD radios per sector via the addition of 4:1 combiners and
dividers in the transmit, receive, and sniff paths. More channels provide more
capacity as long as a sufficient number of radio channels are idle and available to
CDPD.
Alarm Support
The CDPD equipment provides two normally open alarm contacts. These may be
optionally connected to the Cell Site Alarm Interface Module.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
6-5
Series II Cellular Digital Packet Data (CDPD)
T1 Multiplexer
The standard Series II CDPD system multiplexes the CDPD DS0 connection (V.35
interface) onto one of the DS1 (Digital Signal - Level 1) trunks supporting Series II
via a Lucent Technologies Paradyne T1 multiplexer (Model 3160). Customers may
optionally provide their own T1 multiplexer equipment. One DS0 line running at 56
kbps will support one MDBS transceiver bank with up to 6 CDPD channels. the
combined data rate from 6 CDPD channels will typically be less than 56 kbps. In
cases where all channels are in use and transmitting at near maximum capacity,
the MDBS will throttle back throughput to fit in 56 kbps.
When redundancy is supported (CDPD software Release 1.0 and beyond), two or
three DS0 lines may be used to support one MDBS transceiver bank with up to 6
CDPD channels.
Typical
Configurations
Some typical Series II/ CDPD configurations are shown in the figures contained in
this section. In each case, only one sector is shown; all other sectors are identical.
Original SII Equipment
AIF
LAF
RCF
4:1
9:1
Combiner
Network
Assembly
SNIFF
TX
RX0
RX1
4:1
TX Filter
LAC
Test
Coupler
TX
4:1
(opt.)
RCU
LAC
preamp
TX
9:1
from omni setup
or other LACS
on same sector
RX0
6:1
RX Filter
Test
Coupler
RX1
4:1
9:1
6:1
MDBS
Pads
MODEM
XCVR TX
RX0
RX1
SNIFF
Test
Coupler
Interface Panel
CDPD Equipment
Figure 6-2.
One CDPD Channel per Sector
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
6-6
RX Filter
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cellular Digital Packet Data (CDPD)
Original SII Equipment
4:1
9:1
Combiner
Network
Assembly
SNIFF
4:1
(opt.)
RCU
AIF
LAF
RCF
TX
RX0
RX1
4:1
LAC
preamp
TX
TX Filter
LAC
Test
Coupler
TX
from omni setup
or other LACS
on same sector
9:1
RX0
6:1
RX Filter
Test
Coupler
RX1
4:1
MDBS
9:1
Pad (opt.)
6:1
RX Filter
Test
Coupler
Interface Panel
Pad
4:1 Combiner/Dividers
MODEM
XCVR TX
RX0
RX1
SNIFF
MODEM
XCVR TX
RX0
RX1
SNIFF
CDPD Equipment
Figure 6-3.
Two to Four CDPD Channels per Sector
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
6-7
Series II Cellular Digital Packet Data (CDPD)
Voice Sector
4:1
Combiner
Network
Assembly
9:1
SNIFF
Voice
RCU
AIF
LAF
RCF
4:1
TX Filter
LAC
Test
Coupler
TX
4:1
(opt.)
TX
RX0
RX1
LAC
preamp
TX
from other LACS
on same sector
9:1
RX0
6:1
RX Filter
Test
Coupler
RX1
4:1
9:1
6:1
Omni Setup Sector
Setup
RCU
Test
Coupler
to sniff combiners on up to 2 more sectors
AIF
LAF
TX
RX0
RX1
RX Filter
4:1
Omni LAC
Splitter
Network
9:1
LAC
preamp
TX
TX Filter
LAC
Test
Coupler
RX0
4:1
9:1
6:1
RX Filter
Test
Coupler
RX1
4:1
9:1
6:1
Figure 6-4.
Hardware
Test
Coupler
CDPD with Omni Setup
The hardware required to interface with external packet data equipment is
available as either a kit purchased and installed when the packet data feature is
enabled for an existing cell or as part of a Series II configuration ordered directly
from the factory (see Figure 6-5). The new hardware kits support Cell Site
configurations that employ the Linear Amplifier Circuit (LAC) in the forward
transmit path, up to the following maximum configurations:
■
Directional setup cells with up to six directional voice sectors
■
Omnidirectional setup cells with up to three directional voice sectors
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
6-8
RX Filter
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cellular Digital Packet Data (CDPD)
■
Configurations with up to four LACs per sector.
Dual server groups are not supported by CDPD. When CDPD is installed in a
dual-server group cell, CDPD should be assigned to channels in the outer server
group. These same frequencies will service CDPD in the inner server group area.
New components used in the CDPD hardware interface are described below.
Combiner Network Assembly KS21604, L23
The Combiner Network Assembly in the Linear Amplifier Frame (LAF) replaces
the existing 3:1 combiner in the Linear Amplifier Circuit (LAC) input path. It is
required for each LAC whose frequencies are available for packet data calls.
The Combiner Network Assembly and its connections to the CDPD equipment
include sniff, transmit, and modem-transceiver receive functions.
Up to three Radio Frequency (RF) signals from the radios in the Radio Channel
Frames (RCFs) may be applied to input ports 1 through 3 of the Combiner
Network Assembly; typically, the three inputs come from the RCF. In the past, a
fourth input was used for simulcast setup. However, simulcast setup is no longer
supported. The output of RF sensing port 5 is applied to sniffer circuitry in the
CDPD equipment to allow detection of active transmitting radios in the RCFs.
When an idle frequency is found, the packet data radio may transmit its RF signal
through port 6 of the Combiner Network Assembly. The loss from input ports 1
through 4 to output port 7 is the same as the nominal loss of the original 3:1
combiner (middle of the adjustment range). Therefore, output port 7 of the
Combiner Network Assembly will provide the same signal level at the LAC
preamplifier input for packet data radios, Radio Channel Units (RCUs), Digital
Radio Units (DRUs) or Enhanced Digital Radio Units (EDRUs) as does the
original LAC combiner it replaces (assuming the same level of inputs for both
cases). Minor adjustment of LAC output power level (using the LAC preamplifier
trim pot) may be required when packet data equipment is installed.
4:1 Combiner KS21604, L22
This combiner is used to support sniffing on up to four Linear Amplifier Circuits
(LACs) on the same sector. The sense port of each Combiner Network Assembly
is connected to the 4:1 input port (unused ports must be terminated) and the 4:1
output port is connected to the MDBS sniff input port.
LAC Splitter Network KS21604, L24
This splitter network is only used in configurations with omni setup and directional
voice/CDPD sectors. This custom splitter replaces the 3:1 combiner in the omni
LAC path and provides the same nominal level at the corresponding output. The
remaining three output ports provide the proper levels to interface with the 4:1
sniff combiner.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
6-9
Series II Cellular Digital Packet Data (CDPD)
From
RCF(s)
Via 9:1
Combiners
1 INPUT
2 INPUT
COMBINER
NETWORK
ASSEMBLY
KS21604L23A
OUTPUT
3 INPUT
4 INPUT
CDPD
5 SNIFF
TO LAC
PREAMP
CDPD
TX
From Simulcast
Setup (if used)
PACKET DATA
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
TX
MDBS
INTFC
PANEL
From
AIF Receive
Distribution
Via 1:6
Splitters
RX0
RX1
Figure 6-5.
Detailed Diagrams
of Supported
Configurations
SNIFF
Functional Diagram
Table 6-1 lists the Supported Configurations. A detailed diagram is shown for each
of the configurations listed in the table.
Table 6-1.
CDPD Modem Transceiver Configuration per Sector
One Modem Transceiver per Sector
Directional Setup
Omnidirectional Setup
One LAC per sector
One LAC per sector
Multiple LACs per sectorSniffing on one LAC
Multiple LACs per sectorSniffing on one LAC
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
6-10
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cellular Digital Packet Data (CDPD)
Table 6-1.
CDPD Modem Transceiver Configuration per Sector (Contd)
One Modem Transceiver per Sector
Multiple LACs per sectorSniffing on multiple LACs
Multiple LACs per sectorSniffing on multiple LACs
Multiple Modem Transceivers per Sector
One LAC per sector
One LAC per sector
Multiple LACs per sectorSniffing on one LAC
Multiple LACs per sectorSniffing on one LAC
Multiple LACs per sectorSniffing on multiple LACs
Multiple LACs per sectorSniffing on multiple LACs
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
6-11
Series II Cellular Digital Packet Data (CDPD)
VOICE SECTOR
LAC
FROM
RCF
RANSMIT
INTERFACE PANEL
1 COMBINER
2 NETWORK
ASSEMBLY 7
4 SNIFF TX
TX
TO LAC
PREAMP
FROM AIF
RECEIVE
DIST. VIA
1:6 DIVIDERS
FROM
SIMULCAST
SETUP
(IF USED)
RX0
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
RX1
SNIFF
Figure 6-6.
One Modem Transceiver Per Sector, One LAC per Sector Directional Setup
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
6-12
MDBS
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cellular Digital Packet Data (CDPD)
VOICE SECTOR
INTERFACE PANEL
LAC
1 COMBINER
2 NETWORK
ASSEMBLY 7
4 SNIFF TX
FROM
RCF
RANSMIT
TX
TO LAC
PREAMP
FROM AIF
RECEIVE
DIST. VIA
1:6 DIVIDERS
FROM
SIMULCAST
SETUP
(IF USED)
MDBS
RX0
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
RX1
SNIFF
LAC
FROM
RCF
RANSMIT
EXISTING
3:1 COMBINER
Figure 6-7.
TO LAC
PREAMP
One Modem Transceiver per Sector, Multiple LACs per Sector Sniffing on One LAC - Directional Setup
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
6-13
Series II Cellular Digital Packet Data (CDPD)
VOICE SECTOR
INTERFACE PANEL
LAC
1 COMBINER
2 NETWORK
ASSEMBLY 7
4 SNIFF TX
FROM
RCF
RANSMIT
TX
TO LAC
PREAMP
FROM AIF
RECEIVE
DIST. VIA
1:6 DIVIDERS
FROM
SIMULCAST
SETUP
(IF USED)
MDBS
RX0
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
RX1
SNIFF
LAC
FROM
RCF
RANSMIT
1 COMBINER
2 NETWORK
ASSEMBLY 7
4 SNIFF TX
TO LAC
PREAMP
SNIFF
COMBINER
4:1
Figure 6-8.
One Modem Transceiver per Sector, Multiple LACs per Sector Sniffing on Multiple LACs - Directional Setup
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
6-14
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cellular Digital Packet Data (CDPD)
VOICE SECTOR
LAC
COMBINER
NETWORK
ASSEMBLY
FROM
RCF
RANSMIT
INTERFACE PANEL
SNIFF
TX
TO LAC
PREAMP
TX
RX0
FROM AIF
RECEIVE
DIST. VIA
1:6 DIVIDERS
FROM
SIMULCAST
SETUP
(IF USED)
MDBS
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
RX1
SNIFF
SNIFF
COMBINER
4:1
OMNI SETUP SECTOR
LAC
FROM
RCF
TRANSMIT
OMNI LAC
SPLITTER
NETWORK
TO SNIFF COMBINERS ON
UP TO 2 MORE SECTORS
TO LAC
PREAMP
Figure 6-9.
One Modem Transceiver per Sector, One LAC per Sector Omnidirectional Setup
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
6-15
Series II Cellular Digital Packet Data (CDPD)
VOICE SECTOR
INTERFACE PANEL
LAC
COMBINER
NETWORK
ASSEMBLY
FROM
RCF
RANSMIT
SNIFF
TX
TO LAC
PREAMP
TX
FROM AIF
RECEIVE
DIST. VIA
1:6 DIVIDERS
FROM
SIMULCAST
SETUP
(IF USED)
MDBS
RX0
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
RX1
SNIFF
LAC
FROM
RCF
RANSMIT
EXISTING
3:1 COMBINER
TO LAC
PREAMP
SNIFF
COMBINER
4:1
OMNI SETUP SECTOR
LAC
FROM
RCF
TRANSMIT
OMNI LAC
SPLITTER
NETWORK
TO SNIFF COMBINERS ON
UP TO 2 MORE SECTORS
TO LAC
PREAMP
Figure 6-10. One Modem Transceiver per Sector, Multiple LACs per Sector Sniffing on One LAC - Omnidirectional Setup
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
6-16
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cellular Digital Packet Data (CDPD)
VOICE SECTOR
INTERFACE PANEL
LAC
COMBINER
NETWORK
ASSEMBLY
FROM
RCF
RANSMIT
SNIFF
TX
TO LAC
PREAMP
TX
RX0
FROM AIF
RECEIVE
DIST. VIA
1:6 DIVIDERS
FROM
SIMULCAST
SETUP
(IF USED)
MDBS
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
RX1
SNIFF
LAC
FROM
RCF
RANSMIT
COMBINER
NETWORK
ASSEMBLY
SNIFF
TO LAC
PREAMP
TX
SNIFF
COMBINER
4:1
OMNI SETUP SECTOR
LAC
FROM
RCF
TRANSMIT
OMNI LAC
SPLITTER
NETWORK
TO SNIFF COMBINERS ON
UP TO 2 MORE SECTORS
TO LAC
PREAMP
Figure 6-11. One Modem Transceiver per Sector, Multiple LACs per Sector Sniffing on Multiple LACs - Omnidirectional Setup
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
6-17
Series II Cellular Digital Packet Data (CDPD)
VOICE SECTOR
INTERFACE PANEL
LAC
FROM
RCF
RANSMIT
COMBINER
NETWORK
ASSEMBLY
SNIFF
1:4
TO LAC
PREAMP
TX
1:4
FROM AIF
RECEIVE
DIST. VIA
1:6 DIVIDERS
FROM
SIMULCAST
SETUP
(IF USED)
MDBS
TX
RX0
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
RX1
1:4
SNIFF
TX
RX0
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
RX1
1:4
SNIFF
Figure 6-12. Multiple Modem Transceiver per Sector, One LAC per Sector Directional Setup
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
6-18
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cellular Digital Packet Data (CDPD)
VOICE SECTOR
INTERFACE PANEL
LAC
FROM
RCF
RANSMIT
COMBINER
NETWORK
ASSEMBLY
SNIFF
1:4
TO LAC
PREAMP
TX
1:4
FROM AIF
RECEIVE
DIST. VIA
1:6 DIVIDERS
FROM
SIMULCAST
SETUP
(IF USED)
MDBS
TX
RX0
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
RX1
1:4
SNIFF
LAC
FROM
RCF
RANSMIT
TX
EXISTING
3:1 COMBINER
TO LAC
PREAMP
RX0
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
RX1
1:4
SNIFF
Figure 6-13. Multiple Modem Transceiver per Sector, Multiple LACs per
Sector - Sniffing on One LAC - Directional Setup
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
6-19
Series II Cellular Digital Packet Data (CDPD)
VOICE SECTOR
INTERFACE PANEL
LAC
FROM
RCF
RANSMIT
COMBINER
NETWORK
ASSEMBLY
SNIFF
1:4
TO LAC
PREAMP
TX
1:4
FROM AIF
RECEIVE
DIST. VIA
1:6 DIVIDERS
FROM
SIMULCAST
SETUP
(IF USED)
MDBS
TX
RX0
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
RX1
1:4
SNIFF
LAC
FROM
RCF
RANSMIT
COMBINER
NETWORK
ASSEMBLY
SNIFF
TX
TO LAC
PREAMP
TX
RX0
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
SNIFF
COMBINER
4:1
RX1
1:4
SNIFF
Figure 6-14. Multiple Modem Transceiver per Sector, Multiple LACs per
Sector - Sniffing on Multiple LACs - Directional Setup
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
6-20
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cellular Digital Packet Data (CDPD)
VOICE SECTOR
INTERFACE PANEL
LAC
COMBINER
NETWORK
ASSEMBLY
FROM
RCF
RANSMIT
SNIFF
1:4
TO LAC
PREAMP
TX
1:4
FROM AIF
RECEIVE
DIST. VIA
1:6 DIVIDERS
FROM
SIMULCAST
SETUP
(IF USED)
MDBS
TX
RX0
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
RX1
1:4
SNIFF
TX
RX0
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
SNIFF
COMBINER
4:1
RX1
1:4
SNIFF
OMNI SETUP SECTOR
LAC
FROM
RCF
TRANSMIT
OMNI LAC
SPLITTER
NETWORK
TO SNIFF COMBINERS ON
UP TO 2 MORE SECTORS
TO LAC
PREAMP
Figure 6-15. Multiple Modem Transceiver per Sector, One LAC per Sector Omnidirectional Setup
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
6-21
Series II Cellular Digital Packet Data (CDPD)
VOICE SECTOR
INTERFACE PANEL
LAC
COMBINER
NETWORK
ASSEMBLY
FROM
RCF
RANSMIT
SNIFF
1:4
TO LAC
PREAMP
TX
1:4
FROM AIF
RECEIVE
DIST. VIA
1:6 DIVIDERS
FROM
SIMULCAST
SETUP
(IF USED)
MDBS
TX
RX0
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
RX1
1:4
SNIFF
LAC
TX
FROM
RCF
RANSMIT
EXISTING
3:1 COMBINER
TO LAC
PREAMP
RX0
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
SNIFF
COMBINER
4:1
RX1
1:4
SNIFF
OMNI SETUP SECTOR
LAC
FROM
RCF
TRANSMIT
OMNI LAC
SPLITTER
NETWORK
TO SNIFF COMBINERS ON
UP TO 2 MORE SECTORS
TO LAC
PREAMP
Figure 6-16. Multiple Modem Transceiver per Sector, Multiple LACs per
Sector - Sniffing on One LAC - Omnidirectional Setup
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
6-22
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cellular Digital Packet Data (CDPD)
VOICE SECTOR
INTERFACE PANEL
LAC
COMBINER
NETWORK
ASSEMBLY
FROM
RCF
RANSMIT
SNIFF
1:4
TO LAC
PREAMP
TX
1:4
FROM AIF
RECEIVE
DIST. VIA
1:6 DIVIDERS
FROM
SIMULCAST
SETUP
(IF USED)
MDBS
TX
RX0
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
RX1
1:4
SNIFF
LAC
FROM
RCF
RANSMIT
COMBINER
NETWORK
ASSEMBLY
SNIFF
TX
TO LAC
PREAMP
TX
RX0
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
SNIFF
COMBINER
4:1
RX1
1:4
SNIFF
OMNI SETUP SECTOR
LAC
FROM
RCF
TRANSMIT
OMNI LAC
SPLITTER
NETWORK
TO SNIFF COMBINERS ON
UP TO 2 MORE SECTORS
TO LAC
PREAMP
Figure 6-17. Multiple Modem Transceiver per Sector, Multiple LACs per
Sector - Sniffing on Multiple LACs - Omnidirectional Setup
Grounding and
Lightning
Protection
Grounding and lightning protection are provided by connecting the external packet
data equipment to the Cell Site's ring ground.
Related
Documentation
Related Cell Site documentation is Lucent Technologies 401-660-101, Cell
Diagnostic Tests. Documentation for the CDPD equipment listed in Table is
provided in the following Lucent Technologies documents:
Table 6-2.
CDPD Documentation
Document
Number
Document Title
401-401-100
MDBS Installation Manual
401-401-101
MDBS User's Guide
401-401-102
CDPD Subscriber information Update Guide
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
6-23
Series II Cellular Digital Packet Data (CDPD)
Table 6-2.
CDPD Documentation (Contd)
Document
Number
Document Title
401-401-110
CDPD MD-IS Operations Manual
401-401-111
CDPD Administration Server Operations Manual
401-401-112
Network Management System User's Guide.
401-401-113
CDPD MD-IS Complex Hardware Reference Manual
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
6-24
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
6-25
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
6-26
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
7
Mini, Micro, and Fiber-Link Series II
Cell Site Options
Contents
■
Contents
7-1
■
General
7-2
■
Series IIe Cell Site
7-4
■
Compact Base Station (CBS)
7-6
CBS Documents
■
■
7-7
Series IIm T1/E1 MiniCell
7-8
Installing the TRTU and DRU(s)
7-8
Installing the T-EDRU and EDRU(s)
7-8
Cabinet Descriptions
7-8
Series IIm T1/E1 Minicell Documentation
7-8
Series IImm T1/E1 MicroCell
7-9
AMPS/TDMA Mix with DRU Radios
7-9
AMPS/TDMA Mix with EDRU Radios
7-10
Radio Self Power Upgade
7-10
Restoring Cell to Service
7-12
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
7-1
Mini, Micro, and Fiber-Link Series II Cell Site Options
General
There are many possible options and combinations of Cell Site hardware and new
hardware/software options are continually being developed to enhance the
AUTOPLEX System 1000. To determine which hardware/software options are
currently available, please contact a Lucent Technologies Account Executive.
Table 7-1.
Technology Options - Related
Documentation
Document Number
Title
401-610-006
Planning Guide
401-610-036
Data Base Update
401-610-055
Input Message Manual
401-610-057
Output Message Manual
401-610-075
System Routine and Corrective Maintenance
401-610-077
ECP/CDN Recovery/Messages Audits Manual
401-610-078
Cell Site Audits Manual
401-610-079
System Recovery
401-610-120
Recommended Spare Parts, Tools, and Test Equipment
401-610-135
Service Measurements
401-610-151
Daily Operations
401-612-064
Multiple System Subscriber Administration (MSSA)
401-660-101
Series II Cell Site Diagnostic Test Descriptions
401-660-106
Series I and II Cell Translations Applications Guide
401-660-108
Cellular Operations Systems
Performance Analysis and Cellular Engineering Users Guide
401-660-115
Series IIm T1/E1 Minicell Description, Operation, and Maintenance
401-661-111
Series II Microcell Implementation, Installation, and Maintenance Guidelines
401-661-116
Universal Fiber Microcell Implementation, Installation, and
Maintenance Guidelines
401-661-215
Universal Fiber Microcell Primary Remote Administrator
(PRA) User Guide
401-661-216
Universal Fiber Microcell Secondary Administrator (RA) User
Guide
401-703-000
PCS CDMA Systems Product Overview
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
7-2
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Mini, Micro, and Fiber-Link Series II Cell Site Options
Table 7-1.
Technology Options - Related
Documentation (Contd)
Document Number
Title
401-703-203
PCS CDMA Minicell Guidelines for Systems Acceptance and
Test
401-703-201
PCS RF Engineering Guidelines for PCS CDMA Implementation
401-703-301
PCS CDMA Minicell Description, Operation, and Maintenance
401-612-131
PCS CDMA Minicell CATV Distribution Optional Feature
SD2R236, Issue 7
AUTOPLEX System Application Schematic
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
7-3
Mini, Micro, and Fiber-Link Series II Cell Site Options
Series IIe Cell Site
Series II Cell Site Release 4.34 and later (with the ECP running APXEC5.1 or
later Generic) provides for a Series IIe Cell Site. The information contained herein
is based on Series II Cell Site Release 5.06 and later.
The Series IIe is a small capacity Cell Site based on the standard Series II Cell
Site hardware and software. Call processing for Series IIe is identical to the Series
II Cell Site. Series IIe offers the Receive Calibration Generator (RCG) and the
redundant Reference Frequency Generator (RFG) as optional equipment. A
reduction in hardware and the offer of non-redundant hardware from the Series II
Cell Site tailors the Series IIe for smaller market applications.
The Series IIe is intended to economically address the Rural Service Area (RSA),
and some outlying Metropolitan Service Areas (MSA). The Series II Primary
Radio Channel Frame (P-RCF) and the Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) were
redesigned for Series IIe. The Linear Amplifier Frame (LAF) remains unchanged
and contains a standard Series II linear amplifier. The ECP Recent Change and
Series II cell software have been enhanced to incorporate Cell Site translations
specific to this product. Translations provide equipage data fields for optional
hardware and a unique cell identification.
Table 7-2.
Series IIe Configurations
R4.34
Model
Configuration
Package
Max. Capacity of Model
Configuration Package
without Additional Frames
Max. Capacity
with Additional
Frames
Antenna Configuration
OMNI
OMNI
OMNI
3 Sectored
6 Sectored
Primary Radio Frame
Growth Radio Frames
Analog Radio Channel Units
10
32
176
Linear Amplifier Frame
240-Watt Linear Amplifier
Circuit
Antenna Interface Frame
Transmit Filter Assembly
Receive Filter Assembly
14
Digital Radio Channel Units
86
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
7-4
R5.06
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Mini, Micro, and Fiber-Link Series II Cell Site Options
The "Model Configuration" Series IIe Cell Site only allows an omnidirectional
setup and voice configuration, analog radios, and equipage of up to 32 radios. Cell
Release 5.06 provides for growth greater than 32 analog radios, TDMA,
sectorization, support for all microcell configurations, a second LAF, a second
Antenna Interface Frame, and duplex as well as simplex filter arrangements.
Primary
Radio Frame
Linear Amplifier
Frame
AT&T
Network Systems
5V
030
022
012
CONV 0
+5V
0/AF1
AT&T
Network Systems
AUTOPLEX
036
042
054
048
060
072
066
0/CP1 0/NC10 0/MEM
0/NC12
082
0/CPU
094
1/CPU
102
108
114
120
128
132
138
144
154
1/AF1
1/NC12
1/NC11
1/MEM 1/NC10 1/CP1
5V
FAIL
FAIL
FAIL
FAIL
FAIL
ACT
ACT
AT&T
AT&T
FAIL
FAIL
OFF
FITS
V IN
FITS
AT&T
/COMB
CONV 0
RCU
AT&T
RCU
AT&T
AT&T
RCU
AT&T
AT&T
RCU
RCU
RCU
RCU
AT&T
AT&T
RCU
AT&T AT&T
10
RCU
AT&T
V IN
AT&T
11
12
13
RCU
RCU
RCU
14
DS1
12V
12V
STBY
STBY
STBY
16
17
SWITCH
CHANNEL NO. CHANNEL NO.
FAIL
STBY
FAIL
STBY
CHANNEL NO.
FAIL
STBY
CHANNEL NO.
FAIL
STBY
CHANNEL NO.
FAIL
STBY
CHANNEL NO.
FAIL
STBY
CHANNEL NO.
FAIL
FAIL
ACT
STBY
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
AT&T
AT&T
AT&T
AT&T
AT&T
AT&T
AT&T
AT&T
AT&T
AT&T
OFF
V IN
15
CONV
+5
5V
+ CHANNEL NO. CHANNEL NO. CHANNEL NO.
FAIL
FAIL
FAIL
12V
OFF
V IN
/COMB
Reference Frequency
Generator (1 Oscillator)
Radio Test Unit
Switch
FAIL
FAIL
OFF
AT&T
AUTOPLEX
FAIL
CU Shelf 1
0 RCUs
AT&T
Network Systems
170
162
CONV1
CAT/DS-1 +5V
CC Shelf 0
AUTOPLEX
Antenna Interface
Frame
CONV 0
RCU
RCU
RCU
RCU
RCU
RCU
AT&T
10
11
12
13
RCU
RCU
RCU
RCU
RCU
RCU
14
DS1
12V
AT&T
15
CONV
+5
5V
Receive Filter Panel
Transmit Filter Panel
Receive Filter Panel
12V
16
17
SWITCH
CU Shelf 2
FAIL
ACT
12V
OFF
OFF
V IN
V IN
AT&T
AT&T
an Panel
/COMB
CONV 0
RCU
RCU
RCU
RCU
RCU
RCU
10
11
12
RCU
RCU
RCU
RCU
RCU
13
RCU
14
DS1
12V
12V
16
17
SWITCH
CHANNEL NO.
FAIL
12V
15
CONV
+5
5V
TU Shelf 3
RTU, 1 DS1
STBY
FAIL
ACT
TX
OFF
OFF
V IN
V IN
AT&T
AT&T
LAC
Figure 7-1.
Series IIe Radio Frame Set
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
7-5
Mini, Micro, and Fiber-Link Series II Cell Site Options
Compact Base Station (CBS)
The Compact Base Station (CBS) (see Figure 7-2) is a Cell Site where Series II
technology is repackaged into a compact cabinet designed for an outdoor
environment. The CBS shares many of the Series II advantages such as
compatibility with Series I, all digital interfaces, easy maintenance, on-site
diagnostics, and programmable radio channels.
The CBS contains three bays:
■
The Radio Channel Bay (RCB)
■
Linear Amplifier Bay (LAB)
■
Antenna Interface Bay (AIB).
The CBS radio channel equipment is housed in the RCB. The CBS
accommodates up to 32 radio channel units and contains a single Linear Amplifier
Circuit (LAC) which can be equipped to deliver either 100 or 240 watts total
average Radio Frequency (RF) output power when measured at the amplifier
output. The transmit and receive filter panels can be optioned for either “A” or “B”
band operation, and an integrate duplexer option is also available. For additional
information, refer to Lucent Technologies Customer Information Bulletin (CIB)
182, Introduction to Series II Compact Base Station and Lucent Technologies
401-660-060, Compact Base Station Description, Operation, and Maintenance.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
7-6
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Mini, Micro, and Fiber-Link Series II Cell Site Options
POSITION 1 - AIB
POSITION 2 - LAB
POSITION 3 - RCB
REFERENCE FREQUENCY
GENERATOR (RFG)
INTERCONNECTION PANEL
RECEIVE CALIBRATION
GENERATOR (RCG)
RCC SHELF
RTU SWITCH PANEL (RSP)
RCV0
RECEIVE FILTER PANEL (RFP)
LAC
(LINEAR AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT)
TRMT
RCU SHELF
TRANSMIT FILTER PANEL (TFP)
RCV1
RECEIVE FILTER PANEL (RFP)
RCU SHELF
T1 LINES
CSU/DSX PANEL
FAN UNIT
LINEAGE RECTIFIER SHELF
RTU SHELF
ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLLER
LINEAGE CONTROLLER
BACKUP BATTERIES
Figure 7-2.
CBS Documents
Series II Compact Base Station (CBS) Hardware Architecture
Series II Compact Base Station Description,
Operation, and Maintenance (401-660-060)
Series II Compact Base Station Cabinet
Installation Manual (401-660-200).
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
7-7
Mini, Micro, and Fiber-Link Series II Cell Site Options
Series IIm T1/E1 MiniCell
The Series IIm MiniCell is designed to provide high-power, low-channel capacity
cellular coverage for rural environments where wide area coverage is desired and
low traffic is expected. It provides high Radio Frequency (RF) transmit power to
cover a large geographic area.
The Series IIm is connected to the Mobile Switching Center (MSC) via T1/E1,
wired, or microwave facilities. A single primary cabinet may be used to provide as
many as 8 cellular radio channels. One channel is used for set-up
communications and the remaining 7 channels are used for voice.
Installing the
TRTU and DRU(s)
In Series IIm and Series IImm cells, the TRTU is installed in slot 22 of the radio
shelf in the primary cabinet. (For more information see Chapter “Series II Cell Site
Equipment Descriptions,” Section “Installing the TRTU and DRU(s)”.
Installing the TEDRU and
EDRU(s)
In Series IIm and Series IImm cells, insert T-EDRU in slot 22 of radio shelf in
primary cabinet. When installing in the Series IIm/IImm cabinet, EDRUs (44WR8)
require two shelf slots. Lucent Technologies recommends equipping these radios
in even numbered shelf slots only (i.e., positioned in slots 2-3, 4-5, 6-7, etc.). (For
more information see Chapter “Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions,”
Section “ Installing the TRTU and EDRU(s)”.
Cabinet
Descriptions
The primary Series IIm cabinet may be combined with up to 2 growth cabinets
where each growth cabinet can provide as many as 8 additional radio channels for
voice communications. Although a battery back-up system is provided in each
cabinet, an extended battery back-up cabinet can be installed to provide a longer
backup time.
Cabinets designed for outdoor installation are AC-powered and are equipped with
heat exchangers to maintain a tolerable interior temperature regardless of outdoor
environment. Cabinets designed for indoor installation may be either AC or DC
powered.
Series IIm T1/E1
Minicell
Documentation
Series IIm T1/E1 Minicell Description, Operation,
and Maintenance (401-660-115)
Series IIm-T1 Minicell and Series IImm-T1 Microcell Introduction
and Ordering Guide (230 CIB).
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
7-8
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Mini, Micro, and Fiber-Link Series II Cell Site Options
Series IImm T1/E1 MicroCell
The Series IImm MicroCell system uses a Series II Cell Site and is:
■
Compact
■
Low-power Radio Frequency (RF)
■
High-channel capacity
■
Advanced Mobile Phone Service (AMPS) and/or Time Division Multiple
Access (TDMA).
Cabinets designed for outdoor installation are AC-powered and are equipped with
heat exchangers to maintain a tolerable interior temperature regardless of outdoor
environment. Cabinets designed for indoor installation may be either AC or DC
powered.
Series IIm and IImm AC cabinets have a "fold up lip" on:
1.
the top of the front door
2.
the rear (heat exchanger equipped) door
3.
both of the pedestal area covers.
This lip prevents any water sitting on top of the door edge from being sucked into
the cabinet when the door or pedestal cover is opened.
To address concerns about door latches breaking in the field, the door latching
mechanism consists of four individually operated one quarter turn latches. To
further increase security, the top and the bottom latch are equipped with hasps
that can accommodate a pad lock.
To address concerns about gaskets coming off in the field and water getting into
the cabinets, door gaskets are placed on the mating surface of the cabinet drip lip.
For details, refer to 401-660-117 "Small Cell Installation" and 401-660-116 "Series
II Description, Operation, and Maintenance.
AMPS/TDMA Mix
with DRU Radios
The Series IImm primary cabinet permits a maximum of 19 transmit SBRCU
radios, a setup radio, a receive-only locate radio, and two test radios. Because test
radios are not required in the growth cabinets, the growth cabinets can
accommodate 21 SBRCU radios.
Because an RCU is twice the width of an SBRCU, the installation of RCU radios is
limited the number of transmit radios that can be accommodated. When the cell is
configured to support AMPS and TDMA, one locate radio must be an RCU or
SBRCU and the other locate radio may be a locate EDRU (L-EDRU) or a locate
DRU (L-DRU). The Radio Test Unit (RTU) for the RCU and SBRCU must be
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
7-9
Mini, Micro, and Fiber-Link Series II Cell Site Options
located in radio shelf slot 21, and if at least one DRU or EDRU is installed, a
TDMA RTU (TRTU) or a test EDRU (T-EDRU) must be installed. The TRTU is four
slots wide and occupies slots 22 through 25 and the T-EDRU is two slots wide and
occupies slots 22 and 23.
AMPS/TDMA Mix
with EDRU Radios
When EDRUs are used, an EDRU can be placed in any two adjacent slots starting
with an odd numbered slot. The number of EDRUs that can be installed on the
radio shelf is limited by the shelf power supply and the cabinet heat dissipation.
There are two types of Series IImm primary and growth cabinets. They are
differentiated by the cabinets’ production date. Cabinets manufactured prior to
December 1995 provide 20A service to the radio shelf, and cabinets
manufactured after this date provide 30A service to the radio shelf. When EDRUs
are installed, the +5-volt PCU 415AC should be replaced with +5-volt PCU 430AB
regardless of the cabinet’s manufacture date and the number of EDRUs to be
installed.
NOTE:
Prior to replacing any electrical component in the radio shelf, the cell or
sector should be taken off line and the power to the component being
replaced should be shut off.
A single circuit breaker rated at either 20A or 30A, depending on the cabinet
manufacture date, supplies power to the radio shelf at 5-volt and +12-volt PCU.
The 20A RCU circuit breaker (CB1) in the Series IImm cabinet permits the
operation of up to nine EDRUs and two analog RCUs. If ten or more EDRUs are to
be installed, the +5V CONV circuit breaker must be replaced with a 30A circuit
beaker.
In addition, the feeder line to the new 30A circuit breaker must be changed from a
12 AWG wire to twin 10 AWG feeders. If the number of EDRUs to be installed is
ten or more, a 12-volt power converter unit (PCU) 419AC must be replaced with
PCU 419AE .
Radio Self Power
Upgade
The introduction of EDRU radios may require a radio power supply upgrade. This
upgade involves replacing +5-volt PCU 415AC with +5-volt PCU 430AB, and
possibly replacing 20-A RCU circuit breaker CB1 with a 30-A circuit breaker. Prior
to replacing any electrical component in the radio shelf, the cell or sector should
be taken off line and the power to the component to be replaced should be shut
off. If circuit breaker CB1 is to upgraded from 20A to 30A, power to the cabinet
must be turned off.
1.
To remove a cell from service, use the dial-up terminal to log on to the MSC
and perform the following:
■
Inhibit call processing, routine diagnostics, and functional test of the
cell by entering the following commands:
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
7-10
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Mini, Micro, and Fiber-Link Series II Cell Site Options
— inh:cell a,cp (where a = cell number)
— inh:cell a,rtdiag
— inh:cell a,ft su
— inh:cell a,ft lc
■
Wait for all in-process calls to complete [all voice RCU, SBRCU,
DRU and EDRU Tx (Transmit) LEDs OFF].
■
Remove all beacon radios (if equipped) from service by entering the
following code:
— rmv:cell a,ra b;ucl (where a = cell number and b = radio
number of beacon)
■
Remove cell data links to/from MSC by entering the following code:
— rmv:cell a,dl 1
2.
If a +5-volt PCU 415AC is to be replaced by a +5-volt PCU 430AB, set RCU
circuit breaker CB1 to the OFF position and then replace the +5-volt PCU
board. Set RCU circuit breaker CB1 to the ON position. If RCU circuit
breaker CB1 needs to be replaced, perform the following; otherwise restore
the cell back to service.
3.
To replace RCU circuit breaker CB1, perform the following:
■
On DC cabinets, remove the 24-volt supply.
■
On AC cabinets, set the main AC circuit breaker to OFF. The cell will
run for about 10 minutes using the backup battery power. Remove
the side access panels from the AC pedestal to gain access to the
battery positive leads and disconnect the battery.
■
Remove the four machine screws from the front four corners of the
circuit breaker panel and remove the top cover. It may be necessary
to clip (remove) cable ties that secure the power wires in order to
provide additional installation space.
■
Remove the machine screws from the DC circuit breaker panel.
■
Remove 20A RCU circuit breaker CB2 from the circuit panel.
Remove two 5/16 nuts from the circuit breaker power terminals and
disconnect the power wires.
■
Install the new 30A circuit breaker by reversing the sequence in
which the circuit breaker was removed.
■
Ensure that the circuit breaker is oriented correctly and that line and
load power wiring is correctly replaced on the circuit breaker.
■
Ensure that the circuit breaker power terminal nuts are adequately
torqued.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
7-11
Mini, Micro, and Fiber-Link Series II Cell Site Options
Restoring Cell to
Service
■
Using a 1/8-inch stamp and white ink to stamp “30 A,” which
indicates the value of the new circuit breaker.
■
Reinstall the top cover on the panel; reinstall the circuit breaker
panel.
■
Ensure that the power wiring is not kinked or pinched when sliding
the panel back into the cabinet.
■
Secure the panel using four machine screws.
■
Re-install cable ties that were previously removed.
■
On DC cabinets, restore power to the cabinet and then restore the
cell back to service.
■
On AC cabinets, use antioxidant compound to prevent high
resistance caused by oxidation and reconnect the positive battery
leads.
■
On AC cabinets, set the main AC circuit beaker to ON and then
restore the cell back to service.
To restore the cell back to service, use the dial-up terminal that is logged on to the
MSC and do the following:
a.
Restore cell data links by entering the following commands:
b.
rst:cell x,dl 0;ucl where x = cell number
c.
rst:cell x,dl 1;ucl
d.
MSC automatically boots cell under test. Verify by entering the following
command:
e.
op:cell x where x = cell number
f.
Wait for the boot process to complete (approximately 5 minutes when
equipped with 56 kbps datalinks, and 20 minutes with 9.6 kbps datalinks).
When the boot process is complete, each RCU displays its channel
number. Make sure that RCFs are alarm free.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
7-12
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
7-13
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
7-14
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8
Series II Cell Site Equipment
Descriptions
Contents
■
Contents
8-1
■
General
8-4
■
Radio Channel Frame (RCF) Description
8-5
Series II Cell Site Radio Control Complex (RCC) Buses
8-11
Series II Cell Site Radio Control Complex,
Shelf 0 ED-2R832-30
8-14
Power Converter 430AB +5V
8-14
Alarm/FITS Interface (AFI) UN166
8-14
Alarm Adapter Interface for Increased Cell Alarms AYD10
8-15
Network Control Interface (NCI) TN168C
8-15
Communications Processor Interface (CPI) TN167
8-16
8-Megabyte Memory (MEM) Board TN1710
8-16
Core Processor Unit (CPU) UN524 or HCPU UN530
8-16
Digital Service (DS1) TN171
8-17
Digital Facilities Interface (DFI) TN1713B
8-17
Series II Cell Site Radio Channel Unit Shelves ED-2R833-30
8-17
Transmit Combiner BBN-2
8-19
Receive Divider BBN-1
8-19
Receive Switch BBM-1
8-19
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-1
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
Clock and Tone (CAT) Board TN170
8-19
Power Converter 419AE (+12V)
8-20
Radio Channel Unit ED-2R836-30
8-20
Digital Radio Unit ED-2R920-30
8-20
Enhanced Digital Radio Unit 44WR8
8-20
Radio Shelf Power Upgrade
Installing the TRTU and DRU(s)
8-20
Installing the T-EDRU and EDRU(s)
8-21
Series II Classic Radio Frame
8-26
Series II Cell Site Fan Panel Assembly
ED-2R824-31
8-28
Series II Cell Site Radio Test Unit Shelf 3
ED-2R835-30
8-29
Radio Test Unit ED-2R837-30
8-30
TDMA Radio Test Unit ED-2R921-30
8-30
Series II Cell Site Radio Channel Unit Shelves 4 and 5
ED-2R834-30
8-30
Series II Cell Site Interconnection Panel Assembly
ED-2R831-30
8-31
Series II Cell Site Busbar Assembly Unit, KS24355, L1
8-39
■
Series II Mobile Switching Center (MSC) Interface
8-41
■
Series II Cell Site Linear Amplifier Frame (LAF)
8-44
Series II Cell Site Linear Amplifier Circuit J41660CA-1
Linear Amplifier Circuit (LAC) Drawings
8-46
8-50
Series II Cell Site Linear Amplifier Module ED-2R840-30
8-52
Series II Cell Site Linear Amplifier Unit (LAU)
8-53
Series II Cell Site, 20-LAM LAC Versus 10-LAM LAC
8-55
Series II Cell Site Linearizer Unit ED-2R841-30
8-56
■
Series II Cell Site Frame Interface Assembly ED-2R838-30
8-61
■
Series II Cell Site Antenna Interface Frame (AIF), Overview
8-64
Series II Cell Site Reference Frequency Generator (RFG)
Shelf
Series II Cell Site Receiver Calibration Generator
ED-2R845-30
Series II Cell Site Radio Switch Panel
Series II Cell Site Radio Test Unit (RTU) Switch Panel
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-2
8-20
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-69
8-69
8-76
8-76
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
■
Series II Cell Site Receive, Alarm, and Power Distribution
Panel ED 2R851-30
8-76
Series II Cell Site Receive and Power Distribution
Panel ED-2R853-31
8-77
Series II Cell Site Duplexer Filter Panel
ED-2R848-31
8-77
Series II Cell Site Receive Filter Panel
ED-2R846-31
8-78
Series II Cell Site Transmit Filter Panel ED-2R847-31
8-79
Series II Cell Site Equipment Summary
Series II Cell Site, Related Documentation
8-83
8-84
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-3
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
General
Series II Cell Site hardware is designed, arranged, and packaged on a functional
basis. Although there is a considerable amount of hardware involved, each
hardware unit is straightforward in its purpose, and specific hardware units are
associated with specific functions. Service reliability to the cellular subscriber is
provided in many different ways by the design and functional grouping of
hardware. This functional grouping of hardware, combined with diagnostic tests,
provides a direct and time-saving approach to maintenance tasks.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-4
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
Radio Channel Frame (RCF)
Description
The Primary Radio Channel Frame (P-RCF) (see Figure 8-1) is equipped with a
fully redundant Radio Control Complex (RCC). The RCC is the Cell Site controller
— this includes communication with the Mobile Switching Center (MSC) and
control of voice and data communication with subscriber units and the Cell Site
maintenance equipment. The Radio Channel Units (RCUs) in the P-RCF serve
functionally as setup, locate, and voice channel radios. Each of 2 Growth RCFs
can contain up to 72 RCUs.
The Primary Radio Channel Frame J41660A-2 and the growth Radio Channel
Frame J41660B-2 weigh approximately 800 pounds each fully loaded and have
the following dimensions:
26" wide by 22" deep by 81" high
Total height = 70" to top of bay + 10 1/2" for the interconnection panel.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-5
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
Major assemblies located in the Primary Radio Channel Frame (P-RCF) are
called out by ED number.
SIMULCAST RCU (on
rear of Simulcast Bar)
SIMULCAST BAR
INTERCONNECTION PANEL
LEVEL 75
RADIO CONTROL COMPLEX
SHELF 0
LEVEL 66
RADIO CHANNEL UNIT
SHELF 1
LEVEL 57
RADIO CHANNEL UNIT
SHELF 2
LEVEL 48
FAN PANEL ASSEMBLY
LEVEL 42
RADIO TEST UNIT
SHELF 3
LEVEL 30
RADIO CHANNEL UNIT
SHELF 4
LEVEL 21
RADIO CHANNEL UNIT
SHELF 5
LEVEL 13
CIRCUIT BREAKER
PANEL
LEVEL 07
CAPACITOR PANELLOCATED AT REAR
OF FRAME
EXHAUST
PORT
Figure 8-1.
SEE PRIMARY RADIO CHANNEL
FRAME HARDWARE TABLE
Primary Radio Channel Frame J41660A-2
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-6
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
INTERCONNECTION PANEL
LEVEL 75
RADIO CHANNEL UNIT
SHELF 0
LEVEL 66
RADIO CHANNEL UNIT
SHELF 1
LEVEL 57
RADIO CHANNEL UNIT
SHELF 2
LEVEL 48
FAN PANEL ASSEMBLY
LEVEL 42
RADIO CHANNEL UNIT
SHELF 3
LEVEL 30
RADIO CHANNEL UNIT
SHELF 4
LEVEL 21
RADIO CHANNEL UNIT
SHELF 5
LEVEL 13
CIRCUIT BREAKER
PANEL
LEVEL 07
CAPACITOR PANELLOCATED AT REAR
OF FRAME
EXHAUST
PORT
Figure 8-2.
SEE GROWTH RADIO CHANNEL
FRAME HARDWARE TABLE
Growth Radio Channel Frame (J41660B-2)
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-7
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
The major hardware units are listed in the tables below.
Table 8-1.
Primary Radio Channel Frame Hardware (J-41660A)
Item
Max Qty
Code
Eq. Loc
ED-2R831-30
80
Tx, Rx Power Dividers (9:1)
21
KS24235, L5
Radio Control Complex (Shelf 0)
ED-2R832-30
+5V Power Converter
415AB
Alarm/FITS Interface
UN166
Interconnection Panel
*Alarm Adapter Interface for
Increased Cell Alarms
(Optional)
(Installed in Cable Tray Assembly)
AYD10
Network Control Interface
TN168
Communications Processor
Interface
TN167
Core Processor Unit
UN524
8-Megabyte Memory Board
TN1710
High Capacity Processor Unit (HCPU)
UN530
Bus Interface Board
TN2245
Digital Facilities Interface (DFI)
TN1713B or
TN3500B
Radio Channel Unit Shelf
(Shelf 1 and Shelf 2)
ED-2R833-30
Transmit Combiner
BBN2
+12V Power Converter
419AE
Radio Channel Unit
24
ED-2R836-30
Digital Radio Unit
12
ED-2R920-30
Power Converter Unit
430AB
(Req’d for EDRU)
Enhanced Digital Radio Unit
Maximum 12
per shelf.
23 per RCF0,
40 per RCF1,
16 per RCF2
TN170
Receive Switch Divider
(Manual) (Switchable)
BBN1 or BBM1
Fan Panel Assembly
ED-2R824-31
406029041
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-8
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
57,48
44WR8
Clock And Tone (CAT)
Fan
66
42
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
Table 8-1.
Primary Radio Channel Frame Hardware (J-41660A) (Contd)
Item
Max Qty
Code
Eq. Loc
30
Radio Test Unit (Shelf 3)
ED-2R835-30
Transmit Combiner
BBN2
+12V Power Converter
419AE
Radio Channel Unit
ED-2R836-30
Digital Radio Unit
ED-2R920-30
Power Converter Unit
Enhanced Digital Radio Unit
TDMA Radio Test Unit (TRTU)
430AB
(Req’d for EDRU)
Maximum
8 per shelf
44WR8
ED-2R921-30
Radio Test Unit (RTU)
ED-2R837-30
Digital Facilities Interface (DFI)
TN1713B or
TN3500B
+5V Converter
430AB
Receive Switch Divider (Manual)
BBN1
Radio Channel Unit Shelf
(Shelf 4 and Shelf 5)
ED-2R834-30
Transmit Combiner
BBN2
+12V Power Converter
419AE
Radio Channel Unit
Digital Radio Unit
12
ED-2R836-30
ED-2R920-30
Power Converter Unit
Enhanced Digital Radio Unit
Digital
Radio
Unit
13, 21
430AB (Req’d for
EDRU)
Maximum 12
per shelf
44WR8
Digital Facilities Interface (DFI)
TN1713B or
TN3500B
Receive Switch Divider (Manual)
BBN1
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-9
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
Table 8-1.
Primary Radio Channel Frame Hardware (J-41660A) (Contd)
Item
Max Qty
*Busbar Assembly Unit
(Manufactured 5/98 or later)
Code
KS24355, L1
Circuit Breaker, Plug-In, 15.0 A
KS24356, L6
Circuit Breaker, Plug-In, 25.0 A
10
KS24356, L8
Circuit Breaker, Plug-In, 5.0 A
KS24356, L4
Eq. Loc
Note: This table is for hardware identification only. Do not use this table for ordering
hardware items.
* Replaces Circuit Breaker Assembly ED-2R826-30
and Capacitor Panel Assembly ED-2R829-30.
Table 8-2.
Primary Radio Channel Frame (P-RCF) Radio Shelves 0 through 5
Controls and Indicators
Control/
Indicator
Type
Function
-5V
Test Jack
Test Point — Monitor -5V
+5V
Test Jack
Test Point — Monitor +5V
Off
LED (Red)
Indicates converter is off
V in
LED (White)
Indicates +24V to converter
UN166
Fail
LED (Red)
Indicates board failure
Comm. Proc. Interface TN167
Fail
LED (Red)
Indicates board failure
Network Control Interface TN168
Fail
LED (Red)
Indicates board failure
8-Megabyte Mem. Board TN1710
Fail
LED (Red)
Indicates board failure
Core Processor UN524
Fail
LED (Red)
Indicates board failure
Act
LED (Green) Indicates active (on line)
Fail
LED (Red)
Indicates board failure
CLF
LED
(Amber)
Indicates T1 or E1 line fault
LED (Green
Indicates on line
Test Jack
Test Point — Monitor +12V
Return
-12V
Test Jack
Test Point — Monitor -12V
+12V
Test Jack
Test Point — Monitor +12V
Off
LED (Red)
Indicates converter is off
V In
LED (White)
Indicates 24V to converter
Circuit Pack/Unit
+5V Converter
430AB
Alarm/FITS Interface
DS1 Board TN171
or
DFI Board TN1713B or TN3500B SYNC
+12.0V Power Converter 419AE
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-10
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
Table 8-2.
Primary Radio Channel Frame (P-RCF) Radio Shelves 0 through 5
Controls and Indicators (Contd)
Control/
Indicator
Type
Function
Auto/Off
Switch
Switches Radio Channel
Unit On/Off
Fail
LED (Red)
Indicates Radio Channel
failure
StdBy
LED
(Amber)
Indicates Radio Channel
Unit is in StandBy Mode.
Non-Volatile Memory (NVM)
update in process.
Tx
LED (Green) Indicates Radio Channel
Unit is transmitting
Screw
Slot
Potentiometer
Adjusts Output Level of
Radio
Clock & Tone
Fail
LED (Red)
Indicates Board Failure
Board TN170
Act
LED (Green) Indicates Active (On Line)
Auto/Off
Switch
Switches Radio Channel
Unit On/Off
Fail
LED (Red)
Indicates Radio Channel
failure
Auto/Off
Switch
Switches Radio Channel
Unit On/Off
Circuit Pack/Unit
Radio Channel Unit
ED-2R836-30
Digital Radio Unit
ED-2R920-30
Enhanced Digital Radio Unit
44WR8
Radio Test Unit ED-2R837-30
TDMA Radio Test Unit
ED-2R921-30
The following paragraphs describe the major functions performed by the RCF.
Series II Cell Site
Radio Control
Complex (RCC)
Buses
The Radio Control Complex (RCC) Figure 8-3 can accommodate up to three Time
Division Multiplexed (TDM) buses. The ones currently used are TDM bus 0 and
TDM bus 1, which are installed "red stripe up." TDM bus 2 is for future growth.
Each P-RCF is equipped with the following:
■
One Radio Control Complex (RCC) shelf
■
Carriers and backplane boards for the four Radio Channel Unit (RCU)
shelves
■
Carrier and backplane for the Radio Test Unit (RTU) shelf
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-11
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
■
Backplane wiring for the six shelves.
The backplane wiring includes all cabling, terminating boards, and adapter boards
required to make the TDM bus interconnections between shelves and between
frames.
In Cell Sites having only a P-RCF, communication between the RCC and all the
circuits under its control is by TDM bus 0. In Cell Sites having a P-RCF and one or
two Growth RCFs, communication is by TDM buses 0 and 1.
Radio Channels Units (RCUs) communicate with either side of the RCC by TDM
buses 0 or 1. Each bus is connected to the Core Processor Unit (CPU) by a
Network Interface (NCI) circuit board and the associated system bus.
For each side of the RCC, one NCI circuit is needed with each TDM bus. Only two
NCI circuit boards are needed in each side of the RCC to accommodate 200 radio
channels. The P-RCF can handle up to 56 channels and each of two Growth
RCFs can handle up to 72, for a total of 200.
The backplane slot assignments and the TDM bus fixed addresses for the RCC
shelf assembly are shown in Table 8-3.
Table 8-3.
Time Division Multiplex Bus Addresses
Board Type
66-012
Power Converter
N/A
N/A
66-022
Alarm/FITS Interface
N/A
N/A
66-030
Reserved
7D
66-036
NCI
6D
66-042
Reserved
5D
66-048
NCI
4D
66-054
Reserved
3D
66-060
CPI
2D
66-066
NCI
1D
66-072
Memory
0D
66-082
Core Processor
N/A
N/A
66-094
Core Processor
N/A
N/A
66-102
Memory
4D
66-108
NCI
5D
66-114
CPI
6D
66-120
Reserved
7D
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-12
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
TDM Bus
TDM Bus
Address (Hex)
EQL
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
Table 8-3.
Time Division Multiplex Bus Addresses (Contd)
TDM Bus
TDM Bus
Address (Hex)
EQL
Board Type
66-126
NCI
0D
66-132
Reserved
1D
66-138
Reserved
2D
66-144
Reserved
3D
66-154
Alarm/FITS Interface
66-162
DS-1
66-170
Power Converter
N/A
N/A
7F
N/A
N/A
The Update bus is the means by which the Core Processor in the active side of
the RCC updates the memory and diagnoses problems in the standby or mate
side. When the active processor places the mate in the update mode, all the
memory write operations are copied to the mate over the Update bus. A series of
buffers on the Core Processor board provide the Update bus with an interface to
the System bus.
Each side of the RCC has a dedicated System bus. Each of the two System buses
links its CPU with a number of peripheral circuit boards. The basic peripheral
circuits include the following:
■
Memory
■
Communication Processor Interface (CPI)
■
NCI
■
Alarm/FITS Interface (AFI).
For each side of the RCC, the minimum configuration requires only one CPU and
one AFI and at least one of the following: Memory, CPI, and NCI boards. The
update bus is the means by which the Core Processor in the active side of the
RCC updates the memory and diagnoses problems in the standby or mate side.
When the active processor places the mate in the update mode, all the memory
write operations are copied to the mate over the Update bus. A series of buffers
on the Core Processor board provide the Update bus with an interface to the
System bus.
The Update bus is the means by which the Core Processor in the active side of
the RCC updates the memory and diagnoses problems in the standby or mate
side. When the active processor places the mate in the update mode, all the
memory write operations are copied to the mate over the Update bus. A Series of
buffers on the Core Processor board provide the Update bus with an interface to
the System bus.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-13
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
CSC 0
415AC
162 170
TN1713 B
154
UN166
TN16 7
TN16 8C
#%
TN16 7
UN166
415AC
#%
#%
#%
030 036 042 048 054 060 066 072 082 094 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144
TN16 8C
012 022
CSC 1
# UN524 CPU and TN1710 MEMORY used together (Original configuration)
% UN530 CPU and TN2245 BIB used together must also have NCI = TN168C Version 2:2
(CDMA applications)
Figure 8-3.
Radio Control Complex (RCC) - Shelf 0 ED-2R832-30
Series II Cell Site Radio Control Complex,
Shelf 0 ED-2R832-30
The Radio Control Complex (RCC) is the Cell Site controller and is equipped with
two identical sides — side 0 and side 1. The on-line side receives/sends control
and data information from/to the Mobile Switching Center (MSC) and from/to Cell
Site units. The off-line side tracks what the on-line side is doing, so that it may
come on-line as needed. Only one side is on-line at a time. Circuit packs within
the RCC are listed and described below.
Power Converter 430AB +5V
One power converter unit is used with each side to convert battery voltage from
+24 to +5 volts.
The 430AB is a higher capacity version of the 415AC. The output current rating on
the 415AC converter is 35 amperes. It has a built-in programmable over-current
protection circuit. If or when the total current drain exceeds the programmed level
by more than 20 percent, the converter shuts down.
Alarm/FITS Interface (AFI) UN166
The alarm and Factory Installation Test Set (FITS) interface circuit pack provides
the interfaces required to store/process Cell Site alarms back to the MSC. In
addition, this circuit pack contains the circuitry necessary to interface the FITS to
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-14
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
the Cell Site. The FITS provides a number of diagnostic tests used to initially
check out the Cell Site after installation.
This circuit board provides the interfaces needed between the associated Core
Processor Unit (CPU) and the following alarm devices:
■
User-defined alarm devices (up to 18)
■
The Primary and Growth Radio Channel Frame (RCF) alarm devices
■
The Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) alarms
■
The Linear Amplifier Frame (LAF) alarms
Alarm Adapter Interface for Increased Cell Alarms AYD10
The Alarm Adapter Interface board AYD10 is installed on the cable tray assembly
on top of the Series II Primary or Growth Frame to provide 24 additional userdefinable alarm inputs to the RCC backplane. The introduction of the AYD10
board takes advantage of the large number of TTL inputs provided by the AFI
circuit board, which contains more of these TTL inputs than generally required.
The AYD10 board, which provides optical isolation for each alarm input, converts
the alarm inputs to TTL-comparable signal inputs for RCC backplane delivery via
the AFI. When the AYD10 board is used, the alarm inputs are configured for either
open-on alarm or close-on alarm through the RCC software.
The Alarm Adapter Interface board AYD10 contains two multi-pin connectors, J1
and J2, and three terminal block connectors, J3, J4, and J5. All connections
between the AYD10 board are interfaced through terminal block connectors J3,
J4, and J5. Alarm inputs are received through connector J2.
Network Control Interface (NCI) TN168C
The NCI synchronizes control channel messages between the CPU and the
distributed network of port circuit packs that are connected to the Time Division
Multiplexed (TDM) bus, which is always installed "red stripe up." The NCI
interfaces with the CPU through a 512-byte System Dual Port Memory. The NCI
has been provided with the “Archangel” functionality. This means that it functions
as a full-duplex message switch between the CPU and the microprocessors in the
port boards (“Angels”). Besides being the mediator of the CPU, the Archangel
monitors the sanity of all the Angels and reports any changes it detects to the
CPU. TN168C replaces TN168B which, in turn, replaces TN168.
NOTE:
The High Capacity Processor Unit (HCPU) configuration on the RCC shelf,
requires this NCI card to be a TN168C version 2:2 or later.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-15
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
Communications Processor Interface (CPI) TN167
The CPI board is part of the core processor complex. The CPI is a multiprocessor
circuit that provides the data connectivity between the RCC and any of the other
terminating entities in the cellular system. The CPI manages two point-to-point
programmable, full-duplex, independent data links that implement the X.25
protocol. The number of CPI circuit boards used in each side of the RCC depends
on the number of data communication channels required. As stated above, each
CPI can accommodate up to two data channels.
8-Megabyte Memory (MEM) Board TN1710
One memory board is used with each side of the RCC. The memory circuit pack
has a storage capacity of 8 Mbytes. It contains a 1-Mbyte by 36 Dynamic Random
Access memory (DRAM) memory array which includes a 32-bit data array with
one parity bit for every eight bits of data. The memory and interrupt control logicwrite-protect and parity error latching functions are contained in each circuit pack,
which provides independent operation on a per-pack level.
NOTE:
The High Capacity Processor Unit (HCPU) configuration places the 8 Mbyte
memory provided by the TN1710 board onto the CPU board. The slot
occupied by the TN1710 board is replaced by a TN2245 Bus Interface
Board (BIB).
Core Processor Unit (CPU) UN524 or HCPU UN530
Core Processor Unit (CPU) UN524 - One core processor board is used with each
side of the RCC. The core processor controls the core processor complex which is
made up of the Alarm, Failure Interface board, Network Control Interface (NCI)
board, Memory (MEM) board, and the Communications Processor Interface (CPI)
board. One CPU is used in each of the two identical sides of the RCC. This
arrangement comprises a duplex controller that provides reliability through
redundancy. In this arrangement, the CPU in one side (active side) is always in
control of the call processing, while the CPU in the other side (the mate) is kept in
a dormant state, and its memory is continually being updated. In the event of a
component failure in the active side of the RCC, this mode allows an immediate
transfer of control from the active CPU to the mate with a minimum loss of control
information. On each side of the RCC, the CPU uses the system bus to
communicate with the other circuit boards on the same side.
NOTE:
For the High Capacity Processor Unit (HCPU) configuration, the UN524
CPU board is replaced by the UN530 HCPU board, this board contains both
the processing and memory functionality.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-16
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
Digital Service (DS1) TN171
The DS1 card supplies the digital interface for the DS1 (Digital Signal - Level 1)
interface facility. This signal interface is bipolar return-to-zero at a 1.544-Mb/s rate.
A DS1 signal consists of 24 DS0 (Digital Signal - Level 0) channels. The Cell Site
data communication links are capable of operating at 9.6- or 56-kb/s rates. Up to
14 DS1 boards are used in an RFS. TN171has been replaced by TN1713B
(below).
Digital Facilities Interface (DFI) TN1713B
The DFI card supplies the digital interface for the Conference of European Postal
and Telecommunications (CEPT) facility. This signal interface is high density
binary three at a 2.048-Mb/s rate. A CEPT signal consists of 31 digital signal
channels. Up to 14 DFI boards are used in an RFS. Dip switches on the DFI card
must be set to either 75-Ohm (coaxial cable) or 120-Ohm (twisted pair).
The DS-1/E1 board currently supplied at the factory is the TN1713B, which is a
cost reduced TN3500.
The TN3500 has been upgraded to a TN3500B, which is backwards compatible
with the TN3500, and can be used for CDMA applications.
Series II Cell Site
Radio Channel
Unit Shelves ED2R833-30
One dual-height Radio Channel Unit (RCU) is used on the Primary Radio Channel
Frame (P-RCF). It consists of two RCU shelves sharing a common backplane.
The units contained on each shelf are listed and described below.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-17
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
OMB
CONV 0
+12V
10
11
12
13
14
RCU
RCU
RCU
RCU
RCU
RCU
RCU
RCU
RCU
RCU
RCU
RCU
DS1
15
CONV
+5V
12V
5V
12V
FAIL
AUTO
STBY
OFF
TX
FAIL
AUTO
STBY
OFF
TX
FAIL
AUTO
STBY
OFF
FAIL
STBY
OFF
TX
AUTO
TX
FAIL
AUTO
TX
AUTO
STBY
STBY
OFF
FAIL
OFF
TX
FAIL
AUTO
STBY
OFF
TX
FAIL
STBY
OFF
TX
FAIL
AUTO
AUTO
STBY
OFF
TX
FAIL
AUTO
TX
AUTO
STBY
STBY
OFF
FAIL
OFF
TX
FAIL
FAIL
STBY
OFF
TX
ACT OFF
OFF
V IN
T&T
V IN
AT&T
CONV 0
+12V
10
11
12
13
14
RCU
RCU
RCU
RCU
RCU
RCU
RCU
RCU
RCU
RCU
RCU
RCU
DS1
OMB
AT&T
AT&T
AT&T
AT&T
AT&T
AT&T
AT&T
AT&T
AT&T
AT&T
AT&T
AT&T
AT&T
15
CONV
+5V
5V
12V
FAIL
AUTO
STBY
OFF
TX
FAIL
AUTO
STBY
OFF
TX
FAIL
AUTO
STBY
OFF
TX
FAIL
AUTO
TX
AUTO
STBY
STBY
OFF
FAIL
OFF
TX
FAIL
AUTO
STBY
OFF
TX
FAIL
AUTO
STBY
OFF
TX
FAIL
STBY
OFF
TX
FAIL
AUTO
AUTO
STBY
OFF
TX
FAIL
AUTO
STBY
OFF
TX
FAIL
AUTO
TX
FAIL
OFF
TX
ACT OFF
V IN
AT&T
AT&T
Figure 8-4.
AT&T
AT&T
AT&T
AT&T
AT&T
AT&T
AT&T
401-660-100 Issue 11
AT&T
AT&T
AT&T
AT&T
SHELF 2
AT&T
AT&T
Radio Channel Unit - Shelf 1, Shelf 2 ED-2R833-30 (Figure 1 of 2)
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-18
16
17
SWITCH
/DIV
STBY
STBY
OFF
FAIL
OFF
V IN
SHELF 1
CHANNEL NO. CHANNEL NO. CHANNEL NO. CHANNEL NO. CHANNEL NO. CHANNEL NO. CHANNEL NO. CHANNEL NO. CHANNEL NO. CHANNEL NO. CHANNEL NO. CHANNEL NO.
AUTO
12V
AT&T
12V
T&T
CHANNEL NO. CHANNEL NO. CHANNEL NO. CHANNEL NO. CHANNEL NO. CHANNEL NO. CHANNEL NO. CHANNEL NO. CHANNEL NO. CHANNEL NO. CHANNEL NO. CHANNEL NO.
AUTO
12V
16
17
SWITCH
/DIV
August 2000
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
EQL 162
EQL 012
SHELF 1
TRANSMIT
COMBINER
CONNECTORS
OUTPUTS
EQL 012
EQL 162
SHELF 2
12
INPUTS
REAR VIEW
ECEIVE
IVIDER
ONNECTORS
Figure 8-5.
RCU
REF FREQ.
DIST.
RCU
TRANSMIT
RCU RCU RCU
REF. REC1 REC0
FREQ.
Radio Channel Unit (Rear View) - Shelf 1, Shelf 2 ED-2R833-30
(Figure 2 of 2)
Transmit Combiner BBN-2
One of these units is used to combine the transmit Radio Frequency (RF) outputs
of 12 RCUs into 3 groups of 4 RCUs. Each group has a common RF output cable.
Receive Divider BBN-1
One of these units is used to divide the Receive RF input into 3 groups of 4
RCUs. Each group has a common RF input cable.
Receive Switch BBM-1
One of these units is used to allow the RCU to switch it’s receive input to any of
the Receive Antenna systems at the Cell Site.
Clock and Tone (CAT) Board TN170
One CAT board is located on shelf 1 and another CAT board is located on shelf 2.
This board provides the clock signals necessary for the transfer of data on the
Time Division Multiplexed (TDM) bus, which is always installed "red stripe up."
Tones generated by this board are used during testing. Two CAT boards are used
on the P-RCF. The TN170B is a valid replacement for this board.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-19
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
Power Converter 419AE (+12V)
One +24-volt to +12-volt power converter is used on this shelf.
Radio Channel Unit ED-2R836-30
Twelve RCUs are used on a shelf. The RCU contains baseband signal processing
circuits and a transceiver. The RCU can be used for setup, locate, or voice
channel service. Control outputs are provided from the RCU to dynamically switch
received inputs.
Digital Radio Unit ED-2R920-30
The DRU is the digital radio used with the Time-Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
system. The DRU occupies 2 slots on a shelf. Given that the DRU occupies 2
slots, the number of DRUs that can be housed in the P-RCF is half the number of
RCUs, which is 28 DRUs. For the 2 Growth RCFs, the number of DRUs that can
be housed is also half the number of RCUs, that is, 36 DRUs apiece. Altogether,
an RFS fully-configured with DRUs can house 99 DRUs, including voice and
locate radios. Call setup is done by the DCCH with no setup radios required.
Enhanced Digital Radio Unit 44WR8
The EDRU is an enhanced version of the DRU that is fully backward compatible
with the DRU. Like the RCU, the EDRU occupies 1 slot on a shelf. Two EDRUs can
be installed for every DRU. Due to software limitations, the maximum number of
EDRUs supported is 23 EDRUS per RCF0, 40 EDRUs per RFC1, and 16 EDRUs
per RCF2. The total number of EDRUs per cell should not exceed 79.
Radio Shelf Power
Upgrade
The radio shelf power delivery system may require upgrading as a function of the
number of DRUs and EDRUs installed.
Installing the TRTU and DRU(s)
This section provides installation instructions for the TRTU and DRU(s).
Diagnostic testing should be performed on each installed modular component
(TRTU and DRU). Although a cell may be populated with both DRUs and EDRUs,
it may not house both a TRTU and a T-EDRU. That is, a cell can have either a
TRTU or a T-EDRU installed, but not both.
The diagnostic test for the TRTU should be run before testing the DRU(s). The
diagnostic test for the DRU(s) may be run separately after each component is
installed, or collectively after a group of components are installed.
In Series II Classic cells, insert the TRTU (ED 2R921-30) into RCF 0, Shelf 3
(EQL 132), Slots 11 and 12. In Series IIm and Series IImm cells, insert TRTU in
slot 22 of radio shelf in primary cabinet.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-20
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
Insert the DRU(s) (ED 2R920-30) into the RCF slots. Each DRU uses two shelf
slots. Lucent Technologies recommends installing these radios in even numbered
shelf slots only (i.e., positioned in slots 2-3, 4-5, 6-7, etc.).
Verify that the RCF penthouse is wired correctly for each DRU installed.
Installing the T-EDRU and EDRU(s)
This section provides installation instructions for the T-EDRU and EDRU(s).
Diagnostic testing should be performed on each installed modular component (TEDRU and EDRU). Although a cell may be populated with both DRUs and
EDRUs, it may not house both a TRTU and a T-EDRU. That is, a cell can have
either a TRTU or a T-EDRU installed, but not both.
Installing a Test EDRU (T-EDRU)
To replace a TRTU with a T-EDRU:
1.
The TRTU is removed from service
2.
The TRTU is physically replaced with the T-EDRU
3.
The T-EDRU personality is dowloaded into the T-EDRU
Placed the T-EDRU in the left hand slot of the two slots occupied by the TRTU.
The test radio output must be +4dBm, but the T-EDRU’s unadjusted output power
is +10 dBm. A front panel adjustment can vary the output power by +3 to –4 dB.
To accommodate this difference, the cell software automatically lowers the TEDRU output power by one VRAL step for a difference of -4dB. This changes the
T-EDRU output to +6dBm. Then, manually calibrate the output level to +4 dBm.
This calibration must be performed any time a T-EDRU is placed into service.
CAUTION:
Any time a T-EDRU is installed or replaced for any reason, the power setting
procedures in this section must be performed BEFORE allowing the
T-EDRU to perform diagnostics.
The following procedure is performed at the cell site to replace a TRTU or a
defective T-EDRU with a T-EDRU. The cell site technician should be equipped
with a PC and a dial-in connection to the OMP. If a PC dial-in connection to the
OMP is not available, the cell site technician should be in verbal contact with an
operator at the MSC who can enter and read commands and messages to and
from the OMP.
To remove a TRTU or a defective T-EDRU, perform the following:
1.
Remove the TRTU or the defective T-EDRU from service by entering the
following command at the OMP:
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-21
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
rmv:cell a, trtu;ucl 
Where a is the cell number. The ECP responds with:
IP all specified cell ACT
M 30 RMV:CELL a TRTU, COMPLETED
DEVICE - tty+
MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS #nnnnnn
*30 OP:CELL a TRTU, MANUAL, RMVD
DEVICE - tty+
MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS #nnnnnn
2.
Remove the TRTU or the defective T-EDRU from radio shelf slot 11 and
insert the new EDRU in its place. In Series II Classic cells, insert the TEDRU (44WR8) into RCF 0, Shelf 3 (EQL 132), Slot 11. In Series IIm and
Series IImm cells, insert the T-EDRU in slot 22 of the radio shelf in the
primary cabinet.
3.
On the ceqcom2 RC/V form, verify that T-EDRU equipage is as follows:
4.
■
TDMA RTU -Status (Indicating that the primary cabinet is equipped
with a T-EDRU radio). Set to e
■
TDMA RTU- Slot (Indicating radio shelf slot location). Set to either
11 or 12 (11 Recommended)
■
TDMA RTU - DVCC (Specifies digital verification code of cell).
Generally cell number is use except for 3, 45, 136, and 162.
■
Radio type edru
Download new generic software for T-EDRU by entering the following at the
OMP:
dnld:cell a trtu 
ECP responds with:
PF
A 34 REPT:CELL a NVM UPDATE MAIN CONTROLLER COMPLETED
UNIT SUCCESSFULLY UPDATE TRTU
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-22
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
DEVICE - tty+
MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS #nnnnnn
5.
Diagnose the T-EDRU to ensure that it is working properly by entering the
following at the OMP:
dgn:cell a, trtu 
ECP responds with:
IP all specified cell ACT
ALL TESTS PASSED
6.
On the T-EDRU’s front panel, set the TX switch to OFF.
7.
Enter the follow configuration commands at the OMP:
• cfr:cell a, trtu;start 
ECP responds with:
IP all specified cell ACT
M 30 CFR:CELL a TRTU, ALL WENT WELL
DEVICE - tty+
• cfr:cell a, trtu;config 150:chanl e 
Note:
Channel number must be specified to configure T-EDRU
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-23
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
ECP responds with:
IP all specified cell ACT
M 30 CFR:CELL a TRTU, ALL WENT WELL
DEVICE -tty+
• cfr:cell a, trtu;xmit 300 
ECP responds with:
IP all specified cell ACT
M 30 CFR:CELL a TRTU, ALL WENT WELL
DEVICE -tty+
8.
Set up and calibrate power meter to measure power in the 4 dBm range.
9.
10.
The cable that carries the T-EDRU transmitter input is located at the front
panel of the RTU Switch Panel where the test radio gains access to the
transmit and receive paths. Disconnect that cable. The jack designation for
a Series II classic cell is J1. Using the appropriate adapter, connect the
power meter sensor to the cable.
11.
12.
Estimate the length of cable, in feet, from the back of the T-EDRU to the
point where the power meter is connected to the cable. Multiply that cable
length in feet by 0.25 dB to compensate for cable loss. Subtract the
resulting quantity from +4dBm. This is what the power meter should read
when the T-EDRU power is adjusted in step 12, below. For example, the
cable length for a PCS TDMA Minicell is approximately 2 feet, so the
estimated cable loss is 0.5 dB, and the measured output at the power
meter should be +4 dBm – 0.5 dB = +3.5 dBm.
13.
Set TX switch on T-EDRU front panel to AUTO. TX green LED should light.
14.
Using potentiometer on T-EDRU front panel, adjust radio transmit output
power to the power level determined in step 10.
15.
Set TX switch on T-EDRU front panel to OFF. TX green LED should go off.
16.
Remove the power meter from the cable and reconnect the switch panel
cable.
17.
To turn off the configuration command, enter the following on the OMP :
• stop:cfr;cell a, trtu 
ECP responds with:
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-24
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
IP all specified cell ACT
M 35 CFR:CELL a ABORTED, OVERRIDE HIGHER
PRIORITY
DEVICE - tty+
MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS #nnnnnn
18.
Set TX switch on T-EDRU front panel to AUTO. TX green LED should light.
19.
Restore T-EDRU to operational status by entering either command on the
OMP:
init:cell a:sc  OR rst:cell a, trtu;ucl 
20.
Restore T-EDRU to service by entering the following at the OMP:
rst:cell a, trtu;ucl  (to restore the test radio)
OR
init:cell a:sc  (to restore all radios)
The diagnostic test for the T-EDRU should be run before testing the EDRU(s).
The diagnostic test for the EDRU(s) may be run separately after each component
is installed, or collectively after a group of components are installed.
Installing EDRUs
Insert EDRU(s) into the slots of the RCF(s) or of the radio shelf in the Series IIm/
IImm cabinet. When installing in the Series IIm/IImm cabinet, EDRUs (44WR8)
require two shelf slots. Lucent Technologies recommends equipping these radios
in even numbered shelf slots only (i.e., positioned in slots 2-3, 4-5, 6-7, etc.).
If five or more EDRUs are to be installed in a radio shelf or a single RCU shelf,
verify that shelf power supply system is upgraded. Power upgrade required for
installing EDRUs is a function of the number of EDRUs to be installed, and the
cabinet type in which the EDRUs are installed.
Power to the radio shelf is supplied by +5-volt and +12-volt power converter units
(PCUs). If five or more EDRUs are to be installed in a radio shelf or on a single
RCU shelf, verify that shelf power supply system is upgraded. The power upgrade
is done by replacing +5-volt and +12-volt PCUs and their corresponding circuit
breakers with PCUs and with circuit breakers having a higher current capacity.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-25
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
Verify that the RCF penthouse is wired correctly for each EDRU installed.
Series II Classic Radio Frame
Two Series II classic radio frames are supported; Series II-01 (J-41660A-1) and
Series II-02 (J-41660A-2). Regardless of the cabinet type and the number of
EDRUs to be installed, the +5-volt PCU 415AA should be replaced with +5-volt
PCU 430AB.
The two primary difference in the radio shelf power supply system between the
two frame types are the current capacity of the 5-volt circuit breaker and the +12volt PCU.
When to Replace +5V CONV Circuit Breaker
The +5-volt (+5V CONV) circuit breaker in the Series II-01 frame is rated at 12.5A
and will permit the operation of up to eight EDRUs and two analog RCU. If nine or
more EDRUs are to be installed, replace the +5V CONV circuit breaker with a 25A
circuit beaker.
The +5V CONV circuit breaker in the Series II-02 frame is rated at 15A and will
permit the operation of up to nine EDRUs. If ten or more EDRUs are to be
installed, replace the +5V CONV circuit breaker with a 25A circuit beaker.
When to Replace +12-Volt PCU
The +12-volt PCU (419AA), installed in the Series II-01 (J-41660A-1) frame,
permits the operation of up to eight EDRUs and two analog RCU. If nine or more
EDRUs are to be installed, replace 12-volt PCU (419AA) with PCU (419AE).
The 12-volt PCU (419AC), installed in the Series II-02 (J-41660A-2) frame,
permits the operation of up to eight EDRUs. If nine or more EDRUs are to be
installed, replace 12-volt PCU 419AC with PCU 419AE.
Power Converter Unit and Circuit Breaker Replacement
Replacement of the +5-volt PCU and associated circuit breaker on J41660A-1
and J41660B-1 bays are required for each radio shelf when four or more DRUs or
up to eight EDRUs are to be installed on the shelf. .If a power supply
upgrade is not necessary, proceed to the next section.
To replace +5 volt circuit breaker on RCF ED-2R826-31 Circuit Breaker Panel
(bottom of bay), perform the following:
1.
On power distribution bay, set all circuit breakers assigned to the RCF 0, 1,
and 2 (as equipped) to OFF.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-26
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
2.
Set all circuit breakers on RCF circuit breaker panel to ON. Wait 30
seconds for any residual charge in RCF capacitor panel to discharge, then
set breakers to OFF.
3.
Remove four machine screws from front four corners of circuit breaker
panel and remove top cover. It may be necessary to clip (remove) cable ties
that secure power wires in order to provide additional installation space.
4.
Remove two machine screws from shelf +5V CONV circuit breaker for shelf
being modified.
5.
Remove circuit breaker from panel. Remove two 5/16 nuts from circuit
breaker power terminals and disconnect power wires.
6.
Install new 15A circuit breaker, for DRU/EDRU installation.
7.
Ensure that circuit breaker is oriented correctly, and that line and load
power wiring is correctly replaced on circuit breaker.
8.
Ensure that circuit breaker power terminal nuts are adequately torqued.
9.
Using an 1/8-inch stamp and white ink, stamp “15A” on the front and side
(90 degrees) of the replacement breaker.
10.
Replace all required circuit breakers on panel being modified.
11.
Reinstall top cover on panel; reinstall circuit breaker panel in RCF.
12.
Ensure that power wiring is not kinked or pinched when sliding panel back
into RCF.
13.
Secure panel using four machine screws.
14.
Re-install cable ties that were previously removed.
15.
Repeat this procedure on all RCF bays as required.
Replace Shelf Designation Labels (Customer Option)
1.
2.
Replace two shelf designation strips per shelf to include TDMA circuit
packs:
■
Front label on shelf designation bar identifies circuit pack
nomenclature and slot numbering.
■
Back label on shelf designation bar identifies circuit pack locations
and associated ED number.
Attach new shelf designation labels directly over original labels on RTU
Shelf 3 (RCF 0) and all RCU shelves in the cell under test as follows:
■
■
RCF 0 Shelf 0 (RCC shelf)
— FRONT
No Change
— BACK
No Change
RCF 0 Shelf 1, 2 and RCF 1 Shelf 4, 5 (CAT shelf)
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-27
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
C846908291
— BACK
C846908309
RCF 0 Shelf 3 (RTU shelf)
■
— FRONT
C846909489
—
C846909497
BACK
All other RCU shelves
■
Series II Cell Site
Fan Panel
Assembly
ED-2R824-31
— FRONT
— FRONT
C846908069
— BACK
C846932978
The fan panel assembly contains six variable-speed cooling fans that operate from
+24 volts. Three fans are mounted facing the front and three are mounted facing
the rear. Each fan has an over-heat alarm circuit.
P7
P6
FAN 1
FAN 0
P8
FAN 2
LEVEL 42
FRONT VIEW
FAN 4
FAN 3
FAN 5
P12
P9
P10
P11
TB1
J13
TB1 LOCATED
INSIDE LEFT
REAR OF FAN
ASSEMBLY
REAR VIEW
Figure 8-6.
Fan Panel Assembly ED-2R824-31
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-28
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
One Radio Test Unit (RTU) is used (see Figure 8-7). This shelf differs from the
ED-2R833-30 shelf in that it has eight Radio Channel Units (RCUs) in place of 12.
It also has a DS1 (Digital Signal - Level 1) or Digital Facilities Interface (DFI) board
in place of the Clock And Tone (CAT) board, and it has one RTU. The RTU is
described below.
C A U T IO N
Series II Cell Site
Radio Test Unit
Shelf 3
ED-2R835-30
A2-RTU IN
Figure 8-7.
A4-RTU OUT
Radio Test Unit (RTU) - Shelf 3 ED-2R835-30
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-29
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
Radio Test Unit ED-2R837-30
The RTU is a transmitter and receiver used to test the Cell Site RCU transmit and
receive paths. The RTU works with the RTU switch located in the Antenna
Interface Frame (AIF). The RTU transmits on the mobile transmit frequencies and
receives on the Cell Site transmit frequencies.
TDMA Radio Test Unit ED-2R921-30
The TDMA Radio Test Unit is used to test Digital Radio Units.
Series II Cell Site
Radio Channel
Unit Shelves 4 and
5 ED-2R834-30
Two of these shelves are used. Each shelf (see Figure 8-8) has 12 Radio Channel
Units (RCUs) and has a DS1 (Digital Signal - Level 1) or Digital Facilities Interface
(DFI) card in place of the Clock And Tone (CAT) board (EQL 162)..
012
19AA
PCU
024
038
048
060
072
084
096
108
120
132
144
156
162
ED-2R836-30
ED-2R836-30
ED-2R836-30
ED-2R836-30
ED-2R836-30
ED-2R836-30
ED-2R836-30
ED-2R836-30
ED-2R836-30
ED-2R836-30
ED-2R836-30
ED-2R836-30
TN171
ONV 0
+12V
10
11
12
13
14
RCU
RCU
RCU
RCU
RCU
RCU
RCU
RCU
RCU
RCU
RCU
RCU
DS1
170
415AA
PCU
174
15
CONV1
+5V
16
5V
FAIL
AUTO
STBY
OFF
TX
FAIL
AUTO
STBY
OFF
TX
FAIL
AUTO
STBY
OFF
TX
FAIL
AUTO
STBY
OFF
TX
FAIL
AUTO
STBY
OFF
TX
FAIL
AUTO
STBY
OFF
TX
FAIL
AUTO
STBY
OFF
TX
FAIL
AUTO
STBY
OFF
TX
FAIL
AUTO
STBY
OFF
TX
FAIL
AUTO
STBY
OFF
TX
FAIL
AUTO
TX
FAIL
STBY
STBY
OFF
FAIL
OFF
TX
ACT OFF
FF
IN
V IN
AT&T
AT&T
AT&T
AT&T
AT&T
AT&T
Figure 8-8.
AT&T
AT&T
AT&T
AT&T
AT&T
AT&T
AT&T
401-660-100 Issue 11
AT&T
AT&T
LEVEL 21 (SHELF 4)
LEVEL 13 (SHELF 5)
Radio Channel Unit - Shelf 4, Shelf 5 ED-2R834-30
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-30
CHANNEL NO. CHANNEL NO. CHANNEL NO. CHANNEL NO. CHANNEL NO. CHANNEL NO. CHANNEL NO. CHANNEL NO. CHANNEL NO. CHANNEL NO. CHANNEL NO. CHANNEL NO.
AUTO
2V
17
/DIV
2V
2V
180
BBN1
August 2000
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
TRANSMIT
COMBINER
CONNECTORS
OUTPUTS
LEVEL 21
(SHELF 4)
EQL 012
EQL 162
LEVEL 13
(SHELF 5)
12
INPUTS
REAR VIEW
ECEIVE
WITCH
IVIDER
ONNECTORS
RCU
REF FREQ.
DIST.
Figure 8-9.
Series II Cell Site
Interconnection
Panel Assembly
ED-2R831-30
RCU
TRANSMIT
RCU RCU RCU
REF. REC1 REC0
FREQ.
Radio Channel Unit (Rear View) - Shelf 4, Shelf 5 ED-2R834-30
The G1 interconnection panel assembly provides the coax-connector interface to
and from the Primary Radio Channel Frame (P-RCF). The G2 interconnection
panel assembly (see Figure 8-11) provides the coax-connector interface to and
from the growth RCFs. These interfaces include the following:
■
The transmit and receive Radio Frequency (RF) signals to and from the
Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) and the Linear Amplifier Frame (LAF)
■
The 15-MHz reference frequency input from the AIF
■
Test radio RF to and from the AIF
In addition to the above interfaces, the interconnection panel assembly contains
up to 21 RF power dividers used to combine transmitter outputs and to divide and
distribute receive RF to the Radio Channel Units (RCUs). Also, the
interconnection panel assembly contains one power divider used to distribute the
15-MHz reference frequency used by the RCUs.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-31
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
J11
J11
J11
J11
J11
J11
J11
J11
J11
J11
J11
J11
J11
J11
J11
J11
J11
J11
J11
J11
J11
J10
J10
J10
J10
J10
J10
J10
J10
J10
J10
J10
J10
J10
J10
J10
J10
J10
J10
J10
J10
J10
J9
J9
J9
J9
J9
J9
J9
J9
J9
J9
J9
J9
J9
J9
J9
J9
J9
J9
J9
J9
J9
J8
J8
J8
J8
J8
J8
J8
J8
J8
J8
J8
J8
J8
J8
J8
J8
J8
J8
J8
J8
J8
J7
J7
J7
J7
J7
J7
J7
J7
J7
J7
J7
J7
J7
J7
J7
J7
J7
J7
J7
J7
J7
J6
J6
J6
J6
J6
J6
J6
J6
J6
J6
J6
J6
J6
J6
J6
J6
J6
J6
J6
J6
J6
J5
J5
J5
J5
J5
J5
J5
J5
J5
J5
J5
J5
J5
J5
J5
J5
J5
J5
J5
J5
J5
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
COM
LEVEL 80
FRONT VIEW
J106
P101
J104
J102
P102
J110
J105
REAR VIEW
Figure 8-10. Interconnection Panel ED-2R831-30
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-32
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
J103
J101
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
COM
J11
J11
J11
J11
J11
J11
J11
J11
J11
J11
J11
J11
J11
J11
J11
J11
J11
J11
J11
J11
J11
J10
J10
J10
J10
J10
J10
J10
J10
J10
J10
J10
J10
J10
J10
J10
J10
J10
J10
J10
J10
J10
J9
J9
J9
J9
J9
J9
J9
J9
J9
J9
J9
J9
J9
J9
J9
J9
J9
J9
J9
J9
J9
J8
J8
J8
J8
J8
J8
J8
J8
J8
J8
J8
J8
J8
J8
J8
J8
J8
J8
J8
J8
J8
J7
J7
J7
J7
J7
J7
J7
J7
J7
J7
J7
J7
J7
J7
J7
J7
J7
J7
J7
J7
J7
J6
J6
J6
J6
J6
J6
J6
J6
J6
J6
J6
J6
J6
J6
J6
J6
J6
J6
J6
J6
J6
J5
J5
J5
J5
J5
J5
J5
J5
J5
J5
J5
J5
J5
J5
J5
J5
J5
J5
J5
J5
J5
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
LEVEL 80
FRONT VIEW
J112
P103
J115
J111
REAR VIEW
Figure 8-11. Interconnection Panel ED-2R831-30
The tables that follow identify the Interconnection Panel connectors.
Table 8-4.
Radio Channel Frame Interconnection Panel (ED-2R831-30)
Connector Identification
Jack (Plug)
Conn Type
Function
REF
TNC
15 MHz Reference Input
SET UP 0†
Set Up Antenna (for future use)
RTU IN†
Radio Test Unit Input
RTU OUT†
Radio Test Unit Output
TRANSMIT ANTENNA OUTPUTS
Tx Antenna 0
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-33

---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Create Date                     : 2000:09:21 04:32:05Z
Modify Date                     : 2001:06:20 12:27:01-03:00
Page Count                      : 270
Has XFA                         : No
Creation Date                   : 2000:09:21 04:32:05Z
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 4.05 for Sparc Solaris
Mod Date                        : 2001:06:20 12:27:01-03:00
Metadata Date                   : 2001:06:20 12:27:01-03:00

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools